Home

2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual - Dealer e

1. 5 32 Center DIC Messages 5 25 Engine Oil Messages Engine Power Messages 5 27 Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages 5 28 Lamp Messages 5 1 5 2 Instruments and Controls Tire Messages 5 49 Transmission Messages Vehicle Reminder Messages 5 50 Washer Fluid Messages Vehicle Personalization Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons 5 52 Universal Remote System Universal Remote System 5 61 Universal Remote System Programming 5 61 Universal Remote System Operation 005 5 67 Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the steering column To adjust the steering wheel 1 Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever 2 Move the steering wheel up or down 3 Release the lever to lock the wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Steering Wheel Controls If equipped some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel A A V Next Previous Press to select preset or favorite radio stations select tracks on a CD DVD or navigate an iPod or USB device Instruments and Controls 5 3 Radio To select preset or favorite radio stations Press and release or CB V to go to the next or previous radio station stored as a
2. 7 10 Scheduled Maintenance 11 2 Scheduling Appointments 13 10 Seats Adjustment Front 3 3 Center Seat 0 3 3 Head Restraints 3 2 Heated Front 3 8 Lumbar Adjustment Front 3 6 Power Adjustment Front 3 4 REAP 26 4 00 nc adaatdane 3 10 3 11 Reclining Seatbacks 3 6 Securing Child Restraints 3 66 3 69 3 78 Security Mighty 2245 2cncesuelatene EE ee 5 32 Vehicle 00 cee eee 2 12 i 12 INDEX Service Accessories and Modifications Doing Your Own Work Engine Soon Light Maintenance Records Maintenance General Information Parts Identification Label Publications Ordering Information 1 Scheduling Appointments 1 Servicing the Airbag Shift Lock Control Function Check Automatic Transmission 1 Shifting Into Park cece eee Out of Park 5 Signals Turn and Lane Change 6 6 Snow Plow 2 5 9 125 Specifications and Capacities 12 2 Speedometer 5 14 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 5 30 StabiliTrak System 9 70 Start Assist Hills 9 70 Start Vehicle Remote 2 5 Starter Switch Check 10 39 Starting the Engine 9 37 Star
3. 6 7 Lights Airbag On Off 5 21 Airbag Readiness 5 20 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning 5 28 Brake System Warning 5 27 Charging System 5 24 Cruise Control 5 32 Engine Oil Pressure 5 31 Flash to Pass 6 3 Four Wheel Drive 5 29 Front Fog Lamps 5 32 Lights cont High Beam On 5 32 High Low Beam Changer 6 3 Low Fuel Warning 5 31 Safety Belt Reminders 5 19 SECUTI cece nacdoaesoteensasee 5 32 StabiliTrak Indicator 5 30 Tire Pressure 5 30 Tow Haul Mode 5 29 Locking Rear Axle 9 73 Locks Automatic Door 2 9 Delayed Locking 2 8 DOO sic siinaeded caiacs tas ANSAN 2 8 Lockout Protection 2 9 Power Door 000 2 8 SAC 6 ca 50 sed Bea T ends 2 9 Loss of Control 9 6 Low Fuel Warning Light 5 31 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH SYSTEM 3 57 Lumbar Adjustment 3 6 Front Seats 0 3 6 M Maintenance Records 2 05 11 12 Maintenance Schedule Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 11 8 Scheduled Maintenance 11 2 Transfer Case 9 54 Malfunction Indicator Lamp 5 25 Manual Mirrors
4. 5 61 Using this Manual iv V Vehicle Canadian Owners iii Control cee e eee 9 3 Identification Number VIN 12 1 Load Limits 9 25 Messages 2 2055 5 41 Personalization 5 52 Reminder Messages 5 50 Remote Start 2 5 SOCUMLY osc dgecedanmhew dean 2 12 TOWING esseeri naiiai ea 10 103 Vehicle Care Tire Pressure 10 66 Vehicle Identification Service Parts Identification Label psntcc cit odhee cde 12 1 Ventilation Air 8 11 VISOFS 22 ccc ccc eee eee 2 20 Voltmeter Gauge 5 18 W Warning Brake System Light 5 27 Warning Lights Gauges and Indicators 5 12 WAMINGS cicccagicdensaa hander iv Cautions and Danger iv Hazard Flashers 6 5 Washer Fluid 10 29 Washer Fluid Messages 5 51 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance vis cicics ee dccaenacceraae 10 81 Different Size 10 79 Replacement 10 82 When It Is Time for New Tires 2c eee 10 76 Where to Put the Restraint 3 56 Windows 00eeeee 2 18 Manual s ccacawieaneaaajannes 2 19 POWER ccrcesiriuritiesssssnotd 2 19 Rear oo ccc cece eee ee eee 2 20 Windshield Wiper Washer 5 5 Winter Driving 9 21 Wip
5. 3 37 Passenger Sensing SYSEM sess atarie nepos nes 3 40 Servicing the Airbag Equipped VENICE arin dame cendeddiniee 3 46 Adding Equipment to the Airbag Equipped Vehicle 3 46 Airbag System Check 3 48 Replacing Airbag System Parts After a Crash 3 48 Seats and Restraints Child Restraints Older Children Infants and Young Children Child Restraint Systems Where to Put the Restraint Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System 20005 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash Securing Child Restraints Rear Seat Position Securing Child Restraints Right Front Seat Position Securing Child Restraints Center Front Seat Position 3 2 Seats and Restraints Head Restraints The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions Z WARNING With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck spinal injury in a crash Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash f Pull the head restraint up to raise
6. 2 2 0 5 5 46 Odometer secccscicerrerrpssns 5 14 TMP satis E ET 5 14 Seer le E EE E 9 7 DiIMING EE EEE AE 9 7 RECOVERY sesicendesedegsneasand 9 5 Oil ENQING scere2dansed Seevenes cans 10 7 Engine Oil Life System 10 11 Engine Oil Pressure GaUGe sfseeiicashidecmn cans 5 16 Messages 0 5 45 Pressure Light 5 31 INDEX _i 9 Older Children Restraints 3 49 Online Owner Center 13 6 OnStar System 1 36 Operation Infotainment SYSlEM ss sseciee nde i 7 2 Outlets POWEP ccc eee eee eee eee 5 10 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 10 28 Overheating Engine 10 25 P Park Shifting Into 9 41 Shifting Out of 9 43 Park Tilt Mirrors 2 17 Parking Assist Ultrasonic 9 76 Brakes icccadeseanamamneaed 9 69 Brake and P Park Mechanism Check 10 40 Over Things That Burn 9 43 i 10 INDEX Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Passenger Sensing System Perchlorate Materials Requirements California Personalization Vehicle Phone Bluetooth ieiccis occa adederrs Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker Lamps Power DOOM LOCKS ssccescawaareedas Mirrors 0 cece eee ee Outlets Protection Battery Retained Accessory RAP Seat Ad
7. 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5x150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Trailer Towing on page 9 95 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips Driving and Operating gt A B 44 Example 1 A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 453 kg 1 000 Ibs B Subtract Occupant Weight 68 kg 150 Ibs x 2 136 kg 300 Ibs C Available Occupant and Cargo Weight 317 kg 700 Ibs 9 27 Cp Example 2 A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 453 kg 1 000 Ibs B Subtract Occupant Weight 68 kg 150 Ibs x 5 340 kg 750 Ibs C Available Cargo Weight 113 kg 250 Ibs T Re Refer to your vehicle s tire and load
8. 9 25 Tire and Loading Information Label A B izim ee aeieecciecs should never exceed XXX kg or XXX bs j TIRE oran SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE SEE OWNER MANUAL FOR Moe NEORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker 9 26 The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 10 57 and Tire Pressure on page 10 66 Driving and Operating There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axles See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle
9. 2 23 or plugging the water drainage system Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose debris Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using a clean cloth mild soap and water Do not remove grease from the sunroof 2 24 Keys Doors and Windows NOTES Seats and Restraints Head Restraints Head Restraints Front Seats Seat Adjustment Center Seat Power Seat Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks Heated Front Seats Rear Seats Rear Seats Extended Cab Full Bench Rear Seats All Split Bench and Hybrid Full Bench Safety Belts Safety Belts How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 6 200 ce atae eres Lap Shoulder Belt Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 3 11 Lap Belt Crew and Extended Cab 3 26 Safety Belt Extender 3 27 Safety System Check 3 27 Safety Belt Care 3 28 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts After a Crash 3 28 Airbag System Airbag System 3 29 Where Are the Airbags 3 31 When Should an Airbag lalate nieret nenene 3 32 What Makes an Airbag Inflate oicrctrieretciisuest 3 34 How Does an Airbag Restrain 0 0065 3 35 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 3 35 Airbag On Off Switch
10. Notice Operating your vehicle for extended periods without the front fascia lower air dam installed can cause improper air flow to the engine Always be sure to replace the front fascia air dam when you are finished off road driving After off roading be sure to reinstall the air dam 1 Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward to engage the snaps 2 Install the 2 outboard bolts Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving Z WARNING e Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Continued WARNING Continued e Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle e The heaviest things should be on the floor forward of the rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can e Be sure the load is properly secured so things are not tossed around You will fi
11. Seats and Restraints 3 9 Remote Start Heated Seats When it is cold outside the heated seats may turn on automatically during a remote vehicle start The heated seats will be canceled when the ignition is turned on Press the desired button to use the heated seats after the vehicle is started The lights on the heated seat buttons do not turn on during a remote start The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced This is normal See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 5 for more information 3 10 Seats and Restraints Rear Seats Rear Seats Extended Cab Full Bench Folding the Rear Seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat To fold the seat 1 Pull up on the front of the seat cushion while pulling down on the release strap under the seat cushion 2 Pull the seat cushion up until it latches with the seatback 3 Pull forward on the seat cushion to make sure it is locked in place To unfold the seat 1 Push the seat cushion rearward while pulling the release strap under the seat cushion Pull the seat cushion down until it latches 2 Pull up on the seat cushion to make sure it is locked in place Make sure the safety belts are not twisted or caught in the seat cushion Z WA
12. 9 81 The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides A View displayed by the camera B Corner of the rear bumper 9 82 Disconnecting the Rear Vision Camera The rear vision camera must be disconnected if the tailgate needs to be removed To disconnect the camera 1 Remove the license plate 2 Disconnect the camera connectors from the chassis harness located behind the license plate by pressing on the release tab on each connector Driving and Operating A Chassis harness connector B Release tab C Camera connector 3 Plug the two exposed chassis harness connectors together to prevent contamination A Chassis harness connector B Release tab 4 Feed the wiring harness through the pickup box then plug the camera connectors together to prevent contamination 5 Remove the tailgate See Tailgate on page 2 10 for more information 6 Reinstall the license plate Reverse this procedure to reinstall the rear vision camera and make sure the grommet and connection are secure When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly The RVC system might not work properly or display a clear image if e The RVC is turned off See Turning the Rear Camera System On or Off earlier in this section e Itis dark e The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens e Ice
13. 1 Press and release A or CD VY to select the next or previous track within the selected category 2 Press and hold A or C V to move quickly through the tracks within the selected category 3 Press and release A to move up one track within the selected category E w Mute Push to Talk Press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again to turn the sound on For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar systems press and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with those systems See Bluetooth on page 7 50 and the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information C V End Press to reject an incoming call or end a current call SRCE Source Voice Recognition Press to switch between the radio and CD and for equipped vehicles the DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary For vehicles with the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information A Seek Press to go to the next radio station while in AM FM or XM For vehicles with or without a navigation system Press D to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot Press to select a track or a folder when navigating folders on an iPod or USB device For vehicles with a navigation system 1 Press and hold until a beep is heard to place the radio into SCAN mode A s
14. 3 Before placing a child in the child restraint make sure it is securely held in place To check grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth There should be no more than 2 5 cm 1 in of movement for proper installation Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash Z WARNING A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure the LATCH system is working properly after a crash see your dealer to have the system inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash new LATCH system parts may be needed New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash Securing Child Restraints Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH Ifa child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers f
15. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 Z WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When changing a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See f a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 84 Lightly coat the center of the wheel hub with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust build up Do not get grease on the flat wheel mounting surface or on the wheel nuts or bolts If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS reset the TPMS sensors after rotating the tires See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10 69 Vehicle Care 10 75 Make sure the spare tire if your vehicle has one is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools under Tire Changing on page 10 86 Dual Tire Rotation When the vehicle is new or whenever a wheel wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced check the wheel nut torque after 160 1 600 and 10 000 km 100 1 000 a
16. Some delay between shifting and when the indicator light comes on is normal Driving and Operating 9 55 Recommended Transfer Case Settings Transfer Case Settings po af aw TN po Normal f ves TT p Severe Tt ves Driving Conditions a l S e Vericleintow e See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10 103 or Towing the Vehicle on page 10 103 Notice Driving on clean dry pavement in four wheel drive for an extended period of time can cause premature wear on the vehicle s powertrain Do not drive on clean dry pavement in Four Wheel Drive for extended periods of time 4 Four Wheel Drive Low This setting also engages the front axle and delivers extra torque You may never need Four Wheel Drive Low It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose Four Wheel Drive Low if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and while climbing or descending steep hills 9 56 If the vehicle has StabiliTrak shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low will turn Traction Control and StabiliTrak off See StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 A parking brake symbol is located next to the N Neutral symbol as a reminder to set the parking brake before shifting the transfer case into N Neutral Driving and Operating Z WARNING Shifting the transfer case to N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park You or someone else could be
17. 2 15 Manual Mode 9 50 Manual Windows 2 19 Memory Features 1 13 Messages Airbag System 5 48 Anti Theft Alarm System 5 48 Battery Voltage and Charging 5 5 41 Brake System 5 42 Door Ajal vince 22x cexsiee eens 5 43 Engine Cooling System 5 44 Engine Oil 5 45 Engine Power 5 45 Messages cont Fuel System 5 46 Key and Lock 5 46 LAMP amp fickccstentnissenroe sede 5 46 Object Detection System 5 46 Ride Control System 5 47 Starting the Vehicle 5 48 MIS scat tadaan dudhaus canteen 5 49 Transmission 5 50 Vehicle asciadcnsunmacraadtacceartieaves 5 41 Vehicle Reminder 5 50 Washer Fluid 5 51 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview 0000ee 2 18 CONVEX eas various crtaian ened 2 15 FOIGING cocaqietasvieesexdene 2 16 Heated 0 008 2 17 Manual svvei cises ci ecaaantedes 2 15 Manual Rearview 2 18 Park Tilt wecvacrid cecde carbene 2 17 POWEF cece eee cence eee 2 16 Trailer TOW 0000 2 15 Monitor System Tire Pressure N Navigation Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 13 18 New Vehicle Break In 9 34 Noise Control System 10 38 O Object Detection System Messages
18. Automatic Crash Response Emergency Services Crisis Assist Stolen Vehicle Assistance Vehicle Diagnostics Remote Door Unlock Roadside Assistance Turn by Turn Navigation and Hands Free Calling are available on most vehicles Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles For more information see the OnStar Owner s Guide visit www onstar com U S or www onstar ca Canada contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or push the button to speak with an OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week For a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in the glove box OnStar service is subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions included in the OnStar Glove Box Kit OnStar service requires wireless communication networks and the Global Positioning System GPS satellite network Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles at all times In Brief 1 37 OnStar service can t work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area and the wireless service provider has coverage network capacity reception and technology compatible with OnStar service Service involving location information about the vehicle can t work unless GPS signals are available unobstructed and compatible with the OnStar hardware The vehicle has to h
19. If the knob is turned to the Four Wheel Drive Low position when the vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 5 km h 3 mph and the transmission is in N Neutral After 30 seconds the transfer case will shift to Four Wheel Drive High mode Shifting Out of Four Wheel Drive Low To shift from Four Wheel Drive Low to Four Wheel Drive High or Two Wheel Drive High the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 km h 3 mph with the transmission in N Neutral and the ignition in ON RUN The preferred method for shifting out of Four Wheel Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving 1 6 to 3 2 km h 1 to 2 mph Turn the knob to the Four Wheel Drive High or Two Wheel Drive High position You must wait for the Four Wheel Drive High or Two Wheel Drive High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear Driving and Operating 9 61 Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging the vehicle always wait for the mode indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four Wheel Drive Low and Four Wheel Drive Hi
20. Instruments and Controls Transmission Temperature Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP displays This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Celsius C or degrees Fahrenheit F Trailer Gain and Output On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system the trailer brake display appears in the DIC Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting This setting can be adjusted from 0 0 to 10 0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer any time a trailer with electric brakes is connected Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars Dashes may appear in the OUTPUT display To adjust trailer gain see Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing Equipment on page 9 112 for more information Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone See Compass on page 5 6 for more information Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass See Compass on page 5 6 for more information Oil Life To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the curre
21. Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path such as boulders trees logs or ruts What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you do not know It is the smart way to find out Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion Driving Uphill Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill e Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel e Geta smooth start up the hill and try to maintain speed Not using more power than needed can avoid spinning the wheels or sliding Z WARNING Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up e Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Driving and Operating 9 13 e Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of the hill e Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills e Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you are there e Use hea
22. See Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 4 for more information In Brief 1 11 Lumbar Adjustment Manual Lumbar If equipped increase or decrease manual lumbar support by turning the knob forward or rearward See Lumbar Adjustment on page 3 6 for more information 1 12 In Brief Power Lumbar To adjust the power lumbar support if equipped e On vehicles with two way lumbar press and hold the top or bottom of the control to increase or decrease lumbar support e On vehicles with four way lumbar press and hold the front or rear of the control to increase or decrease lumbar support To raise or lower the height of the support press and hold the top or bottom of the control See Lumbar Adjustment on page 3 6 for more information Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks To recline a manual seatback 1 2 Lift the lever Move the seatback to the desired position and then release the lever to lock the seatback in place Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked To return the seatback to the upright position 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position 2 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3 6 for more information Power Reclining Seatbacks To adjust a power seatback if equipped e Tilt the top of the con
23. and DD MM day and month displays 2 Press the softkey located below the desired option 3 Press the button again to apply the desired option or let the screen time out 5 10 Instruments and Controls MP3 Radio with a Six Disc CD Player To set the time and date 1 Turn the ignition key to ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN then press the button to turn the radio on 2 Press the MENU button and then the softkey under the tab to display HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year 3 Press the softkey located under any one of the tabs to change that setting 4 To increase the time or date do one of the following Press the softkey below the selected tab e Press the SEEK button e Press the D gt FWD button e Turn the Jd knob clockwise 5 To decrease the time or date do one of the following e Press the K SEEK button Press the lt lt REV button e Turn the dd knob counterclockwise To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month day to day month 1 Press the MENU button and then the softkey under the tab 2 Press the softkey located below the forward arrow tab 12H 24H the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month displays 3 Press the softkey located below the desired option 4 Press the MENU button again to apply the desired option or let the screen time o
24. button and request a vehicle diagnostic check If the light appears clear no light appears your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated Push the button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active Keys Doors and Windows Keys and Locks KEYS sctni daps tens ceetshinn pE a ea aE 2 2 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Syste Meest eet ed eis eed 2 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation 2 3 Remote Vehicle Start 2 5 Door Locks 00 2 8 Power Door Locks 2 8 Delayed Locking 2 8 Automatic Door Locks 2 9 Lockout Protection 2 9 Safety Locks 2 9 Keys Doors and Windows 2 1 Doors Rear Doors Extended Cab 2 10 Tailgate 2 2000 2 10 Vehicle Security Vehicle Security 2 12 Anti Theft Alarm System 2 12 Immobilizer 2 13 Immobilizer Operation 2 13 Exterior Mirrors Convex Mirrors 2 15 Manual Mirrors 2 15 Trailer Tow Mirrors 2 15 Power Mirrors 2 16 Folding Mirrors 2 16 Heated Mirrors 2 17 Park Tilt Mirrors 2 17 Interior Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror 2 18 Automatic Dimming Rearview MUI OF ercreresiassesinierrrss 2 18 Windows WINdOWS iacccdsresacee tastes 2 18 Manual Windows 2 19
25. 3 22 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 3 27 If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle check if the correct buckle is being used Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary Seats and Restraints 4 If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster move it to the height that is right for you See Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster later in this section 5 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle The belt should return to its stowed position Before a door is closed be sure the safety belt is out of the way If a door is slammed against a safety belt damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger Adjust the height so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it The belt should be close to but not contacting the neck Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a
26. Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 10 68 and Tire Pressure on page 10 66 for more information TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires is low This message also displays LEFT FRT left front RIGHT FRT right front LEFT RR 5 49 left rear or RIGHT RR right rear to indicate the location of the low tire The low tire pressure warning light will also come on See Tire Pressure Light on page 5 30 You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 10 57 Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 and Tire Pressure on page 10 66 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 5 50 Transmission Messages SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVE If the vehicle has four wheel drive this message may display if a problem occurs with the four wheel drive system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Make sure the key is in the LOCK OFF position for at least one minute and then restart the vehicle and check
27. To move the seat back farther press the easy exit seat button again until the seat is all the way back If something has blocked the driver seat while recalling the exit position the recall may stop Remove the obstruction then press and hold the power seat control rearward for two seconds Try recalling the exit position again If the exit position is still not recalling see the dealer for service See Easy Exit Recall and Easy Exit Setup under Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information 3 6 Seats and Restraints Lumbar Adjustment Manual Lumbar If equipped increase or decrease manual lumbar support by turning the knob forward or rearward Power Lumbar To adjust the power lumbar support if equipped e On vehicles with two way lumbar press and hold the top or bottom of the control to increase or decrease lumbar support e On vehicles with four way lumbar press and hold the front or rear of the control to increase or decrease lumbar support To raise or lower the height of the support press and hold the top or bottom of the control Reclining Seatbacks Z WARNING Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even when buckled up the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body Instead it will be in front of y
28. later in this section Trip Odometer Press the trip fuel button until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either kilometers km or miles since the last reset for the trip odometer Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the set reset button while the trip odometer is displayed You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the set reset button for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of kilometers km or miles driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 8 km 5 miles before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 8 km 5 miles As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 8 2 km 5 1 miles 8 4 km 5 2 miles etc Fuel Range Press the trip fuel button until FUEL
29. 6 Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position Z WARNING Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park The driver or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N Neutral 7 Shift the transfer case to N Neutral See Shifting into Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 9 54 for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for the vehicle 8 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF After towing see Shifting Out of Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 9 54 Appearance Care Exterior Care Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 Washing the Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash t
30. 6 0LV8 Dual Rear Wheels 4 10 6 260 kg 13 800 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 3500 Series 4WD Extended Cab e 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels 3 73 4 173 kg 9 200 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels 4 10 5 897 kg 13 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs Conventional Trailer 4 10 6 441 kg 14 200 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0LV8 Single Rear Wheels Fifth Wheel Trailer 4 10 6 214 kg 13 700 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Dual Rear Wheels 3 73 4 037 kg 8 900 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Dual Rear Wheels 4 10 6 078 kg 13 400 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box e 6 0L V8 3 73 4173 kg 9 200 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Conventional Trailer 4 10 5 897 kg 13 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0LV8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 4 10 6 214 kg 13 700 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs Driving and Operating 9 109 Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR a 3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box e 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels 4 128 kg 9 100 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels 4 10 5 897 kg 13 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs Conventional Trailer 6 0LV8 Single Rear Wheels tate Ag 4 10 6 169 kg 13 600 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Dual Rear Wheels 3 946 kg 8 700 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Dual Rear Wheels 5 987 kg 13 200 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs a The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight o
31. Also see Adding Equipment to the Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 3 46 10 4 Vehicle Care Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information ZN WARNING You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task Continued WARNING Continued Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners Metric and English fasteners can be easily confused If the wrong fasteners are used parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If doing some of your own service work use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 13 15 This vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Airbag System Check on page 3 48 Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed See Maintenance Records on page 11 12 Hood To open the hood ges Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle to the left of the brake pedal 2 Go to the front of the
32. Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function CHECK cnososccktatecsanens Ignition Transmission Lock CHECK sas iscceaarssaaunaatd Park Brake and P Park Mechanism Check Wiper Blade Replacement Glass Replacement Headlamp Aiming Headlamp Aiming 10 25 10 28 10 28 10 29 10 29 10 30 10 32 10 34 10 34 10 36 10 37 10 38 10 39 10 40 10 41 10 41 10 42 Vehicle Care Bulb Replacement Bulb Replacement Halogen Bulbs Headlamps Pick Up Box Identification and Fender Marker LAMPS 22028 ccceoiceiwh did Taillamps Chassis Cab Models 20 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up LAMPS che crenn Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL and Cargo Lamp License Plate Lamp Replacement Bulbs Electrical System Electrical System Overload Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0005 Engine Compartment Fuse BlOCK 25542 veer cardnnaaraus Instrument Panel Fuse Block 00 00 ee eee 10 2 Vehicle Care Wheels and Tires TIES sfoadsapoehshasiice sve aaries 10 57 Tire Sidewall Labeling 10 58 Tire Designations 10 61 Tire Terminology and Definitions 10 62 Tire Pressure 10 66 Tire Pressure for High Speed Operation 10 67 Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 00045 10 68
33. C the jack handle extensions D and the wheel wrench E 1 Do a safety check before proceeding See f a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 84 for more information 2 NUS wy pCa T Via S If your vehicle has wheel nut caps loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nut caps the wheel nut caps are designed to stay with the center cap after they are loosened Remove the entire center cap If the wheel has a smooth center cap place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry it out 10 89 Vehicle Care 3 Use the wheel wrench and turn it counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts Do not remove the wheel nuts yet 10 90 Vehicle Care t A Front Position 1500 Models Position the jack under the vehicle as shown If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle 1500 Model vehicles position the jack under the bracket attached to the vehicle s frame behind the flat tire Front Position All Other Models Position the jack under the vehicle as shown If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle all other models position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire Rear Position 1500 Models If the flat tire is on the rear for 1500 models position the jack under the rear axle about 2 inches 5 cm inboard of the shock absorber bracket
34. Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on Driving and Operating 9 87 To ensure quick starts in the wintertime the E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798 If you have trouble starting on E85 it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate If this happens switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve starting For good starting and heater efficiency below 0 C 32 F the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than 70 ethanol It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible do not add less than 11 L 3 gal when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 11 km 7 mi to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration 9 88 E85 has less energy per liter gallon than gasoline so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline See Filling the Tank on page 9 88 Notice Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle s fuel system Do not add anything to E85 Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice This vehicl
35. OOP O N Maintenance when Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer See this manual s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Driving and Operating Trailer Towing If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Do not tow a trailer during break in See New Vehicle Break In on page 9 34 for more information Z WARNING The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all The driver and passengers could be seriously injured The vehicle may also be damaged the resulting repairs would not be covered by the Continued 9 95 WARNING Continued vehicle warranty Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehic
36. See Engine Oil on page 10 7 5 45 Engine Power Messages ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays and a chime may sound when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating on page 10 25 for more information This message also displays when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible 5 46 Fuel System Messages FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and a chime may sound if the fuel level is low Refuel as soon as possible See Fuel Gauge on page 5 15 and Fuel on page 9 84 for more information TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message may display along with the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5 25 Reinstall the fuel cap fully See Filling the Tank on page 9 88 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fue
37. The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking The vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When parts of the braking system are replaced be sure to get new approved replacement parts If this is not done the brakes might not work properly For example installing disc brake pads that are wrong for the vehicle can change the balance between the front and rear brakes for the worse The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed 10 32 Vehicle Care Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for the location of the reservoir There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down e The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear When new linings are installed the fluid level goes back up e A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level Have the brake hydraulic system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well Do not top off the brake fluid Adding fluid does not correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake
38. Underinflated tires or tires that do not have enough air can result in Tire overloading and over heating which could lead to a blowout Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy Overinflated tires or tires that have too much air can result in Unusual wear e Poor handling e Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle This label shows the vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for the tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support the vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight the vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 How you load the vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check the tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare tire if the vehicle has one See Full Size Spare Tire on page 10 97 for additional information How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure You cannot tell if the tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tir
39. Use the Four Wheel Drive High position when extra traction is needed such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages the front axle to help drive the vehicle This is the best setting to use when plowing snow 4 Four Wheel Drive Low This setting also engages the front axle and delivers extra torque You may never need this setting It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose Four Wheel Drive Low while driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and while climbing or descending steep hills If the vehicle has StabiliTrak shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low will turn Traction Control and StabiliTrak off See StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 Driving and Operating Z WARNING Shifting the transfer case to N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N Neutral See Parking Brake on page 9 69 N Neutral Shift the vehicle s transfer case to N Neutral only when towing the vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10 103 or Towing the Vehicle on page 10 103 for more information If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service See SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message under Transmission Messages on page 5 50 Shiftin
40. apply the brakes See Braking on page 9 3 It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Driving and Operating 9 5 Off Road Recovery The vehicle s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm 3 to 5in about one eighth turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway 9 6 Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough fric
41. child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments Seats and Restraints Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments B A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle Atop tether anchor is built into the vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to
42. coming through the system on the driver or passenger side of the vehicle The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air always flows through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature The driver side or passenger side temperature display shows the temperature setting increasing or decreasing The passenger temperature setting can be set to match the driver temperature setting by pressing the PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator When the passenger temperature setting is set different than the driver setting the indicator on the PASS button illuminates and both the driver side and passenger side temperature displays are shown When in defrost mode the passenger temperature setting cannot be changed Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When automatic operation is active the system controls the inside temperature the air delivery and the fan speed Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode 1 Press the AUTO button When AUTO is selected the display changes to show the current temperature s and AUTO is lit on the display The current air delivery mode and fan speed are also displayed for about five seconds When AUTO is selected the air conditioning
43. it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system For example the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on off switch is turned off Continued WARNING Continued To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 for more information including important safety information If the word ON or the on symbol is lit it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 for more information including important safety information If after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the airbag on off switch See your dealer for service Instruments and Controls Passenger Airbag Status Indicator If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position unless there is an airbag off switch located in the glove box If there is an airbag off switch the vehicle does not have a passenger system system See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 The passenger airbag status indicator is on the overhead console See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 40 for important safety information In addition if the vehicle has a passenger sensi
44. on the overhead console 2 Move the screen to the desired position When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the screen remains on This is normal and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers for the remote control They are located at the rear of the console Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information Infotainment System 7 43 Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section 7 44 Infotainment System Objects blocking the line of sight could also affect the function of the remote control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot the remote contro power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and
45. or XM if equipped press the seek arrows to go to the previous or to the next station or channels and stay there This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio Press and hold either seek arrow until the display flashes to tune to an individual station The display stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio While listening to a disc press the left seek arrow to go back to the start of the current track or chapter if more than 10 seconds have played Press the right seek arrow to go the next track or chapter on the disc This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc While a DVD video menu is being displayed press either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu Hold either seek arrow to perform a cursor left or right on the menu Infotainment System 7 49 PROG Program Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio While a CD or DVD A disc is playing press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD A This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are list
46. or downhill Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers Failure to operate the vehicle correctly off road could result in loss of vehicle control or vehicle rollover Off roading involves some new skills That is why it is very important that you read these driving tips and suggestions to help make off road driving safer and more enjoyable Driving and Operating 9 7 Before You Go Off Roading e Have all necessary maintenance and service work done e Make sure there is enough fuel that fluid levels are where they should be and that the spare tire is fully inflated e Be sure to read all the information about four wheel drive vehicles in this manual e Make sure all underbody shields if the vehicle has them are properly attached e Know the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving or check with law enforcement people in the area e Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will be on private land 9 8 Driving and Operating If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle you can remove the front fascia lower air dam The air dam is held in place by 2 bolts and 10 snaps accessible from underneath the front fascia To remove the air dam 1 Remove the 2 outboard air dam bolts 2 With a flat blade tool disengage the snaps 3 After the bolts are removed and the snaps are disengaged push forward on the air dam until it is free
47. order e Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode has been chosen as the default display The new track name displays 7 28 File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the file name do not display Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playlists that have an m3u or pls file extension and are stored on a USB device may be supporte
48. rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS 210 220 310 If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range e Check the distance The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal e Check the transmitter s battery See Battery Replacement later in this section e If the transmitter is still not working correctly see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Keys Doors and Windows 2 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions work up to 60 m 195 ft away from the vehicle There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 3 With Remote Start without Remote Start Similar Q Remote Vehicle Start For vehicles with this feature press Q to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 5 for additional information Lock Press to lock all the doors If enabled through the Driver Information Center DIC the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred If enabled through the DIC the horn chirps when is pressed again within three seconds See Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for additional information Pressing arms the content theft deterrent system See Anti Thef
49. will turn the engine off Place the transmission shift lever in P Park 10 Release the parking brake prior 11 to moving the vehicle Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF Shifting Out of Neutral To shift the transfer case out of N Neutral do the following 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off and shift the transmission to N Neutral 3 Turn the transfer case dial to Two Wheel Drive High After the transfer case has shifted out of N Neutral the N Neutral light will go out 4 Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging the vehicle always wait for the mode indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear 5 Start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the different modes may cause the transfer case to enter the shift protection mode This will protect the transfer case from possible damage and will only allow the transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to three minutes Automatic Transfer Case The transfer case knob is located next to the steering column Use the dial to s
50. you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Seats and Restraints 3 13 Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the The person keeps going until vehicle The rider does not stop stopped by something Ina real vehicle it could be the windshield Information Provided by TS ay 3 14 Seats and Restraints or the instrument panel or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q Will be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if am wearing a safety belt A You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and g
51. 2 Lock Feature Stoplamps Center High Mounted Stoplamp Rear Climate Controls 15 Body Control Module BCM 16 Accessory Power Outlets Interior Lamps 18 Power Door Lock 1 Unlock Feature 19 Rear Seat Entertainment Ultrasonic Rear 20 Parking Assist Power Liftgate 21 Power Door Lock 1 Lock Feature 22 Driver Information Center DIC Cooled Seats Vehicle Care 10 55 Driver Seat Module Remote Keyless Entry System Driver Power Door Lock Unlock Feature Circuit Breaker Driver Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Harness Connector Driver Door LT DR Harness Connection BODY Harness Connector BODY Harness Connector 10 56 Vehicle Care Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel to the left of the steering column Top View CBi Bopy 2 CB2 Eg cezai L j CB4 ffeaounen BODY 1 z HEADLINER BODY 3 3 SEO UPFITTER Harness Connector Body Harness BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 Body Harness HEADLINER Headliner Harness 3 Connector 3 HEADLINER Headliner Harness 2 Connector 2 HEADLINER Headliner Harness 1 Connector 1 Special Equipment SEO f UPFITTER Option Upfitter Harness Connector Circuit Breaker Passenger Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker Driver Seat Circuit Breaker Rear
52. 5 2 miles etc Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear To select a language 1 Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays 2 While in the ODOMETER display press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until the currently set language displays 3 Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages The available selections are ENGLISH default FRANCAIS French ESPANOL Spanish and NO CHANGE 4 Once the desired language is displayed release the trip odometer reset stem to set the choice Instruments and Controls Engine Hours To display the ENGINE HOURS place the ignition in LOCK OFF or ACC ACCESSORY then press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while viewing the ODOMETER This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items without DIC Buttons Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear To select a language 1 Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays 2 While in the ODOMETER display press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until the currently set language displays 5 39 3 Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available lang
53. Automatic Transmission Vehicles with an Allison Transmission or Hydra Matic 6 Speed Automatic Transmission have a Tow Haul Mode The Tow Haul Mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling providing increased performance vehicle control and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy loads Driving and Operating Turn the Tow Haul Mode on and off by pressing the button located on the end of the shift lever When the tow haul is on a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on See Tow Haul Mode Light on page 5 29 for more information Also see Tow Haul Mode under Towing Equipment on page 9 112 for more information Grade Braking Allison Transmission or Hydra Matic 6 Speed Automatic Transmission The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever While in Range Selection Mode Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range of gears Grade Braking is only active while the Tow Haul Mode is selected and you are not in the Range Selection Mode See Tow Haul Mode listed previously and Manual Mode on page 9 50 for more information on the Range Selection Mode Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by automatically implementing a shift schedule that utilizes the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle This r
54. Bass Midrange or Treble To adjust the bass midrange or treble 1 Press the JJ knob until the tone control tabs display 2 Highlight the desired tone control tab by doing one of the following e Press the Jd knob s Press the softkey under the desired tab 3 Adjust the setting by doing one of the following e Turn the Jd knob clockwise or counterclockwise e Press the 1 SEEK or K SEEK Press the D gt FWD or lt lt REV If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the softkey positioned under the BASS MID or TREB tab for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press the dd knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds EQ Equalization Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source If the radio has a Bose audio system the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AM FM Radio and AM FM Radio with CD To adjust the balance or fade 1 Press C or press the JJ knob until the speaker control label displ
55. Control Systems with Heater Only on page 8 4 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8 5 for more information 2 17 Park Tilt Mirrors If the vehicle has the memory package the passenger and or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R Reverse This feature lets the driver view the curb when parallel parking The mirror s return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of R Reverse or the ignition is turned off or to OFF LOCK Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information Center DIC See Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information 2 18 Interior Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Hold the mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view of behind your vehicle Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you Push the tab at the bottom of the mirror forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the headlamps of the vehicle behind you The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the ignition is turned to start On Off Press to turn the dimming feature on or off Keys Doors and Windows The vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera RVC See Rear Vision Camera RVC on page 9 78 for more
56. Fill Plug B Drain Plug All Except 1500 Series A Fill Plug B Drain Plug e When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level from 0 mm 0 in to 3 2mm 1 8 in below the fill plug hole e When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug hole What to Use Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 to determine what kind of lubricant to use Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during production They are not filled to reach a certain level When checking the fluid level on any axle variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume Also if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area Therefore a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour or two Remember that the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading How to Check Lubr
57. Fixed Code unit If you do not see a row of dip switches return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code Your hand held transmitter can have between 8 to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of transmitter The garage door opener receiver motor head unit could also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Home Remote If the total number of switches on the motor head and hand held transmitter are different or if the dip switch settings are different use the dip switch settings on the motor head unit to program the Universal Home Remote The motor head dip switch settings can also be used when the original hand held transmitter is not available bdalleaina Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions Tela Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions The panel of switches might not appear exactly as they do in the examples above but they should be similar Instruments and Controls 5 65 The switch positions on the hand held transmitter could be labeled as follows A switch in the up position could be labeled as Up or On A switch in the down position could be labeled as Down or Off A switch in the middle position could be labeled as Middle 0 or Neutral Write down the 8 to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows When a switch is in the up po
58. G onto the pin in the mounting bracket F Return them to their original location in the vehicle For more information refer to Removing the Spare Tire and Tools for more information Full Size Spare Tire Your vehicle when new had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See Tire Pressure on page 10 66 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools under Tire Changing on page 10 86 Notice If the vehicle has four wheel drive and the different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle do not drive in four wheel drive until you can have your flat tire repaired and or replaced You could damage the vehicle and the repair costs would not be covered by your warranty Never use four wheel drive when the different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires originally installed on your vehicle This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle so it is all right to drive on it If your vehicle has four wheel drive and the different size spare tire is installed keep the vehicle in two wheel drive Vehicle Care 10 97 Afte
59. GM logo GMC the GMC Truck Emblem and SIERRA are trademarks and or service marks of General Motors LLC its subsidiaries affiliates or licensors This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual Litho in U S A Part No 25965915 B Second Printing Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for GMC Division wherever it appears in this manual If the vehicle has the Duramax Diesel engine see the Duramax diesel supplement for additional and specific information on this engine If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Introduction iii Canadian Vehicle Owners Propri taires Canadiens A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer or from On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en francais aupr s du concessionnaire ou a l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 Num ro de poste 6438 de langue frangaise www helminc com 2010 General Motors LLC All Rights Reserved iv Introduction Using this Man
60. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 5 Instrument Cluster on page 5 13 Shift Lever See Automatic Transmission on page 9 46 Tow Haul Selector Button If Equipped See Tow Haul Mode on page 9 51 Range Selection Mode Allison Transmission and Hydra Matic 6 Speed Button If Equipped See Manual Mode on page 9 50 Infotainment on page 7 1 Instrument Panel Storage on page 4 1 Integrated Trailer Brake Controller If Equipped See Trailer Towing on page 9 95 Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6 7 Data Link Connector DLC Out of View See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5 25 Hood on page 10 5 Parking Brake on page 9 69 Dome Lamps on page 6 8 Fog Lamps on page 6 6 If Equipped Cruise Control on page 9 73 Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 5 2 9 In Brief 1 3 Horn on page 5 5 Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 3 If Equipped Automatic Transfer Case Control If Equipped See Four Wheel Drive on page 10 34 Ashtray If Equipped See Ashtrays on page 5 12 and Cigarette Lighter on page 5 11 StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 If Equipped Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9 76 If Equipped Pedal Adjust Button If Equipped See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 9 35 Exhaust Brake If Equipped See Brakes in the Duramax Diesel Supplement 1 4 In Brief V Power Outlets on page 5 10 W Climate Control Systems with Air Condi
61. If a problem is experienced see your dealer When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment See Add On Electrical Equipment on page 9 125 Notice Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only such as cell phone charge cords 5 11 Cigarette Lighter To use the cigarette lighter push it in all the way and let go When it is ready for use the lighter pops back out Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating can occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating 5 12 Ashtrays The vehicle may have a front ashtray located near the center of the instrument panel Pull on the door to open it The ashtray may have a cigarette lighter Notice If papers pins or other flammable items are put in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the ashtray open the door and pull the ashtray bin toward you To replace the ashtray insert the ashtray bin inside the ashtray door and press down until it engages Instruments and
62. If the radio or other accessories are left on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle 4 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio 5 Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive and negative terminal locations on that vehicle The positive terminal is located under a red plastic cover at the positive battery post To uncover the positive terminal open the red plastic cover 10 99 Vehicle Care If your vehicle has a gasoline engine the remote negative terminal is a stud located on the right front of the engine where the negative battery cable attaches If your vehicle has a diesel engine the remote negative terminal is the negative post on the auxiliary battery on the driver side of the engine compartment 10 100 Vehicle Care For more information on the location of the remote positive and remote negative terminals see Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 ZN WARNING An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep
63. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times Seats and Restraints 3 19 ZN WARNING You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest 3 20 Seats and Restraints Q What is wrong with this l PN AIT A The belt is behind the body Z WARNING You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest Q What is wrong with this A The belt is twisted across the body Z WARNING You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it Lap Sho
64. Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on the engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Customer Information Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of the vehicle Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The Owner Manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus handling and shipping fees Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 U S plus handling and shipping fees 13 15 Current and Past Models Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc at www helminc com Or write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Make checks pa
65. OFF Do not turn the engine off when the vehicle is moving This will cause a loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags Driving and Operating In an emergency 1 Brake using a firm and steady pressure Do not pump the brakes repeatedly This may deplete power assist requiring increased brake pedal force 2 Shift the vehicle to neutral This can be done while the vehicle is moving After shifting to neutral firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location 3 Come to a complete stop shift to P Park and turn the ignition to LOCK OFF On vehicles with an automatic transmission the shift lever must be in P Park to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 4 Set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 9 69 The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center If this happens move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC ACCESSORY If this doesn t work then the vehicle needs service Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key Use the correct key make sure it is all the way in and turn it only with your hand If the key cannot be turned by hand see your dealer B ACC ACCESSORY This position lets things like the radio and the windshield wipers operate while the engine is off Use this position if the vehicle must be pu
66. Offices Mexico on page 13 5 for more information Customer Assistance Offices U S and Canada GMC encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail GMC the letter should be addressed to United States GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 www GMC com 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 1 800 462 8583 For Text Telephone Devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 462 8782 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmc ca 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone Devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Customer Information 13 5 Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Av Ejercito Nacional 843 Col Granada C P 11520 Mexico D F 01 800 466 0801 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0801 Customer Assistance Offices Mexico To contact the Customer Assistance Center CAC use the phone numbers listed in this secti
67. RANGE displays This display shows the approximate number of remaining kilometers km or miles the vehicle can be driven without refueling The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank This estimate will change if driving conditions change Instruments and Controls For example if driving in traffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving Fuel range cannot be reset Average Economy Press the trip fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays This display shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km or miles per gallon mpg This number is calculated based on the number of L 100 km mpg recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset AVG ECONOMY press and hold the set reset button 5 35 Fuel Used Press the trip fuel button until FUEL USED displays This display shows the number of liters L or gallons gal of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the set
68. Rear Position All Other Models For all other models position the jack under the rear axle between the spring anchor and the shock absorber bracket If you have added a snow plow to the front of your vehicle lower the snow plow fully before raising the vehicle Make sure that the jack head is positioned so that the rear axle is resting securely between the grooves that are on the jack head Z WARNING Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Z WARNING Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle Vehicle Care 10 91 6 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well 7 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire 10 92 ZN WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When changing a wheel remove any Vehicle Care rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicl
69. Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand the vehicle is in P Park 9 42 Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running ZN WARNING It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set If you have four wheel drive and the transfer case is in N Neutral the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral Continued Driving and Operating WARNING Continued And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running unless you have to If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in P Park and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you move the shift lever into P Park hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from P Park without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P Park Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into P Park properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parkin
70. SOON message and it comes back on when the vehicle is started and or the OIL LIFE REMAINING is near 0 the engine oil life system has not been reset Repeat the procedure Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult it may be best to have this done at the dealer service department If not taken to the dealer be sure to follow all the instructions here or a false reading on the dipstick could result Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage the transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the transmission fluid Vehicle Care 10 13 Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving e When outside temperatures are above 32 C 90 F e At high speed for quite a while e In heavy traffic especially in hot weat
71. Safety Belt Reminders Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt unless the driver safety belt is already buckled 4 The safety belt light flashes for several seconds then comes on solid for several more This chime and light sequence are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the driver safety belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on 5 20 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt reminder light several seconds after the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt The passenger safety belt light located on the overhead console comes on and stays on for several seconds flashes for several more seconds and then comes on solid for several more Instruments and Controls Bo This chime and light sequence is repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the passenger safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device To turn off the warning light and or chime remove the object from the seat or buckle the s
72. See Replacing Safety Belt System Parts After a Crash on page 3 28 Seats and Restraints Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides If not they are available through your dealer The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed and properly adjusted the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head Here is how to install a comfort guide to the shoulder belt 1 Remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body y YN et aA y i N oT a j ee a M 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top A Safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces Seats and Restraints 3 25 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it The belt should be close to but not contacting the neck To remove and
73. Sliding Window 10 57 Vehicle Care Wheels and Tires Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer Z WARNING e Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing There could be a blowout and a serious crash See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 Continued WARNING Continued e Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting crash could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when hitting a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn or old tires can cause a crash If the tread is badly worn replace them Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes curbs etc Continued WARNING Continued e Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash Only the dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair replace dismount and mount the tires Do not spin the tires in excess of 55 km h 35 mph
74. Speed Compensated Volume SCV automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle s speed changes while driving so that the volume level stays consistent To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM automatic volume tab on the radio display 4 Press the softkey under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting OFF Low Med or High to select the level of radio volume compensation The display times out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Infotainment System 7 5 Setting the Tone Bass Treble AM FM Radio and AM FM Radio with CD To adjust the bass or treble 1 Press the JJ knob until Bass or Treble displays 2 To adjust the setting do one of the following e Turn the Jd knob e Press either SEEK or K SEEK e Press either D gt FWD or lt REV EQ Equalization Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source 7 6 Infotainment System Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble All Except AM FM Radio and Radio with CD BASS MID TREB
75. Temperature Gauge crbrcnsrrianisnmi usreg 5 17 INDEX i 3 Cooling System 10 20 Engine Messages 5 44 Courtesy Transportation Program cxiccedaeiant vegeuds 13 11 Cruise Control 9 73 Light weior ic ctteeeteerseeaeaaes 5 32 Cupholders 00008 4 1 Customer Assistance 13 6 OMICES edness iiini ASNN 13 5 Text Telephone TTY USES decccnidiwarieraseeances 13 6 Customer Information Service Publications Ordering Information 13 15 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 13 1 13 3 i 4 INDEX D Damage Repair Collision 13 12 Danger Warnings and Cautions ccc eee eee iv Data Recorders Event 13 17 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 6 4 Defensive Driving 9 2 Delayed Locking 2 8 Devices Auxiliary 7 34 Dome Lamps 55 6 8 Door Ajar Messages 5 43 Delayed Locking 2 8 Lockeren ennie 2 8 Power Locks 00005 2 8 Rear Doors 0 000 0s 2 10 Driver Information Center DIC 5 33 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips Defensive 05 Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads If the Vehicle is Stuck Loss of Control Off Road Off Road Recovery Vehicle Load Limits Wet Roads WINTER iid ovata od aeu deans ae Drivin
76. Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 10 69 Tire Inspection 10 73 Tire Rotation 10 73 Dual Tire Rotation 10 75 When It Is Time for New TWES E E en aacs 10 76 Buying New Tires 10 77 Different Size Tires and Wheels 2005 10 79 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 10 80 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 10 81 Wheel Replacement 10 82 Tire Chains 10 83 If a Tire Goes Flat 10 84 Tire Changing 10 86 Full Size Spare Tire 10 97 Jump Starting Jump Starting 10 98 Towing Towing the Vehicle 10 103 Recreational Vehicle TOWING xiscerctsteetenimeitns 10 103 Appearance Care Exterior Care 10 108 Interior Care 10 112 Floor Mats 10 116 General Information For service and parts needs visit your dealer You will receive genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco Genuine EJ Parts G Goodwrench Mug Accessories California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems many fluids and some component wear by products con
77. ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to display the odometer trip odometer fuel range average economy fuel used timer transmission temperature and instantaneous economy and Active Fuel Management indicator 5 34 The compass and outside temperature will also be shown in the display The temperature will be shown in C or F depending on the units selected Ti Vehicle Information Press this button to display the oil life units tire pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS trailer brake gain and output information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system engine hours compass zone setting and compass recalibration 8 Customization Press this button to customize the feature settings on the vehicle See Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information V Set Reset Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Instruments and Controls Trip Fuel Menu Items with DIC Buttons ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Odometer Press the trip fuel button until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either kilometers km or miles Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the odometer To switch between metric and English measurements see Units
78. a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
79. and gt tabs the Jd knob the K SEEK button or the SEEK button An MP3 CD R or CD RW that has been recorded without using file folders can be played If a CD R or CD RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and 512 folders and files the player allows access and navigates up to the maximum but all items over the maximum are not accessible Infotainment System Playing an MP3 i Information Press to display additional text information related to the current song If information is available the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line When information is not available NO INFO displays J Tune Turn to select MP3s on the CD currently playing KI SEEK Press to go to the start of the track if more than 10 seconds have played Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks gt SEEK Press to go to the next track Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the file displays Release 4 lt REV to resume playing gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the file displays Release X FWD to resume playin
80. and braking distances are longer It is best to use a low gear when in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck When driving on sand wheel traction changes On loosely packed sand such as on beaches or sand dunes the tires will tend to sink into the sand This affects steering accelerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Driving and Operating 9 17 Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if the vehicle does get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause it to slide out of control ZN WARNING Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only 9 18 Driving in Water ZN WARNING Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water He
81. and compass recalibration Press to customize the feature settings on your vehicle See Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information V Press to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC For more information see Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 Vehicle Customization Some vehicle features can be programmed by using the DIC buttons next to the steering wheel These features include e Language e Door Lock and Unlock Settings e RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback e Lighting e Chime Volume e Memory Features See Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 Rear Vision Camera RVC If available the rear vision camera displays a view of the area behind the vehicle when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse This is displayed on the inside rearview mirror or the navigation screen if equipped To clean the camera lens located in the bezel for the tailgate handle rinse it with water and wipe it with a soft cloth For more information see Rear Vision Camera RVC on page 9 78 In Brief 1 31 Ultrasonic Parking Assist If available Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA uses sensors on the rear bumper to detect objects while parking the vehicle URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R Reverse and operates at speeds less than 8 km h 5 mph URPA uses audio beeps to p
82. attachment of aftermarket equipment See www gmupfitter com for additional pick up box load bearing structural information Truck Camper Loading Information A vehicle specific Truck Camper Loading Information label is attached to the inside of the vehicle s glove box This label indicates if a slide in camper can be carried how much of a load the vehicle can carry and how to correctly spread out the load It will help to match the right slide in camper to the vehicle Your dealer can help make a good vehicle camper match and help determine the Cargo Weight Rating CWR Driving and Operating When installing and loading a slide in camper check the manufacturer s instructions When carrying a slide in camper the total cargo load of the vehicle is the weight of the camper plus the following e Everything added to the camper after it left the factory e Everything in the camper e All the people inside The CWR is the maximum weight of the load the vehicle can carry It does not include the weight of the people inside But use about 68 kg 150 Ibs for each seat The total cargo load must not be more than the vehicle s CWR Refer to the Truck Camper Loading Information label in the glove box for dimensions A and B as shown in the following illustration Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement purposes The recommended location for the cargo center of gravity is at point C for the C
83. automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 Change the fluid and filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage the transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the transmission fluid Before checking the fluid level prepare the vehicle as follows 1 Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level surface Keep the engine running 2 Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in P Park With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then move the shift lever back to P Park Allow the engine to idle 500 800 rpm for at least 1 minute Slowly release the brake pedal Keep the engine running and press the Trip Fuel button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP Transmission Temperature displays on the Driver Information Center DIC Using the TRANS TEMP reading determine and perform the appropriate check procedure If th
84. be badly burned This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cab model and it runs out of fuel refuel the front fuel tank first to ensure a quick restart Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished Driving and Operating ZN WARNING pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Exterior Care on page 10 108 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5 25 The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the Driver Information Center DIC if the fuel cap is not properly installed See Fuel System Messages on page 5 46 for more information 9 89 If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice If a new fuel cap is needed be sure to get the
85. be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly the system must be reset every time the oil is changed On some vehicles when the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on to indicate that an oil change is necessary See Engine Oil Messages on page 5 45 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1000 km 600 miles 10 12 Vehicle Care It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset For vehicles without the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message an oil change is needed when the OIL LIFE REMAINING percentage is near 0 Your dealer has tra
86. be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Ai Regular Cab Two Passenger Front Seat Seats and Restraints 3 59 Regular Cab Three Passenger Front Seat 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Do not install a child restraint in the center front seat position See Securing Child Restraints Rear Seat Position on page 3 66 or Securing Child Restraints Right Front Seat Position on page 3 69 or Securing Child Restraints Center Front Seat Position on page 3 78 for more information 3 60 Seats and Restraints Crew and Extended Cab Rear Seat 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors For crew and extended cab models the rear outboard seating positions have exposed metal lower anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion For regular cab models there is an anchor symbol on the covers to assist you in locating the top tether anchors Regular Cab Do not install a child restraint in the center seat position See Securing Child Restraints Rear Seat Position on page 3 66 or Securing Child Restraints Right Front Seat Position on p
87. by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle When the key is in the ON RUN position and the driver shifts the vehicle into R Reverse the video image automatically appears on the inside rearview mirror Once the driver shifts out of R Reverse the video image automatically disappears from the inside rearview mirror Turning the Rear Vision Camera System Off or On To turn off the RVC system press and hold located on the inside rearview mirror until the left indicator light turns off The RVC display is now disabled To turn the RVC system on again press and hold until the left indicator light illuminates The RVC system display is now enabled and the display will appear in the mirror normally Vehicles with Navigation System The RVC system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle When the driver shifts the vehicle into R Reverse the video image automatically appears on the navigation screen Once the driver shifts out of R Reverse the navigation screen will go back to the last screen that had been displayed after a delay Driving and Operating 9 79 Turning the Rear Vision Camera System On or Off To turn the RVC system on or off 1 Shift into P Park 2 Press the MENU button to enter the configure menu options then press the MENU hard key to select Display or touch the Display screen button 3 Select the Rear
88. c 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 4 354 kg 9 600 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 2LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Con ealional Wallet 4 264 kg 9 400 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 2LV8 K5L HD Cooling eee Scat nea 4 037 kg 8 900 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 2LV8 NHT Max Trailering ee Mn vrata 4 717 kg 10 400 lbs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs essary abou Trailering 4 491 kg 9 900 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs Pkg Fifth Wheel Trailer 9 102 Driving and Operating Vehicle Sow 1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box c 4 8LV8 3 42 4 990 kg 11 000 Ibs 5 3LV8 3 08 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3 08 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3 42 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 2LV8 3 42 5 443 kg 12 000 Ibs 6 2LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3 42 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 2LV8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg 3 73 4717 kg 10 400 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box b 4 3L V6 c 3 73 2 223 kg 4 900 Ibs 4 536 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 8L V8 c 3 42 2631 kg 5 800 Ibs 4 990 kg 11 000 Ibs 5 3L V8 c 3 08 2 858 kg 6 300 Ibs 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3 08 3 175 kg 7 000 Ibs 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Conventional Trailer 4445 kg 9 800 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Fifth Wheel Trailer 4 400 kg 9 700 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs Driving and Operating 9 103 Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR a 1500 Series 4WD Extended C
89. call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program U S and Canada For U S purchased vehicles call 1 800 462 8782 Text Telephone TTY 1 888 889 2438 For Canadian purchased vehicles call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Customer Information Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance have the following information ready e Your name home address and home telephone number e Telephone number of your location e Location of the vehicle e Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle e Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle e Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years 160 000 km 100 000 miles whichever comes first In the U S anyone driving the vehicle is covered In Canada a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often or the same type of claim is made many times Services Provided Emergency Fuel Delivery Deliver
90. causes the turn signals to automatically flash three times It will flash six times if tow haul mode is active Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause the turn signals to flash until you release the lever The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is released If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on a signal bulb could be burned out Have the bulbs replaced If the bulb is not burned out check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 10 50 Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for more than 1 2 km 3 4 of a mile a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information Control DIC To turn the chime and message off move the turn signal lever to the off position Fog Lamps For vehicles with fog lamps the control is located next to the exterior lamps control on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column The ignition must be in the ON RUN position for the fog lamps to come on 40 Fog Lamps Press to turn the fog lamps on or off A light will come on in the instrument panel cluster When the fog lamps are turned on the parking lamps automatically turn on When the headlamps are changed to high beam the fog lamps also go off When the high beam headlamps are turned off the fog lamps will come on again
91. coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates approximately 90 C 195 F By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark 5 Replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated 6 Verify coolant level after the engine is shut off and the coolant is cold If necessary repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 1 through 6 Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured Vehicle Care 10 25 Engine Overheating If the vehicle has the Duramax Diesel engine see the Duramax Diesel Supplement for more information The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating There is a coolant temperature gauge on the vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 5 17 In addition there are ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED messages in the Driver Information Center DIC on the instrument panel See Engine Cooling System Messages on page 5 44 and Engine Power Messages on page 5 45 10 26 Vehicle Care If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warnin
92. crash See How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 3 15 Regular and Crew Cab To move the adjuster down for the regular and crew cabs squeeze the buttons A on the sides of the height adjuster and move the height adjuster to the desired position Seats and Restraints 3 23 Extended Cab On the extended cab push down on the release button A and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After you move the adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without squeezing the buttons for the regular and crew cabs or without pushing the release button for extended cabs to make sure it has locked into position 3 24 Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen they are part of the safety belt assembly They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal near frontal or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if your vehicle has side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event Pretensioners work only once If the pretensioners activate in a crash they will need to be replaced and probably other new parts for the vehicle s safety belt system
93. cycle When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message displays washer fluid will need to be added to the windshield washer fluid reservoir Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for reservoir location Notice e When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full e Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in the windshield washer It can damage the windshield washer system and paint Brakes This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear drum brakes or rear disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving except when applying the brake pedal firmly Z WARNING The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to a crash When the brake wear warning sou
94. driver door with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The driver seat outside mirrors and adjustable pedals if available will move to the memory position associated with the transmitter used to unlock the vehicle This feature can be turned on or off using the vehicle personalization menu See Memory Seat Recall under Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information To stop recall movement press one of the power seat controls memory buttons or power mirror buttons or the adjustable pedal switch If something has blocked the driver seat and or the adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position the recall may stop Remove the obstruction then press and hold the appropriate manual control for the memory item that is not recalling for two seconds Try recalling the memory position again by pressing the appropriate memory button If the memory position is still not recalling see the dealer for service Easy Exit Driver Seat This feature can move the seat rearward to allow extra room to exit the vehicle Easy Exit Driver Seat Press to recall the easy exit seat position The vehicle must be in P Park If the easy exit seat feature is programmed on in the vehicle personalization menu automatic seat movement occurs when the ignition key is removed Seats and Restraints 3 5 A single beep sounds The driver seat moves back approximately 8 cm 3in
95. drives are compatible with the USB port Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple for proper operation iPod firmware can be updated using the latest iTunes application See www apple com itunes For help with identifying the iPod go to www apple com support Radios that have a USB port can play mp3 and wma files that are stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod 7 36 Infotainment System USB Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports e Up to 700 folders e Up to 8 folders in depth e Up to 65 535 files e Folder and file names up to 64 bytes e Files with an mp3 or wma file extension e AAC files stored on an iPod e FAT16 e FAT32 Connecting a USB Storage Device or iPod The USB port can be used to control an iPod or a USB storage device To connect a USB storage device connect the device to the USB port located in the center console or on the instrument panel To connect an iPod connect one end of the USB cable that came with the iPod to the iPod s dock connector and connect the other end to the USB port located in the center console or on the instrument panel If the vehicle is on and the USB connection works OK to disconnect and a GM logo may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio display The iPod music appears on the radio s display and begins playing The iPod charges while it is connected to
96. empty before the vehicle is out of fuel but the vehicle s fuel tank should be filled soon 5 16 When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW message appears See Fuel System Messages on page 5 46 for more information Here are some situations owners can experience with the fuel gauge None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gauge e Atthe gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gauge reads full e t takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gauge indicated For example the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the fuel tank s capacity to fill it e The gauge goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off Instruments and Controls If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Metric English The engine oil pressure gauge shows the engine oil pressure in kPa kilopascals or psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running 5 17 Instruments and Controls Oil pressure can vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but if readings are outside the normal operating range the oil pressure light comes on See Engine Oil Pressure Light on page 5 31 for more information A reading outside the normal operating ra
97. even death Exhaust may enter the vehicle if e The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation parking garages tunnels deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage The vehicle exhaust system has been modified damaged or improperly repaired Continued WARNING Continued e There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completely sealed If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle e Drive it only with the windows completely down e Have the vehicle repaired immediately Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage ora building that has no fresh air ventilation Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Z WARNING Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 9 44 Driving and Operating Z WARNING Four w
98. first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 71 C to 93 C 160 F to 200 F If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Hot Check Procedure Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 71 C and 93 C 160 F and 200 F The hot check is the most accurate method to check the fluid level The hot check should be performed at the first opportunity in order to verify the cold check The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases so it is important to ensure the transmission temperature is within range t a Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for more information Flip the handle up then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading 5 Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch band on the dipstick If the fluid level is not within the HOT band and the transmission temperature is between 71 C and 93 C 16
99. for use with trailers with surge air or electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems To determine the type of brakes on the trailer and the availability of controllers check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer When trailering make sure of the following e The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are equipped with electric brakes e All applicable local and federal laws and regulations are followed e All electrical and mechanical connections to the trailer are made correctly e The trailers brakes are in proper working condition e The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for the towing condition The ITBC system is a factory installed item Out of factory installation of this system should not be attempted GM is not responsible for warranty or performance of the system resulting from out of factory installation Driving and Operating Trailer Brake Control Panel A Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever B Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons The ITBC system has a control panel located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column See nstrument Panel Base Uplevel Version on page 1 2 or Instrument Panel Premium Version on page 1 6 for more 9 119 information The control panel allows adjustment to the amount of output referred to as trailer gain available to the electric trailer brakes and allows manual application of the trailer brakes The Trail
100. fuel The vehicle may run out of fuel If the vehicle has the remote start feature the RKE transmitter functions will have an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 3 for additional information Q Remote Start This button will be on the RKE transmitter if the vehicle has remote start To start the vehicle using the remote start feature 1 Aim the transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press and release The vehicle s doors will lock Immediately press and hold until the turn signal lamps flash If you cannot see the vehicle s lamps press and hold Q for two to four seconds Pressing Q again after the vehicle has started will turn the engine off When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done 3 If itis the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat these steps while the engine is still running to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes Remote start can be extended one time After entering the vehicle during a remote start insert and turn the key to ON RUN to drive the vehicle To cancel a remote start e Aim the RKE tran
101. h 25 mph or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 40 km h 25 mph 9 74 When the brakes are applied cruise control is turned off For vehicles with an Allison or Hydra Matic 6 speed automatic transmission see Grade Braking and Cruise Grade Braking Allison Transmission under Tow Haul Mode on page 9 51 for an explanation of how cruise control interacts with the Range Selection Mode tow haul and grade braking systems For vehicles with the StabiliTrak system that begins to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control the cruise control will automatically disengage See StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 When road conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used again it can be turned back on Driving and Operating The cruise control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel On Off Press to turn the system on or off The indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off RES Resume Accelerate Press briefly to resume to a previously set speed or press and hold to accelerate SET Set Coast Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or make the vehicle decelerate amp Cancel Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory Setting Cruise Control If the cruise button is on when not
102. hold the button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink This button may need to be held for up to 55 seconds 7 Immediately release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 8 Press and release the same button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To program another Fixed Code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 8 choosing a different button in Step 6 than what was used for the garage door opener Universal Remote System Operation Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of asecond The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by repeating the instructions Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends Instruments and Controls To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code settings on the Universal Home Remote device 1 Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights located directly above the buttons begin to blink rapidly 2 Once t
103. hold the lever toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation 6 4 Lighting Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system comes on when the following conditions are met e The ignition is on e The exterior lamps control is in AUTO e The transmission is not in Park e The light sensor determines it is daytime When the DRL system is on only the DRL lamps are on The taillamps sidemarker instrument panel lights and other lamps will not be on When it begins to get dark the automatic headlamp system switches from DRL to the headlamps To turn off the DRL lamps turn the exterior lamps control to the OFF position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the P Park position before the DRL lamps can be turned off Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside the automatic headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness along with the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim To turn off the automatic headlamp system turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release it F
104. if the weights are proper If they are not adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires Be sure the vehicle s tires are inflated to the inflation pressures found on the Certification Tire label on the drivers door or see Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 for more information Make sure not to exceed the GVWR limit for the vehicle or the RGAWR with the tow vehicle and trailer fully loaded for the trip including the weight of the trailer tongue If using a weight distributing hitch make sure not to exceed the RGAWR before applying the weight distribution spring bars 9 112 Weight of the Trailering Combination It is important that the combination of the tow vehicle and trailer does not exceed any of its weight ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Trailer Weight Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the tow vehicle and trailer combination fully loaded for the trip getting individual weights for each of these items Towing Equipment Hitches The correct hitch equipment helps maintain combination control Most small to medium trailers can be towed with a weight carrying hitch which simply features a coupler latched to the hitch ball Driving and Operating Larger trailers may require a weight distributing hitch that uses spring bars to distribute the trailer tongue weight among the two ve
105. in different types and are removed in different ways To remove the wiper blade 1 Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield 2 Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade and turn the blade assembly away from the arm connector Vehicle Care 10 41 3 Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position For the proper type and size see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 11 11 Glass Replacement If the windshield or front side glass must be replaced see your dealer to determine the correct replacement glass 10 42 Vehicle Care Headlamp Aiming The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system The aim of the headlamps has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment However if the vehicle is damaged in a crash the aim of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment may be necessary If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you this may mean the vertical aim of the headlamps needs to be adjusted It is recommended that the vehicle be taken to the dealer for service if the headlamps need to be adjusted It is possible however to re aim the headlamps as described The vehicle should Be placed so the headlamps are 7 6m 25 ft from a light colored wall Have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall Be placed
106. in use it could get bumped and go into cruise when not desired Keep the cruise control switch off when cruise is not being used The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster will come on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed 1 Press 2 Get up to the desired speed 3 Press the SET button located on the steering wheel and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km h 25 mph or more press the RES button on the steering wheel The vehicle returns to the previous set speed and stays there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control If the cruise control system is already activated e Press and hold the RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached then release it e To increase vehicle speed in small amounts press the RES button Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 6 km h 1 mph faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control If the cruise control system is already activated e Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached then release it e To slow down in small amounts press the SET button on the steering wheel briefly Each time
107. information If the vehicle has RVC the button for turning the dimming feature on or off will not be available Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control buttons for the OnStar system See your dealer for more information about OnStar and how to subscribe to it See the OnStar Owner Guide for more information about the services OnStar provides Cleaning the Mirror Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror Use a soft towel dampened with water Windows Z WARNING Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Bt en The vehicle aerodynamics are designed to improve fuel economy performance This may result in a pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up To reduce the sound open either a front window or the sunroof if equipped Manual Windows Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or lower the manual windows Keys Doors and Windows Power Windows Z WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons Children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or
108. installer can assist you in determining the amount of rear ballast required to help make sure the snowplow vehicle combination does not exceed the GVW rating the front and rear axle ratings and the front and rear weight distribution ratio The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR and the front axle weight of the vehicle with full fuel and passengers Basically it is the amount of weight that can be added to the front axle before reaching the front GAWR The front axle reserve capacity for the vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification Tire label as shown TRUCK COLD TIRE PRESSURE XXXKPA XXPSI XXXKPA XXPSI E INFORMATION p F XXX LB TXXXLB United States PY Panser COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION A FROID XXXXXXXX XXPSI XXXXXXXX XXPSI AV FXXX LB T XXXLB d Canada In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory such as a snow plow is adding to the front axle use the following formula Driving and Operating Le ths 4 W B gt L gt W x A W B W B Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle Where W Weight of added accessory A Distance that the accessory is in front of the front axle W B Vehicle Wheelbase 9 127 For example adding a 318 kg 700 Ib snow plow actually adds more
109. instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system if equipped has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5 23 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock When the retractor lock is set the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 an
110. is turned off When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to prevent the battery from being drained Turn the headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp on position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes Push the turn signal multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to change the headlamps from low beam to high beam Exterior Lamps Off Reminder For vehicles with a radio a reminder chime sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on the ignition is off and a door is open To disable the chime turn the lamp off Headlamp High Low Beam Changer ZD D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Lighting 6 3 Flash to Pass This feature lets you use the high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam the high beam headlamps will turn on They will stay on as long as you
111. is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 10 80 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the ma
112. is equipped with For center caps place the cap on the wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel The cap only goes on one way Be sure to line up the tab on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel For bolt on hub caps align the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and then tighten by hand Then use the wheel wrench to tighten Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Z WARNING Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Notice Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the wheel Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel tire repaired as soon as possible Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier gt c roenmoo D Flat or Spare Tire Valve Stem Pointed Down Hoist Assembly Hoist Cable Tire Wheel Retainer Hoist Shaft Hoist End of Extension Tool Hoist Shaft Access Hole Wheel Wrench Jack Handle Extensions Spare Tire Lock If Equipped 1 Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear Pull the cable and spring through the center of the wheel Tilt the wheel retainer p
113. manually select 2 Second in an automatic transmission the transmission will start in second gear You can use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces 1 First For the Hydra Matic 4 Speed transmission this position reduces vehicle speed even more than 2 Second without using the brakes You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in 1 First while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission does not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough 9 49 For an Allison Transmission or Hydra Matic 6 Speed transmission this position reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes You can use it for major severe downgrades and off road driving where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade When you shift to 1 First it provides the lowest gear appropriate to current road speed and continues to downshift as the vehicle slows eventually downshifting to 1 First gear Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place 9 50 Manual Mode Range Selection Mode Allison Transmission or H
114. mean For more information on the symbol refer to the Index S Adjustable Pedals i Airbag Readiness Light X Air Conditioning Antilock Brake System ABS a Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar O Brake System Warning Light Charging System Cruise Control E Engine Coolant Temperature 6 Exterior Lamps 40 Fog Lamps m Fuel Gauge 4 Fuses D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer LATCH System Child Restraints Cy Malfunction Indicator Lamp 7i Oil Pressure 2 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors Power Q Remote Vehicle Start A Safety Belt Reminders Tire Pressure Monitor EF Tow Haul Mode Traction Control Windshield Washer Fluid Introduction Vv vi Introduction NOTES In Brief Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Base Uplevel Version 1 2 Instrument Panel Premium Version 1 6 Initial Drive Information Initial Drive Information 1 8 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System enera a nener eee 1 8 Remote Vehicle Start 1 9 DOO LOCKS ernisinse cane Gaenan 1 9 Windows 0000 eee 1 10 Seat Adjustment 1 11 Memory Features 1 13 Heated Seats 1 15 Head Restraint Adjustment 1 15 Safety Belts 1 15 Sensing System for Passenger Airbag 1 16 Mirror Adjustment 1 16 Steering Whee
115. no return to the booster seat Q What is the proper way to wear Safety belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 3 21 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Z WARNING Never do this Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time Z WARNING Never do this Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a cr
116. not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for the vehicle Customer Information As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts is not covered by that warranty Repair Facility GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs The dealer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment 13 13 Insuring The Vehicle Protect your investment in the GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to the GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you ensure that the vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If su
117. of control causing a crash Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis Whenever a wheel wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced on a dual wheel setup check the wheel nut torque after 160 1 600 and 10000 km 100 1 000 and 6 000 miles of driving For proper torque see Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 84 for more information Used Replacement Wheels Z WARNING Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown It could fail suddenly and cause a crash When replacing wheels use a new GM original equipment wheel Tire Chains Z WARNING If the vehicle has dual wheels or P265 65R18 P275 55R20 LT265 70R17 LT265 70R18 LT265 60R20 P285 50R20 P285 45R22 or 285 45R22 size tires do not use tire chains They can damage the vehicle because there is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or
118. on page 3 66 or Securing Child Restraints Right Front Seat Position on page 3 69 or Securing Child Restraints Center Front Seat Position on page 3 78 for instructions on installing the child restraint using the safety belts Before placing a child in the child restraint make sure it is securely held in place To check grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth There should be no more than 2 5 cm 1 in of movement for proper installation Seats and Restraints Crew and Extended Cab Models 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors 2 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor loop if your vehicle has one Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps Example Rear Driver Side Position Example Rear Driver Si
119. on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because they could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material
120. on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective the air conditioning light turns off to show that the air conditioning mode has been canceled On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down It also helps the system to operate more efficiently The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so a small amount of water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal Climate Controls 8 9 lt amp Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on An indicator light comes on to show that recirculation is on This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defog or defrost modes If recirculation is selected with one of those modes the indicator light flashes three times and then turns off The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed 8 10 Climate Controls The recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the outside air button or by tur
121. on slippery surfaces such as snow mud ice etc Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode See Tire Pressure for High Speed Operation on page 10 67 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving 10 58 Vehicle Care 20 Inch Tires If your vehicle has the optional 20 inch P275 55R20 size tires they are classified as touring tires and are designed for on road use The low profile wide tread design is not recommended for off road driving or commercial uses such as snow plowing See Off Road Driving on page 9 7 and Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 9 125 for additional information Notice If the vehicle has low profile tires they are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires Tire and or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes or sharp edged objects or when sliding into a curb The vehicle warranty does not cover this type of damage Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and when possible avoid contact with curbs potholes and other road hazards Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall The following illustrations are examples of a typical P Metric and a LT Metric tire sidewall B Pa pC SPEC 153 y A Z__oa5l75Rig gt ghee Passenger P Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code
122. only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Player Messages later in this section 7 16 Care of CDs If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R or CD RW quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R or CD RW has been handled Handle them carefully Store CD Rs or CD RWs in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge If the surface of a CD is soiled clean it with a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Infotainment System Inserting a CD Single CD Player Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing Inserting a CD s Six Disc CD Player LOAD 7 Press to load CDs into the CD player This CD player holds up t
123. others may be injured in a crash Continued WARNING Continued Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to the vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle and do not spin the vehicle s wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires Vehicle Care 10 83 Notice If the vehicle does not have dual wheels and has a tire size other than P265 65R18 P275 55R20 LT265 70R17 LT265 70R18 LT265 60R20 P285 50R20 P285 45R22 or 285 45R22 use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use chains that are the proper size for the tires Install them on the tires of the rear axle Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting the vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle 10 84 Vehicle Care If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is mu
124. players and navigation system The navigation system provides detailed maps of most major freeways and roads After a destination has been set the system provides turn by turn instructions for reaching the destination In addition the system can help locate a variety of points of interest POI such as banks airports restaurants and more See the Navigation System Manual for more information Driver Information Center DIC The DIC display is located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster It shows the status of many vehicle systems and enables access to the personalization menu The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel next to the steering wheel Some vehicles do not have the buttons shown however some of the menus can be viewed by using the trip odometer reset stem ZN Press to display the odometer trip odometer fuel range average economy fuel used timer instantaneous economy and Active Fuel Management indicator and transmission temperature The compass and outside air temperature will also be shown in the display The temperature will be shown in C or F depending on the units selected i Press to display the oil life units tire pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS trailer brake gain and output information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system engine hours compass zone setting
125. procedure in Step 5 8 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off 9 Turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF 10 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Tire Inspection We recommend that you regularly inspect the vehicle s tires including the spare tire if the vehicle has one for signs of wear or damage at least once a month Always remove the tires if any of the following statements are true e You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire e You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric e The tire has a bump bulge or split e The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage Tire Rotation Tires should be rotated every 12 000 km 7 500 miles See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did
126. raised URPA will return to normal operation e A tow bar is attached to the vehicle e The vehicle s bumper is damaged Take the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system e Other conditions are affecting system performance Examples of this are vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck Driving and Operating Rear Vision Camera RVC This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera RVC system Read this entire section before using it Z WARNING The Rear Vision Camera RVC system does not replace driver vision RVC does not e Detect objects that are outside the camera s field of view below the bumper or underneath the vehicle e Detect children pedestrians bicyclists or pets Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the RVC screen or use the screen during longer higher Continued WARNING Continued speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross traffic Your judged distances using the screen will differ from actual distances If you do not use proper care before backing up you could hit a vehicle child pedestrian bicyclist or pet resulting in vehicle damage injury or death Even though the vehicle has the RVC system always check carefully before backing up by checking behind and around the vehicle Vehicles without Navigation System The Rear Vision Camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up
127. release the parking brake and drive straight down 4 Ifthe engine will not start get out and get help 9 16 Driving Across an Incline An off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill To decide whether to try to drive across the incline consider the following Z WARNING Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline do not drive across it Find another route instead e A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across When going straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble Driving and Operating end over end But when driving across an incline the narrower track width the distance between the left and right wheels might not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide or a rollover Surface conditions can be a problem Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause the tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse
128. reset button while FUEL USED is displayed Timer Press the trip fuel button until TIMER displays This display can be used as a timer To start the timer press the set reset button while TIMER is displayed The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will return to zero 5 36 To stop the timer press the set reset button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the set reset button while TIMER is displayed Transmission Temperature Press the trip fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Celsius C or degrees Fahrenheit F Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel Management Indicator If the vehicle has this display press the trip fuel button until INST ECON V8 displays This display shows the current fuel economy at a particular moment and will change frequently as driving conditions change Instruments and Controls This display shows the instantaneous fuel economy in liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km or miles per gallon mpg Unlike average economy this screen cannot be
129. restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts If a child restraint is secured in the right front passenger seat and the vehicle has a switch in the glove box to manually turn off the right front passenger airbag see Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 and Securing Child Restraints Rear Seat Position on page 3 66 or Securing Child Restraints Right Front Seat Position on page 3 69 or Securing Child Restraints Center Seats and Restraints Front Seat Position on page 3 78 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys Z WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forwa
130. restraints 3 54 Seats and Restraints Child Restraint Systems A Rear Facing Infant Seat A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint B Forward Facing Child Seat A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness C Booster Seats A booster seat C is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle Z WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for more information Children can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secu
131. seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N Neutral See Parking Brake on page 9 69 N Neutral Shift to this setting only when the vehicle needs to be towed See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10 103 or Towing the Vehicle on page 10 103 2 Two Wheel Drive High This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations The front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive This setting also provides the best fuel economy 4 Four Wheel Drive High Use this setting when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages the front axle to help drive your vehicle This is the best setting to use when plowing snow You can shift from Two Wheel Drive High to Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive High to Two Wheel Drive High while the vehicle is moving In extremely cold weather it may be necessary to stop or slow the vehicle to shift into Four Wheel Drive High When Using the Manual Transfer Case Shifts into or out of Four Wheel Drive Low or N Neutral should be made using quick motions to avoid excessive gear grinding Shifting slowly may make it more difficult to shift You may notice that it is harder to shift when the vehicle is cold After the vehicle warms up the shifting will return to normal While in Four Wheel High or Four Wheel Drive Low you may experience redu
132. shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You might not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving Vehicles with four wheel drive can be used for off road driving Vehicles without four wheel drive and vehicles with 20 inch tire wheel assemblies should not be driven off road except on a level solid surface The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road and this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Off roading can be great fun but has some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself When off road driving traffic lanes are not marked curves are not banked and there are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill
133. so it is perpendicular to the wall Not have any snow ice or mud on it Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being performed Be loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 75kg 160 Ibs sitting on the driver seat Have the tires properly inflated Have the spare tire in its proper location in the vehicle Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle s low beam headlamps The high beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the low beam headlamps are aimed properly To adjust the vertical aim 1 Open the hood See Hood on page 10 5 2 Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low beam headlamp 3 Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot on the low beam headlamp SSA 4 Atawall measure from the ground upward A to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it Draw or tape a horizontal line B on the wall the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4 Notice Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut off when aiming Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build up which may cause damage to the headlamp 6 Turn on the low beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being adjusted This allows only the beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface 10 43 Vehicle Care 7 Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws which are
134. specifically designed for the surfaces that are being cleaned Permanent damage can result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Apply the cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth to prevent over spray Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately Notice Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on the vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Cleaners can contain solvents that can become concentrated in the interior Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning the interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening the doors and windows Do not clean the interior using the following cleaners or techniques e Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface e Never use a stiff brush It can cause damage to the interior surfaces Vehicle Care 10 113 Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Use only mild neutral pH soaps Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per 3 78
135. start the disc The radio can also turn on the video screen display See Operation on page 7 2 for more information Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the remote control stored ina cool dry place If the remote control becomes lost or damaged a new universal remote control can be purchased If this happens make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba Remote Control Buttons Power Press this button to turn the video screen on and off Y Illumination Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight automatically times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on SJ Title Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD This function could vary for each disc B Main Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD A V lt gt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu lt Enter Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu O Display Menu Press this button to adjus
136. static is received while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged as long as it is securely attached to the base If the mast becomes slightly bent straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent replace it Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is tightened to its base If tightening is required tighten by hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn Satellite Radio Antenna The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear radio reception If the vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system if equipped may be affected if the sunroof is open Audio Players CD Player Care of the CD Player Do not add any label to a CD It could get caught in the CD If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen The use of CD lens cleaners is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism Infotainment System 7 15 Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use
137. store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide Slide the guide onto the storage clip 3 26 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear Safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy Seats and Restraints The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Lap Belt Crew and Extended Cab This section is only for the lap belt To learn how to wear a lap shoulder belt see Lap Shoulder Belt on page 3 21 Your vehicle may have a center seating position When you sit in the center front seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 3 27 Make sure the relea
138. sure that the transfer case is in N Neutral by shifting the transmission to R Reverse for one second then shift the transmission to D Drive for one second 8 Turn the ignition to ACC ACCESSORY which will turn the engine off 9 Place the transmission shift lever in P Park Driving and Operating 10 Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle 11 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF Shifting Out of Neutral To shift out of N Neutral do the following 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off and shift the transmission to N Neutral 3 Turn the transfer case dial to Two Wheel Drive High Four Wheel Drive High or AUTO After the transfer case has shifted out of N Neutral the N Neutral light will go out 9 67 4 Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging the vehicle always wait for the mode indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear 5 Start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position 9 68 Brakes Antilock Brake System ABS This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid When the engine is s
139. that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock When the retractor lock is set the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor Seats and Restraints 3 77 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 3 78 Seats and Restraints 7 If your child restraint has a top tether follow the chi
140. the minute numbers begin to flash then turn the Jd knob to increase or decrease the minutes 4 Press the button until the 12HR or 24HR time format begins to flash then turn the J knob to change the time format 5 Press the button again until the clock display stops flashing to set the currently displayed time or wait until the flashing stops after five seconds and the current time displayed automatically sets MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a Single CD and DVD Player To adjust the time and date 1 Turn the ignition key to ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN then press the button to turn the radio on 2 Press the button to display HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year Instruments and Controls 5 9 Press the softkey located under any one of the tabs to change that setting To increase the time or date do one of the following 7 Press the softkey below the selected tab e Press the SEEK button e Press the D gt FWD button e Turn the Jd knob clockwise To decrease the time or date do one of the following e Press the Kl SEEK button e Press the 44 REV button e Turn the Jd knob counterclockwise To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month day year to day month year 1 Press the button and then the softkey located below the forward arrow tab 12H 24H the date MM DD month and day
141. the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack in Auxiliary Devices on page 7 34 or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 for more information If a disc is inserted into the top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote control i Information Press to display additional text information related to the current song If information is available the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line When information is not available NO INFO displays Infotainment System 7 25 d Tune Turn to select tracks on the disc that is currently playing KI SEEK Press to go to the start of the current track if more than five seconds on the CD have played Press to go to the previous track if less than five seconds on the CD have played Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through the tracks on the CD A SEEK Press to go to the next track Press and hold
142. the vehicle if the vehicle is in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position When the vehicle is turned off the iPod automatically powers off and will not charge or draw power from the vehicle s battery If you have an older iPod model that is not supported it can still be used by connecting it to the auxiliary input jack using a standard 3 5mm 1 8 in stereo cable See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack earlier for more information Using the Radio to Control a USB Storage Device or iPod The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs and display song information on the radio s display J Tune Turn to select files KI SEEK Press to go to the start of the track if more than 10 seconds have played Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks SEEK Press to go to the next track Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release 44 REV to resume playing The elapsed time of the file displays gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release D gt FWD to resume playing The elapsed time of the file displays i Information Press to display additional information about the selected track Using Softkeys to Cont
143. the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request by police or similar government office as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar If the vehicle is equipped with an active OnStar system that system may also record data in crash or near crash like situations The OnStar Terms and Conditions provides information on data collection and use and is available in the OnStar glove box kit at www onstar com U S or www onstar ca Canada or by pressing the button and speaking to an advisor Navigation System If the vehicle has a navigation system use of the system may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and other trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage doo
144. the vehicle s axles and the Gross Vehicle Weight GVW are not exceeded The plow the vehicle can carry depends on many things such as e The options the vehicle came with and the weight of those options e The weight and number of passengers you intend to carry e The weight of items added to the vehicle like a tool box or truck cap e The total weight of any additional cargo you intend to carry 9 126 Driving and Operating Say for example you have a 318 kg 700 Ib snow plow The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the cab should not exceed 135 kg 300 Ib This means that you may only be able to carry one passenger But even this may be too much if you have got other equipment already adding to the weight of the vehicle e Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow plow on the vehicle e Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles does not exceed the axle rating for each e For the front axle if more cargo or passengers must be carried appropriate counter ballast must be installed rear of the rear axle Counter ballast must be properly secured so it will not move during driving Follow the snow plow manufacturer s recommendations regarding rear ballast Rear ballast may be required to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio even though the actual weight at the front axle may be less than the front axle rating The snow plow manufacturer or
145. three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 100 km h 60 mph travels 20 m 66 ft That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important 9 4 Driving and Operating And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven brake normally but do not pump the brakes If the brakes are pumped the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non dealer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessor
146. times to continue moving forward through the tracks on the CD 7 18 lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track gt D FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track RPT Repeat For the AM FM Radio with CD press and release the RPT button to repeat the current track Press RPT again to turn off repeat play RDM Random Press to listen to tracks in random rather than sequential order To use random do one of the following For the AM FM Radio with CD 1 Press the RDM button until the random icon displays 2 Press the RDM button again until the random icon disappears from the display Infotainment System For the Radio with CD MP3 and Radio with USB and CD MP3 1 Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays 2 Press the softkey again to turn off random play For the Radio with USB and Six Disc CD MP3 1 Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All Discs displays to play tracks from all CDs loaded in random order 2 Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays to play tracks from a single CD in random order 3 Press the same softkey again to turn off random play MP3 Supported Files The Radio with CD MP3 Radio with USB and CD MP3 and Radio with USB and Six Disc CD MP3 have the capability of
147. to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus Infotainment System amp Return Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD V and DVD A menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 for more information The video screen automatically turns on when the DVD V is inserted into the DVD slot and does not automatically power on when the DVD A is inserted into the DVD slot It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button Using Softkeys to Play a DVD A Audio Once a DVD A is inserted the radio display menu shows several tab options for playback Press the softkey located under any tab option during DVD A playback gt Il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on the display the system is in pause mode If the pause tab is showing on the display the system is in playback mode lt d Group P Press to cycle through musical groupings on the DVD A disc Nav Navigate Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus d Audio Stream Press to cycle through audio stream f
148. to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Vehicle Care 10 111 Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this 10 112 Vehicle Care Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every s
149. to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle The Certification Tire label also contains important information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity See What is front axle reserve capacity and how do calculate it under Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 9 125 Z WARNING In the case of a sudden stop or collision things carried in the bed of your truck could shift forward and come into the passenger area injuring you and others If you put things in the bed of your truck you should make sure they are properly secured Driving and Operating Z WARNING Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles This could cause loss of control and a crash Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle 9 29 Notice Overloading the vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not overload the vehicle Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way 9 30 If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything e
150. under the hood near each headlamp assembly The adjustment screw can be turned with an E8 Torx socket Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam 10 44 Vehicle Care Q D OSN 9 Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line The lamp on the left A shows the correct headlamp aim The lamp on the right B shows the incorrect headlamp aim 10 Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 10 48 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer Halogen Bulbs Z WARNING Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Headlamps To replace one of these bulbs 1 Open the hood See Hood on page 10 5 2 If you are replacing the bulb on the passenger side remove the Engine Air Cleaner cover See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 10 19 for more information 3 Reach in and access the bulb sockets from inside the engine compartment Sidemarker Lamp Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Turn Signal Lamp Parking Lamp Tur
151. under Four Wheel Drive on page 9 54 for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for the vehicle 8 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle 9 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF After towing see Shifting Out of Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 9 54 Rear Towing Rear Wheels Off the Ground Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a two wheel drive vehicle from the rear 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly Firmly set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 9 69 Put the transmission in P Park Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF Vehicle Care 10 107 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four wheel drive vehicle from the rear q Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly Firmly set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 9 69 Put the transmission in P Park Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions 10 108 Vehicle Care
152. up Lamps Driver Side Low Beam Headlamp Engine Control Module Battery Fuel Injectors Ignition Coils Right Side Transmission Control Module Battery Vehicle Back up Lamps 10 52 Vehicle Care Passenger Side Headlamp Air Conditioning Compressor Oxygen Sensors Transmission Controls Ignition Fuel Pump Fuel System Control Module Not Used Not Used Fuel Injectors Ignition Coils Left Side Trailer Park Lamps Driver Side Park Lamps Passenger Side Park Lamps Passenger Side High Beam Headlamp Daytime Running Lamps DRL Driver Side High Beam Headlamp Daytime Running 33 Lamps 2 Key Ignition System Theft Deterrent System Windshield Wiper SEO B2 Upfitter Usage Battery 38 Electric Adjustable Pedals 39 Climate Controls Battery 40 Airbag System Ignition Audio System Miscellaneous Ignition Cruise Control 45 Airbag System Battery Instrument Panel Power Take Off Auxiliary Climate Control Ignition Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Rear Defogger Heated Mirrors 52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage Battery Cigarette Lighter 53 Auxiliary Power Outlet SEO Upfitter Usage 55 Climate Controls Ignition Engine Control Module Secondary Fuel Pump Ignition J Case Fuses Cooling Fan 1 Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System J Case Fuses eo Cooling Fan 2 61 Antilock Brake System 1 Stud 2 Trailer Brak
153. vehicle and locate the secondary hood release This is located under the hood near the center of the grille 3 4 Vehicle Care 10 5 Push the secondary hood release to the right Lift the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then bring the hood from full open to within 152 mm 6 in from the closed position pause and push the front center of the hood with a swift firm motion to fully close the hood 10 6 Vehicle Care Engine Compartment Overview B E G H l J K L M Pe a CY pba OT he Ny nA am E ey Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 10 19 Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 10 20 Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 10 98 Battery on page 10 34 Remote Negative Terminal Out of View See Jump Starting on page 10 98 Automatic Transmission Dipstick Out of View See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission on page 10 13 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission on page 10 16 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 10 7 H Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 10 7 Engine Cooling Fan Out of View See Cooling System on page 10 20 J Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 10 29 K Br
154. vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10 69 for additional information Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry Canada See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 19 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS 210 220 310 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Vehicle Care 10 69 1 When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument cluster If the warning light comes on stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Dr
155. warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid 8 4 Climate Controls Climate Control Systems with Heater Only With this system the heating and ventilation can be controlled A Fan Control B Temperature Control C Air Delivery Mode Control Temperature Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle amp Fan Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off Air Delivery Mode Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle The knob can be positioned between two modes to select a combination of those modes Select from the following 7 Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets i Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield side window and second row floor outlets In this mode the system automatically selects outside air 5 Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents W Defrost This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly Air is directed to the windshield and
156. when the tires were new Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels Vehicle Care 10 73 See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 10 76 and Wheel Replacement on page 10 82 If your vehicle has dual rear wheels also see Dual Tire Rotation on page 10 75 If your vehicle has single rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is the same as the rear tires use the rotation pattern shown here when rotating the tires E3 E3 10 74 Vehicle Care X INI 00 0 00 000 As wy U4 wy If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is the same as the rear tires always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating the tires a CD 00 0 we y7 If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is different from the dual rear tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here when rotating the tires The dual tires are rotated as a pair and the inside rear tires become the outside rear tires When you install dual wheels be sure the vent holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire Pressure on page 10 66 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25
157. while shifting It will remain on when the shift is completed Shifting Into Two Wheel Drive High Turn the knob to the Two Wheel Drive High position This can be done at any speed except when shifting from Four Wheel Drive Low The indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain on when the shift is completed Shifting Into Four Wheel Drive Low When Four Wheel Drive Low is engaged vehicle speed should be kept below 72 km h 45 mph Extended high speed operation in Four Wheel Drive Low may damage or shorten the life of the drivetrain To shift to the Four Wheel Drive Low position the ignition must be in ON RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 km h 3 mph with the transmission in N Neutral The preferred method for shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving 1 6 to 3 2 km h 1 to 2 mph Turn the knob to the Four Wheel Drive Low position You must wait for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging the vehicle always wait for the mode indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear Driving and Operating 9 65 It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant engagement noise and bump when
158. will continue until the ignition is turned off This message will also turn off if the driver acknowledges this message or if the trailer harness is re connected There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes This message will continue as long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer wiring This message will also turn off if the driver acknowledges this message 9 123 To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle side or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection do the following 1 Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the vehicle 2 Turn the ignition off 3 Wait 10 seconds then turn the ignition back to RUN 4 If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message re appears the electrical fault is on the vehicle side If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only re appears when connecting the trailer wiring harness to the vehicle the electrical fault is on the trailer side 9 124 SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM This message will be displayed when there is a problem with the ITBC system If this message persists over multiple ignition cycles there is a problem with the ITBC system Take the vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to have the ITBC system diagnosed and repaired If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message is displayed while driving the vehicle power is no longer available to the trailer brakes When traff
159. with safety belts Z WARNING Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly In a crash if you or your passenger s are not wearing safety belts the injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle You and your passenger s can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too 3 12 ZN WARNING People riding on the tailgate if equipped can easily lose their balance and fall even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or death ZN WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in the vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Seats and Restraints This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 5 19 for additional information In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash
160. 0 F and 200 F add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band If the fluid level is low add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band It does not take much fluid generally less than 0 5L 1 pint Do not overfill 6 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If readings are still inconsistent contact the dealer Engine Air Cleaner Filter If the vehicle has a diesel engine see Pickup Models under Engine Air Cleaner Filter in the Duramax Diesel Supplement for the correct inspection and replacement procedures See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter Vehicle Care 10 19 When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 80 000 km 50 000 mi interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 for more information If driving on dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the engine air c
161. 021671 Four a Drive in Canada 89021672 Front Axle 1500 2500 HD and SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No 89021677 3500 HD Series in Canada 89021678 Rear Ade SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No 89021677 in Canada 89021678 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Fluid Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One Piece Propshaft Spline Spline Lubricant Special Lubricant GM Part No 12345879 Two Wheel Drive with 4 Speed in Canada 10953511 Auto Trans 11 10 Service and Maintenance Fuid Lubricant o O a a I Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or Rear Diveline Center opine lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Hood Hinges Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 9 in Canada 10953474 Body Door Hinge Pins Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 Hinge and Linkage Folding Seats in Canada 10953474 and Fuel Door Hinge Tailgate Handle Pivot Points Hinges Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 Latch Bolt and Linkage in Canada 10953474 Weatherstrip Lubricant GM Part No 3634770 in Canada 10953518 or Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No 12345579 in Canada 992887 Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No 12371287 in Canada 10953437 Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Service and Maintenance 11 11
162. 1 Press the D display menu button on the remote control 2 Use the remote control A Vv lt gt navigation arrows and the lt enter button to use the setup menu 3 Press the D button again to remove the setup menu from the screen Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be heard through the following possible sources e Wireless headphones e Vehicle speakers e Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the RSA system if the vehicle has this feature The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA system if the vehicle has this feature The DVD player can be selected as an audio source on the RSA system See Rear Seat Audio RSA System on page 7 48 for more information When a device is connected to the A V jacks or the radio s auxiliary input jack if the vehicle has this feature the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones The front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console To use the video screen 1 Push the release button located
163. 1 to repeat one track The tab appears raised when Repeat Track is being used Shuffle Functionality To use Shuffle Press the softkey below gt DGS DGA or DSF to select between Shuffle Off Shuffle All Songs Shuffle Songs Shuffle Album or Shuffle Folder gt Shuffle Off Press the softkey below DGS to turn shuffle off This is the default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected DCS Shuffle All Songs Shuffle Songs Press the softkey below DGF or DGA to shuffle all songs on the USB storage device or iPod DCA Shuffle Album Press the softkey below gt to shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod DGF Shuffle Folder Press the softkey below gt to shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage device Rear Seat Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system works with the vehicle s audio system The DVD player is part of the front radio The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player a video display screen audio video jacks two wireless headphones and a remote control See CD DVD Player on page 7 22 for more information on the vehicle s CD DVD player Infotainment System 7 39 Before Driving The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so In severe or extre
164. 10 Vehicle Care Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades Bugs road grime sap and a buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by e Extreme dusty conditions e Sand and salt e Heat and sun e Snow and ice without proper removal Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium calcium or sodium chloride These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust Always wash the vehicle s chrome with soap and water after exposure Notice Using strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use only approved cleaners
165. 12 files and folders e Up to 8 folders in depth e Playlists with an m3u or wpl extension e Files with an mp3 wma or cda file extension Root Directory The root directory of the disc is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory displays as F1 ROOT on the radio If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio and MP3 WMA files a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc Empty Folder Folders that do not contain files are skipped and the player advances to the next folder that contains files No Folder When the disc contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder function does not function on a disc that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the disc contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists first and then go to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT Order of Play Compressed audio files are accessed in the following order e Playlists Px e Files stored in the root directory e Files stored in folders in the root directory Infotainment System 7 27 Tracks are played in the following
166. 2 Drunk Driving 9 2 Control of a Vehicle 9 3 Braking tscscciecieac ance ctayees 9 3 Steering 2 200005 9 4 Off Road Recovery 9 5 Loss of Control 9 6 Off Road Driving 9 7 Driving on Wet Roads 9 19 Highway Hypnosis 9 20 Hill and Mountain Roads 9 20 Winter Driving 9 21 If the Vehicle is Stuck 9 23 Vehicle Load Limits 9 25 Truck Camper Loading Information 9 32 Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break In 9 34 Adjustable Throttle and Brake P dal jiscivegecebcsancaeaans 9 35 Ignition Positions 9 35 Starting the Engine 9 37 Fast Idle System Retained Accessory Power RAP Engine Coolant Heater Shifting Into Park Shifting Out of Park Parking Over Things MNAUBUM eoi messiin Active Fuel Management Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust Running the Vehicle While Parked sicsevccscedccdonanes Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Manual Mode Tow Haul Mode Drive Systems Four Wheel Drive Brakes Antilock Brake System ABS Parking Brake Brake Assist Except With 4 3L V6 Engine Hill Start Assist HSA Driving and Operating Rid
167. 2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M In Brief 0 1 1 Instrument Panel 1 2 Initial Drive Information 1 8 Vehicle Features 1 26 Performance and Maintenance 1 33 Keys Doors and Windows 2 1 Keys and Locks 2 2 DOOS inneren aetna toes t 2 10 Vehicle Security 2 12 Exterior Mirrors 2 15 Interior Mirrors 2 18 Windows 0000000s 2 18 ROO csciionenss dn ESADA 2 21 Seats and Restraints 3 1 Head Restraints 3 2 Front Seats 005 3 3 Rear Seats 0055 3 10 Safety Belts 3 11 Airbag System 3 29 Child Restraints 3 49 Storage 4 1 Storage Compartments 4 1 Instruments and Controls 5 1 CONMONS seid weenie wedgedeney 5 2 Warning Lights Gauges and Indicators 04 5 12 Information Displays 5 33 Vehicle Messages 5 41 Vehicle Personalization 5 52 Universal Remote System 5 61 Lighting 6 1 Exterior Lighting 6 1 Interior Lighting 6 7 Lighting Features 6 9 Infotainment System 7 1 Introduction 04 7 1 RAdO i 2 oucce dca tsathace memaas 7 8 Audio Players 7 15 Rear Seat Infotainment 7 39 POMC 2 since ses ile atin ad
168. 24 In Brief Press the plus minus buttons located on the steering column shift lever to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions See Manual Mode on page 9 50 While using Range Selection Mode cruise control and the Tow Haul mode can be used Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection Mode is active See Tow Haul Mode on page 9 51 Four Wheel Drive If the vehicle has Four Wheel Drive you can send the engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction Transfer Case Buttons The vehicle will have one of these three styles of transfer case controls Use these controls to shift into and out of the different Four Wheel Drive modes Manual Transfer Case gt 4 This transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of the driver Electronic Transfer Case This transfer case knob is located next to the steering column Automatic Transfer Case This transfer case knob is located next to the steering column Each transfer case design offers different drive options The list below described the different drive options that may be available 2 Two Wheel Drive High This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations AUTO Automatic Four Wheel Drive This setting is ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are variable 4 Four Wheel High Use the Four Wheel Drive High position when extra traction
169. 9 85 Gauges Engine Coolant Temperature 5 17 Engine Oil Pressure 5 16 FUCl oaiecatsnd a i iinta enia 5 15 Odometer 2 5 14 Speedometer 4 5 14 Tachometer 5 5 15 Trip Odometer 5 14 Voltmeter 2 005 5 18 Warning Lights and Indicators 5 12 General Information Service and Maintenance 11 1 TOWING ticeividersawisemlatadd 9 90 Vehicle Care 10 2 Glass Replacement 10 41 Glove Box 20200005 4 1 GM Mobility Reimbursement PIOGlaM c0cseakenew eres ees 13 7 Halogen Bulbs 10 44 Hazard Warning Flashers 6 5 Head Restraints 3 2 Headlamps 10 44 AIMING ccaceaicdreaneneds 10 42 Automatic 2 055 6 4 Bulb Replacement 10 44 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 6 4 Flash to Pass 6 3 High Beam On Light 5 32 High Low Beam Changer 6 3 Heated Front Seats 3 8 Heated Mirrors 2 17 Heater Engine Coolant 9 40 Heating and Air Conditioning 8 1 8 4 High Beam On Light 5 32 High Speed Operation 10 67 Highway Hypnosis 9 20 Hill and Mountain Roads 9 20 Hill Start Assist HSA 9 70 aleo AEE coe dide cadavuneds ae 10 5 FOU ice spac secher ta
170. AT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No remote memory seat recall will occur 5 59 ON The driver seat and on some vehicles the outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed On some vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature the pedals will also automatically move NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to turn the remote start off or on The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 5 for more information 5 60 Press the customization button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature T
171. Camera Options screen button The Rear Camera Options screen will display Rear Camera Options Q Symbols 4 Select the Video screen button When the Video screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on 9 80 The delay after shifting out of R Reverse is approximately 10 seconds The delay can be cancelled by performing one of the following e Pressing a hard key on the navigation system e Shifting into P Park e Reaching a vehicle speed of 8 km h 5 mph There is a message on the rear vision camera screen that states Check Surroundings for Safety Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of the Screen To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen press the MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display Any adjustments made will only affect the rear vision camera screen Driving and Operating 3 Brightness Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen Q Contrast Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen Symbols The navigation system may have a feature that lets the driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using the RVC The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist URPA system must not be disabled to use the caution symbols If URPA has been disabled and the symbols have been turned on the Rear Parking Assist Symbols Unavai
172. Control Systems Climate Control Systems with Air Conditioning 8 1 Climate Control Systems with Heater Only 8 4 Dual Automatic Climate Control System i acei eraser insani 8 5 Air Vents Air Vents n on 8 11 Climate Controls 8 1 Climate Control Systems Climate Control Systems with Air Conditioning With this system the heating cooling and ventilation can be controlled Fan Control Temperature Control Air Delivery Mode Control VOW D gt Air Conditioning E Outside Air F Recirculation G Rear Window Defogger 8 2 Climate Controls Temperature Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle 8 Fan Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off Air Delivery Mode Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow inside the vehicle The knob can be positioned between two modes to select a combination of those modes Select from the following Pe Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets pi Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and side window outlets In this mode the system automatically selects outside air Recirculat
173. Controls Warning Lights Gauges and Indicators Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury Warning lights come on when there could be a problem with a vehicle function Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working Gauges can indicate when there could be a problem with a vehicle function Often gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem check the section that explains what to do Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous Instruments and Controls 5 13 Instrument Cluster 5 14 For vehicles with a DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel Supplement for more information For vehicles with a Hybrid see the Hybrid Supplement for more information Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both kilometers per hour km h and miles per hour mph Instruments and Controls Odometer The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven in either kilometers or miles Engine Hour Meter Display The Driver Information Center DIC can also display the number of h
174. D Cooling Pkg Fifth Wheel Trailer 6 2LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Conventional Trailer 6 2LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Fifth Wheel Trailer 6 2LV8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg Conventional Trailer 6 2LV8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg Fifth Wheel Trailer 1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box c 4 8LV8 4 8LV8 5 3LV8 LMG 3 08 3 08 3 23 3 08 2 812 kg 6 200 Ibs 3 130 kg 6 900 Ibs 4 400 kg 9 700 Ibs 4173 kg 9 200 Ibs 4 400 kg 9 700 Ibs 4 218 kg 9 300 Ibs 4 853 kg 10 700 Ibs 4 627 kg 10 200 Ibs 2 132 kg 4 700 Ibs 3 73 3039 kg 6 700 Ibs 2767 kg 6 100 Ibs 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs 5534 kg 12 200 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 4536 kg 10 000 Ibs 5 443 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs Driving and Operating 9 99 Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR a 5 3LV8 LMG K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3 084 kg 6 800 Ibs 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg XFE 3 175 kg 7 000 Ibs 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 2LV8 5 443 kg 12 000 Ibs 6 2L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box b 4 3L V6 c 2 132 kg 4 700 Ibs 4309 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 3L V6 c 2 359 kg 5 200 Ibs 4 536 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 8L V8 c 4 536 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 8LV8 5 443 k
175. DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to display all DIC messages in English DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRANCAIS All messages will appear in French ESPANOL All messages will appear in Spanish Instruments and Controls NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC You can also change the language by pressing the trip odometer reset stem See Language under Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 for more information AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock See Automatic Door Locks on page 2 9 for more information 5 53 Press the
176. IN This setting is displayed any time the Trailer Brake Display Page is active This setting can be adjusted from 0 0 to 10 0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected To adjust the Trailer Gain press one of the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel Press and hold a gain button to cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust To turn the output to the trailer off adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0 0 zero 0 0 zero gain is the factory default setting To properly adjust trailer gain see Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure later in this section TRAILER OUTPUT This is displayed any time a trailer with electric brakes is connected Output to the electric brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting Output is displayed from 0 to 10 bars for each gain setting On vehicles with Trailer Sway Control TSC or Hill Start Assist HSA output to the electric trailer brakes may be displayed when the systems are active See Trailer Sway Control TSC on page 9 124 and Hill Start Assist HSA on page 9 70 The Trailer Output will indicate ee on the Trailer Brake Display Page whenever the following occur No trailer is connected A trailer without electric brakes is connected no DIC message is displayed A trailer with electric brakes has become disconnected a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message will also be disp
177. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression the vehicle can tilt even more For these reasons carefully consider whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping The best way to prevent this is to walk the course first so you know what the surface is like before driving it Stalling on an Incline Z WARNING Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline be sure you and any passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand the wheels do not get good traction Acceleration is not as quick turning is more difficult
178. L 1 gal of water is a good guide Do not heavily saturate the upholstery while cleaning Cleaners that contain solvents can damage the interior 10 114 Vehicle Care Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For soils always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed e For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter If the locally cleaned area gives any
179. Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filling out a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 www dr bbb org goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program STEP THREE Canadian Owners In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge Mediation Arbitration Program General Motors of Canada Limited has comm
180. Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer If your vehicle has a diesel engine see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information Wiper Blades 55 0 cm 21 6 in 11 12 Service and Maintenance Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided Retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer j Service and Maintenance 11 13 Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Serviced By Services Performed Reading 11 14 Service and Maintenance Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Serviced By Services Performed Reading Technical Data Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN Service Parts Identification ADSI E E E T Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications Engine Drive Belt Routing Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN ALT OTA a O es p O This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel on the left side of the vehicle It can be seen through the windshield from outside The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration Technical Data 12 1 Engine Identificatio
181. Mechanism Check on page 10 40 Accelerator pedal check for damage high effort or binding Replace if needed Underbody flushing service Hood Decklid Liftgate Liftglass Support Gas Strut Service Visually inspect gas strut if equipped for signs of wear cracks or other damage Check the hold open ability of the gas strut Contact your dealer if service is required 11 6 Service and Maintenance First Engine Oil Change After Every 40 000 km 25 000 Miles e Four wheel drive only Transfer case fluid change extreme duty service for vehicles mainly driven off road in four wheel drive Vehicles used for farming mining forestry Department of Natural Resources DNR and snow plowing occupations meet this definition Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed clear and free of debris During any maintenance if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced First Engine Oil Change After Every 80 000 km 50 000 Miles e Engine air cleaner filter replacement See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 10 19 e Automatic transmission fluid change severe service for vehicles with Gross
182. Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals under Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 4 and Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer When the replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle all remaining transmitters must also be reprogrammed Any lost or stolen transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed to it See your dealer for transmitter programming Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC Notice When replacing the battery do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter Static from your body could damage the transmitter To replace the battery A Separate the transmitter with a flat thin object such as a flat head screwdriver Carefully insert the tool into the notch located along the parting line of the transmitter Do not insert the tool too far Stop as soon as resistance is felt Twist the tool until the transmitter is separated Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object Keys Doors and Windows 3 Insert the new battery positive side facing down Replace with a CR2032 or equ
183. NING Continued warning light on can lead to a crash If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped have the vehicle towed for service If the light comes on while driving pull off the road and stop carefully The pedal might be harder to push or might go closer to the floor It can take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing the Vehicle on page 10 103 If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light comes on briefly when the engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off If the light comes on while driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light stays on or comes on again while driving the vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on the vehicle still has brakes but not antilock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 27 For vehicles with a Driver I
184. OFF the windows and sunroof continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door is opened The radio continues to work for up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened Driving and Operating Engine Coolant Heater The engine heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up in cold weather conditions at or below 18 C 0 F Vehicles with an engine heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 18 C 0 F If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the Duramax Diesel supplement for more information To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is secured to the Engine Compartment Fuse Block with a clip Carefully remove the wire tie which bundles the electrical plug Do not cut the electrical cord 3 Plug the cord into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Z WARNING Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire Continued WARNING Continued You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at l
185. Power Windows 2 19 Rear Windows 2 20 Sun Visors 0000 2 20 Roof Sunroof Extended Cab 2 21 Sunroof Crew Cab 2 22 2 2 Keys Doors and Windows Keys and Locks Keys ZN WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons Children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children The key is used for the ignition and all door locks The key has a bar coded key tag that the dealer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys Store this information in a safe place not in the vehicle See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key is needed Notice If the keys get locked in the vehicle it may have to be damaged to get them out Always carry a spare key If you are locked out of the vehicle call the Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program U S and Canada on page 13 8 or Roadside Assistance Program Mexico on page 13 10 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 19 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC
186. RNING A Safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted Rear Seats All Split Bench and Hybrid Full Bench Folding Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be folded for added cargo space Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat Make sure that nothing is on the seat To fold the seat slowly pull the seat cushion up To return the seat to the normal seating position slowly pull the seat cushion down Make sure the safety belts are not twisted or caught in the seat cushion Z WARNING A Safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted Seats and Restraints 3 11 Safety Belts This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly It also describes some things not to do
187. Scheduling Service Appointments U S and Canada 13 10 Courtesy Transportation Program U S and Canada 13 11 Collision Damage Repair U S and Canada 13 12 Service Publications Ordering Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government 13 16 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government 13 16 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 13 17 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Vehicle Data Recording and PIIVACVin eck ss nwne canoe 13 17 Event Data Recorders 13 17 ONSIAI adeice decesedenteut 13 18 Navigation System 13 18 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 13 19 Radio Frequency Statement 13 19 Customer Information 13 1 Customer Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure U S and Canada Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to the dealer and to GMC Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that lev
188. Shifting In or Out of Neutral 1 With the vehicle running and the engine at an idle set the parking brake 2 Place the transmission into N Neutral Shift the transfer case in one continuous motion into or out of the N Neutral position Electronic Transfer Case The transfer case knob is located next to the steering column Use the dial to shift into and out of four wheel drive Driving and Operating 9 59 Recommended Transfer Case Settings Transfer Case Settings po af aw TN Ooo Normal St ves TT p Severe Tt ves Driving Conditions a O S e Vericleintow e See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10 103 or Towing the Vehicle on page 10 103 You can choose among four driving settings Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service An indicator light flashes while shifting the transfer case and remains illuminated when the shift is complete If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting 2 Two Wheel Drive High This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations The front axle is not engaged in Two Wheel Drive This setting also provides the best fuel economy 9 60 4 t Four Wheel Drive High
189. Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on with the fog lamps Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp If the vehicle has this feature this button includes wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp This button is located on the overhead console When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof mounted lamp pressing the bottom of the button will activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the bottom of this button Pressing the top of the button will turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps so the total current draw of the attached lamps should be less than this value The attachment points for the roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires located above the overhead console a dark green switched power wire and a black ground wire For more information on roof mount emergency lamp installation please visit the GM Upfitter website at www gmupfitter com or contact your dealer If the vehicle has this button the vehicle may have the snow plow prep package For further information see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 9 125 Lighting 6 7 Interior Lighting Instrument Panel IIlumination Control EF Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights and is located next to the exterior lamps contr
190. T OFF displays on the Driver Information Center DIC to indicate that URPA is off see Object Detection System Messages on page 5 46 Notice If you use URPA while the tailgate is lowered it may not detect an object behind your vehicle and you might back into the object and damage your vehicle Always verify the tailgate is closed when using URPA or turn off URPA when driving with the tailgate lowered 9 77 When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly The following messages may be displayed on the DIC SERVICE PARK ASSIST If this message occurs take the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system PARK ASSIST OFF This message occurs if the driver disables the system PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL This message can occur under the following conditions e The ultrasonic sensors are not clean Keep the vehicle s rear bumper free of mud dirt snow ice and slush For cleaning instructions see Washing the Vehicle under Exterior Care on page 10 108 9 78 e The park assist sensors are covered by frost or ice Frost or ice can form around and behind the sensors and may not always be seen this can occur after washing the vehicle in cold weather The message may not clear until the frost or ice has melted e A trailer was attached to the vehicle or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of the tailgate during the last drive cycle Once the attached object is removed and the tailgate is
191. TE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select if the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter The lights will remain on for 20 seconds until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed or until the vehicle is no longer off See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 3 for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Instruments and Controls CHIME VOLUME If available this f
192. There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly XM Theftlocked The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced check with your dealer Infotainment System 7 13 XM Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 this message alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer Check Antenna If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver or antenna could have a fault Consult with your dealer Check XM Receivr If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer 7 14 Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM sta
193. Turn by Turn Destinations Directory if equipped To delete all name tags 1 Press and hold w for two seconds 2 Say Delete all name tags Listing Stored Numbers The list command will list all stored numbers and name tags Infotainment System 7 53 Using the List Command 1 Press and hold amp 1 for two seconds 2 Say Directory 3 Say Hands Free Calling 4 Say List Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands Dial or Call The dial or call command can be used interchangeably to dial a phone number or a stored name tag Digit Dial This command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time Re dial This command is used to dial the last number used on the cell phone 7 54 Using the Dial or Call Command 1 Press and hold 1 for two seconds 2 Say Dial or Call 3 Say the entire number without pausing or say the name tag Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Using the Digit Dial Command The digit dial command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time After each digit is entered the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number Infotainment System To hear all of the number
194. VD or CD To stop fast reversing a DVD video press the play pause button To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD release the fast reverse button This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt gt Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding a DVD video press the play pause button To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD release the fast forward button This button might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 2 Audio Press this button to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc Infotainment System 7 45 Subtitles Press this button to turn on or off subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc AUX Auxiliary Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source i Camera Press this button to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature while a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection lt j Clear Press this button within three seconds after entering a numeric selection to clear all numerica
195. VD is playing the copyright information or the previews Infotainment System 7 31 Using Softkeys to Play a DVD V Video Once a DVD V is inserted the radio display menu shows several tab options for playback Press the softkey located under any tab option during DVD V playback gt I Play Pause Press either the Play or Pause tab displayed on the radio to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on the display the system is in pause mode If the Pause tab is showing on the display the system is in playback mode If the DVD screen is off press the play button to turn the screen on Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have finished although there could be a delay of up to 30 seconds If the DVD does not begin playing the movie automatically press the softkey located under the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio 7 32 If the DVD still does not play refer to the on screen instructions if available W Stop Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD lt a Enter Press to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu B Menu Press to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the softkeys located under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu After making a selection press this button This button only operates when using a DVD Nav Navigate Press
196. Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR over 3 901 kg 8 600 Ibs or mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather in hilly or mountainous terrain when frequently towing a trailer or used for taxi police or delivery service See Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission on page 10 13 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission on page 10 16 Four wheel drive only Transfer case fluid change severe service for vehicles mainly driven when frequently towing a trailer or used for taxi police or delivery service Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed clear and free of debris During any maintenance if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced Service and Maintenance 11 7 Evaporative control system inspection Check all fuel and and contaminate the transfer case fluid Contaminated fluid First Engine Oil Change After Every 160 000 km 100 000 Miles vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve if the vehicle has one works properly Replace as needed An Emission Control Service The U S Environmental Pro
197. WR It is the point where the mass of a body is concentrated and if suspended at that point would balance the front and rear Here is an example of proper truck and camper match A Camper Center of Gravity B Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone Driving and Operating 9 33 When the truck is used to carry a slide in camper the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer s camper weight figure the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer s camper weight figure the weight of camper cargo and the weight of passengers in the camper The total cargo load should not exceed the truck s cargo weight rating and the camper s center of gravity A should fall within the truck s recommended center of gravity zone B when installed Any accessories or other equipment that are added to the vehicle must be weighed Then subtract this extra weight from the CWR This extra weight may shorten the center of gravity zone of the vehicle If the slide in camper and its load weighs less than the CWR the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may be larger Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of the vehicle 9 34 When the truck camper is loaded drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle w
198. When the vehicle has a flat tire B use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks A A Wheel Block B Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire 10 86 Vehicle Care Tire Changing Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Crew Cab Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit Tool Kit Wheel Blocks Jack Jack Knob Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks nmp nmgoowp Regular Cab Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit Tool Kit Wheel Blocks Jack Jack Knob Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks mo fo gt Extended Cab Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit Tool Kit Wheel Blocks Jack Jack Knob For regular cab models the equipment you will need is behind the passenger seat For extended and crew cab models the equipment is on the shelf behind the passenger side second row seat 1 Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head to release the jack from its holder 2 Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise 3 Remove the wing nut used to retain the storage bag and tools by turning it counterclockwise You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody mounted spare tire gt frranmoog Spare Tire Valve Stem Pointed Down Hoist Assembly Hoist Cable Tire Wheel Retainer Hoist Shaft Hoist End of Extension Tool Hois
199. a CD DVD or to navigate an iPod or USB device we Press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again to turn the sound on Press and hold longer than two seconds to interact with OnStar or Bluetooth systems if equipped lt Press to increase or decrease volume CSV Press to reject an incoming call or to end a call SRCE Press to switch between the radio and CD and for equipped vehicles the DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary Di Press to seek the next radio station the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot or to select tracks and folders on an iPod or USB device For more information see Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 3 Cruise Control The cruise control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel T Press to turn the system on or off The indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off In Brief 1 29 RES Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed or press and hold to accelerate SET Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or make the vehicle decelerate Ri Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory See Cruise Control on page 9 73 1 30 In Brief Navigation System If the vehicle has a navigation system there is a separate Navigation System Manual that includes information on the radio audio
200. ab Long Box b 5 3L V8 c 2631 kg 5 800 Ibs 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg c 2 948 kg 6 500 Ibs 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pia Contentions Tiaibr 4 218 kg 9 300 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Fifth Wheel Trailer 3 629 kg 8 000 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD d 6 0L V8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD d 6 0LV8 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Conventional Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 9 104 Driving and Operating Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight 2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD d 6 0LV8 4627 kg 10 200 Ibs 3 6 0LV8 Payload Performance 6 0L V8 Conventional Trailer 4 10 6 0LV8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box HD d 6 0LV8 Conventional Trailer 6 0L V8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 6441 kg 14 200 Ibs 2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box HD d 6 0LV8 Conventional Trailer 6 0LV8 Fifth Wheel Trailer GCWR a 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs Driving and Operating 9 105 Vehicle GOW 2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD
201. ace like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel e Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders e What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely try to keep the vehicle headed straight down Use a low gear so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping the vehicle under control at all times Driving and Operating ZN WARNING Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control Things not to do when driving down a hill e When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that is not too steep to drive down might be too steep to drive across The vehicle could roll over 9 15 e Never go downhill with the transmission in N Neutral called free wheeling The brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill but if it happens when going downhill 1 Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and apply the parking brake 2 Shift to P Park and while still braking restart the engine 3 Shift back to a low gear
202. additional passengers or child restraints Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the safety belt If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint a rear facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle even if the airbag is off Wherever a child restraint is installed be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around ina collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Seats and Restraints 3 57 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual 3 58 When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
203. afety belt Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag s electrical system for possible malfunctions If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 3 29 o The airbag readiness light comes on solid for a few seconds when the engine is started If the light does not come on then have it fixed immediately Z WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving it means the airbag system might not be working properly The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury have the vehicle serviced right away If there is a problem with the airbag system a Driver Information Center DIC message can also come on See Airbag System Messages on page 5 48 for more information Instruments and Controls Airbag On Off Light If the vehicle has an airbag on off switch it also has a passenger airbag status indicator located in the overhead console If PASSENGER AIRBAG l OFF 4 United States A Ae Canada and Mexico When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and
204. age 3 69 or Securing Child Restraints Center Front Seat Position on page 3 78 for more information For regular cab models the top tether anchors are located under covers on the back panel behind the passenger seat Remove the trim plug to access the anchor Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Similar For crew and extended cab models the top tether anchors are the loops located near the top of the seatback for each rear seating position These loops will be used to route the top tether through as well as to secure the top tether in the vehicle Be sure to use an anchor loop located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Be sure to read the instructions following to properly install a child restraint using these loops Seats and Restraints 3 61 Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position See Where to Put the Restraint on page 3 56 for additional information 3 62 Seats and Re
205. aint on page 3 56 There may be a switch in the glove box that you can use to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front unless airbag is off This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys Z WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Continued WARNING Continued Even if the airbag switch has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Z WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes o
206. ake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid on page 10 32 L Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 10 50 M Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Washer Fluid on page 10 29 If the vehicle has a diesel engine and or an Allison Transmission see the Duramax Diesel Supplement Vehicle Care 10 7 Engine Oil For diesel engine vehicles see Engine Oil in the Duramax Diesel Supplement To ensure proper engine performance and long life careful attention must be paid to engine oil Following these simple but important steps will help protect your investment Always use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade See Selecting the Right Engine Oil in this section Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level See Checking Engine Oil and When to Add Engine Oil in this section Change the engine oil at the appropriate time See Engine Oil Life System on page 10 11 Always dispose of engine oil properly See What to Do with Used Oil in this section 10 8 Vehicle Care Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill In order to get an accurate reading the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for the location of the engine oil dipstick Obtaining
207. al exit position unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the key again NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EASY EXIT SETUP If the vehicle has this feature it allows you to select which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat feature It also allows you to turn off the automatic easy exit feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals in Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 4 and EASY EXIT RECALL earlier for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the menu up down button to scroll through the following settings OFF No automatic seat exit will recall SEAT ONLY default The driver seat will recall Instruments and Controls NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC MEMORY SEAT RECALL If the vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals in Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 4 for more information Press the customization button until MEMORY SE
208. aler before adding any equipment Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the engine radio or other systems and could damage them Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment 7 2 Infotainment System The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 9 40 for more information Navigation Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system see the separate Navigation System Manual Theft Deterrent Feature TheftLock is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle Operation AM FM 12 AUX Iq SEEK gt l SEEK ONET AM FM Radio T t t car A CD AUX d Radio with CD MP3 Shown Radio with USB and CD MP3 Radio with USB and Six Disc CD MP3 and Radio with CD Similar Infotainment System 7 3 7 4 Infotainment System FAV 25th He CAT 400 DVD CD AUX Radio with USB CD and DVD MP3 The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system Radios with CD and DVD Vehicles with a USB CD and DVD rad
209. an accurate oil level reading is essential 1 If the engine has been running recently turn off the engine and allow several minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Checking the oil level too soon after engine shutoff will not provide an accurate oil level reading 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick add 1 L 1 qt of the recommended oil and then recheck the level See Selecting the Right Engine Oil in this section for an explanation of what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 Notice Do not add too much oil Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine If you find that you have an oil level above the operating range i e the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged You should drain out the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle and seek a service professional to remove the excess amount of oil See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for the location of the engine oil fill cap Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
210. and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat mounted side impact airbag Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e Ifthe vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than i
211. and clearing the message does not correct the problem The following are the possible messages and some information about them 5 41 Battery Voltage and Charging Messages BATTERY LOW START VEHICLE When the vehicle s battery is severely discharged this message will display and four chimes will sound Start the vehicle immediately If the vehicle is not started and the battery continues to discharge the climate controls heated seats and audio systems will shut off and the vehicle may require a jump start These systems will function again after the vehicle is started 5 42 SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 5 24 Driving with this problem could drain the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible See your dealer Instruments and Controls Brake System Messages SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 27 If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or ap
212. and the disc fails to eject press and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject Playing a CD in Either the DVD or CD Slot If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit See Rear Seat Audio RSA System on page 7 48 for more information The DVD CD decks the upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs CD Rs CD RWs and MP3s When a CD is inserted the text tab DVD or CD symbol displays on the left side of the radio display As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm 3 in single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text tab and a message showing the track or chapter number will display when a disc is in either slot Press the DVD CD AUX button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device see Auxiliary Devices on page 7 34 for more information If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both
213. and trailer weights see Trailer Towing e For information on equipment to tow a trailer see Towing Equipment For information on towing a disabled vehicle see Towing the Vehicle on page 10 103 For information on towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home see Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10 103 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips Pulling a Trailer Important points for pulling a trailer e There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure the rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control See Hitches under Towing Equipment on page 9 112 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 800 km 500 miles the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged During the first 800 km 500 miles that a trailer is towed do not drive over 80 km h 50 mph and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Driving and Operating 9 91 e Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions Important considerations that have to do with weight e Weight of the trailer e Weight
214. aner filter inspection See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 10 19 Brake system inspection or every 12 months whichever occurs first For vehicles with Allison Transmission only At the first engine oil change only replace external transmission filter Steering and suspension inspection Visual inspection for damaged loose or missing parts or signs of wear 11 4 Lubricate the front suspension steering linkage and parking brake cable guides Control arm ball joints on 2500 3500 series vehicles require lubrication but should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 12 C 10 F or higher or they could be damaged Control arm ball joints on 1500 series vehicles are maintenance free Vehicles used under severe commercial operating conditions require lubrication on a regular basis every 5000 km 3 000 miles Body hinges and latches key lock cylinders folding seat hardware and tailgate hinges linkage and handle pivot points Service and Maintenance lubrication See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 More frequent lubrication may be required when the vehicle is exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Restraint system component check See Safety System Check on page 3 27 Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks Exhaust system and nearby heat shield
215. ar traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s abilit
216. ash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The child might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest Seats and Restraints 3 51 ZN WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints 3 52 Seats and Restraints Children who are not restrained
217. ast once a year and the oil life system must be reset Your dealer has trained service technicians who will perform this work and reset the system If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally service the vehicle within 5 000 km 3 000 miles since the last service Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 10 11 Every Engine Oil Change e Change engine oil and filter Reset oil life system See Engine Oil on page 10 7 and Engine Oil Life System on page 10 11 An Emission Control Service e Engine coolant level check See Engine Coolant on page 10 22 e Engine cooling system inspection Visual inspection of hoses pipes fittings and clamps and replacement if needed Service and Maintenance 11 3 Windshield washer fluid level check See Washer Fluid on page 10 29 Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear cracking or contamination and windshield and wiper blade cleaning if contaminated See Exterior Care on page 10 108 Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement See Wiper Blade Replacement on page 10 41 Tire inflation pressures check See Tire Pressure on page 10 66 Tire wear inspection See Tire Inspection on page 10 73 Rotate tires if necessary See Tire Rotation on page 10 73 Fluids visual leak check or every 12 months whichever occurs first A leak in any system must be repaired and the fluid level checked Engine air cle
218. at Makes an Airbag Inflate oosina 3 34 Airbag System cont What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates When Should an Airbag NATET onc cccweseuneeednenes Where Are the Airbags Airbags Adding Equipment to the Vehicle ccecniadstaaeernens ed On Off Light On Off Switch Passenger Status Indicator Readiness Light Servicing Airbag Equipped Vehicles 06 000eeee System Check Alarm System Anti Theft 0048 AM FM Radio 5 Antenna Satellite Radio Anti Theft Alarm System Alarm System Messages 3 35 3 32 3 31 INDEX i 1 Antilock Brake System ABS 9 68 Warning Light 5 28 Appearance Care EXISTO cae ae ee rr 10 108 Interior ee eee 10 112 Armrest Storage 4 1 Ashtrays e nn ananunua 5 12 Assistance Program Roadside 13 8 13 10 Audio Players 7 15 CD ee ee a 7 15 CDIDVD ec ocseneieesccanzasse 7 22 Audio System Fixed Mast Antenna 7 15 Radio Reception 7 14 Rear Seat RSA 7 48 Theft Deterrent Feature 7 2 Automatic Door Locks 005 2 9 Headlamp System 6 4 Automatic Transmission 9 46 FUG 22 cheater anaes 10 13 10 16 Manual Mode 9 50 Shift Lock Control Function Check i 2 INDEX Auxiliary Roof Mounted La
219. atch typical home entertainment system equipment The A V jacks located on the rear of the floor console allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system 7 42 Adapter connectors or cables not included may be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A V jacks Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper usage Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio system To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded A V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on If the video screen is in the DVD player mode pressing the AUX auxiliary button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device The audio of the connected source can be listened to over the speakers by sourcing the radio to the auxiliary device or by sourcing the RSA to the Rear Aux and listening with the wireless headphones on Channel 2 or with Infotainment System the wired headphones See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack under Auxiliary Devices on page 7 34 for more information about changing the source Changing the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode normal full and zoom screen brightness and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu To change any feature
220. atewna a pat E ES 5 5 How to Wear Safety Belts PIOPGily sieeceveannaiane cade eri 3 15 Idle System FaSt si crvine noesa e EDE 9 39 Ignition Positions 9 35 Ignition Transmission Lock CHECK assured crasavaeenns 10 40 Immobilizer 0005 2 13 Infants and Young Children Restraints 05 3 51 Infotainment 5 7 1 Instrument Cluster 5 13 Instrument Panel Storage Area 4 1 Introduction e 0s eee iii J Jump Starting 10 98 K Key and Lock Messages 5 46 Keyless Entry Remote RKE System 2 3 KEYS wistartid ater EPE ERNE 2 2 Labeling Tire Sidewall Lamp Messages Lamps Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp CAMO ndscdcuicacckeerre keane Daytime Running DRL DOMEC iicccc wirnaardaessancews Exterior Controls Exterior Lamps Off Reminder License Plate Malfunction Indicator Pick Up Box Identification and Fender Marker Reading TaillampS 00085 i 8 INDEX Lap Belt ss0 26 censarveecriacce 3 26 Lap Shoulder Belt 3 21 LATCH System Replacing Parts After a GRAS s icciag aman niyta 3 66 Latch Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 3 57 Lighter Cigarette 5 11 Lighting ENY scctiatintwdsindenneuns 6 9 EXIT ciccdeticatdusedurrnedaee 6 9 Illumination Control
221. ation Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the cruise control is set The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 9 73 for more information Information Displays Driver Information Center DIC The vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC The DIC displays information about this vehicle It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected All messages will appear in the DIC display located below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off Instruments and Controls The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel next to the steering wheel If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons the trip odometer reset stem can be used to access some of the menu items The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected The DIC also allows some features to be customized See Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information 5 33 DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip fuel vehicle information customization and set reset buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages
222. auses the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause stalling after start up stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up If one or more of these conditions occurs change the fuel brand used It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off See Recommended Fuel on page 9 84 If none of the above have made the light turn off your dealer can check the vehicle The dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments may have programs to inspect the on vehicle emission control equipment For the inspection the emission system test equipment is connected to the vehicle s Data Link Connector DLC The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel See your dealer if assistance is needed Instruments and Controls The vehicle may not pass inspection if e The malfunction indicator lamp is on with the engine running or if the light does not come on when the ignition is turned to ON RUN while the engine is off e The critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the syst
223. ave a working electrical system and adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate OnStar service may not work if the OnStar equipment isn t properly installed or you haven t maintained it and the vehicle is in good working order and in compliance with all government regulations 1 38 In Brief If you try to add connect or modify any equipment or software in the vehicle OnStar service may not work Other problems OnStar can t control may prevent service to you such as hills tall buildings tunnels weather electrical system design and architecture of the vehicle damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash or wireless phone network congestion or jamming See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 19 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS 210 220 310 OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands Free calling See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 3 for more information On some vehicles the Talk button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar Advisor cannot be heard If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red the system may not be functioning properly Push the
224. avy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Driving and Operating Find out how deep the water is before driving through it Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe you probably will not get through Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on the ignition system and the vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get the tailpipe under water If the tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start the engine When going through water remember that when the brakes get wet it might take longer to stop See Driving on Wet Roads on page 9 19 After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage The vehicle requires more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Driving on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Al
225. ay cause premature wear to the transfer case and may cause the gears to grind To avoid causing premature wear and grinding the gears do not shift the transfer case into Four Wheel Drive Low while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 km h 3 mph e Shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low should be done if possible with the vehicle at a slight roll 5 km h 3 mph or less e Shift the transmission into N Neutral Driving and Operating Z WARNING Shifting the transfer case to N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N Neutral See Parking Brake on page 9 69 e Shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low with the vehicle at a stop may be more difficult You may be unable to complete the shift to Four Wheel Drive Low and the transfer case will end up in N Neutral This is normal and is a function of the gear teeth aligning in the transfer case When this happens make sure the engine is on shift the transmission momentarily to D Drive and back to N Neutral and then complete the transfer case shift e Shift the transfer case shift lever in one continuous motion into the Four Wheel Drive Low position e When in Four Wheel Drive Low do not drive faster than 72 km h 45 mph This will reduce wear and extend the life of your transfer case
226. ays 2 To adjust the setting do one of the following e Turn the Jd knob e Press either SEEK or K SEEK e Press either D gt FWD or 4 lt REV Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade All Except AM FM Radio and Radio with CD BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust the balance or fade 1 Press the Jd knob until the speaker control tabs display 2 Highlight the desired speaker control tab by doing one of the following e Press the Jd knob Press the softkey under the desired tab Infotainment System 7 7 3 Adjust the setting by doing one of the following e Turn the Jd knob clockwise or counterclockwise e Press the SEEK or K SEEK e Press the D gt FWD or lt REV To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle position press the dd knob for more than two seconds If the Rear Seat Audio RSA is turned on the radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers 7 8 Infotainment System Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer for service Locked or Loc One of these messages will display when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corr
227. below the point of trailer wheel lock up indicated by trailer wheel squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks Trailer wheel lock up may not occur if towing a heavily loaded trailer In this case adjust the Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the towing condition Re adjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle loading trailer loading or road surface conditions change or if trailer wheel lock up is noticed at any time while towing Other ITBC Related DIC Messages In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT through the DIC trailer connection and ITBC system status are displayed on the DIC TRAILER CONNECTED This message will be briefly displayed when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle This message will automatically turn off in about 10 seconds The driver can also acknowledge this message before it automatically turns off CHECK TRAILER WIRING This message will be displayed if 1 The ITBC system first determines connection to a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle Driving and Operating If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stationary this message will automatically turn off in about 30 seconds This message will also turn off if the driver acknowledges this message or if the trailer harness is re connected If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving this message
228. bs 10 48 Replacement Parts Airbags 220cee eee ee 3 48 Maintenance 11 11 Replacing Airbag System 3 48 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash 3 66 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts After a Crash saeerosnsndg Srni 3 28 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government 13 16 General Motors 13 17 U S Government 13 16 Restraints Where to Put 3 56 Retained Accessory Power RAP 5 9 40 Ride Control Systems Messages 2 0 5 47 Roads Driving Wet 9 19 Roadside Assistance Program 13 8 13 10 Roof Sunroof 0 2 21 2 22 Rotation Tires 10 73 Routing Engine Drive Belt 12 6 Running the Vehicle While Parked iced csananencsnr arene 9 45 S Safety Belts 3 11 Cae ien Eare aian aoi 3 28 Extender a nn 3 27 How to Wear Safety Belts Propenly zcc2 c ecawdeceecenes 3 15 Lap Belt siriniers iiss onnies 3 26 Lap Shoulder Belt 3 21 Reminders 5 19 Replacing After a Crash 3 28 Use During Pregnancy 3 26 INDEX _ i 11 Safety Defects Reporting Canadian Government 13 16 General Motors 13 17 U S Government 13 16 Safety Locks 2 9 Safety System Check 3 27 Satellite Radio
229. can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop the engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 10 28 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If No Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message along with a low coolant condition can indicate a serious problem If there is an engine overheat warning but no steam is seen or heard the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle e Climbs a long hill on a hot day e Stops after high speed driving e Idles for long periods in traffic e Tows a trailer see Trailer Towing on page 9 95 If the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message appears with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 Turn the air conditioning off 2 Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed Open the windows as necessary 3 If stopped in a traffic jam apply the brake shift to N Neutral otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving D Drive or 3 Third If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays the vehicle can be driven Vehicle Care 10 27 Continue to drive the vehicle slowly fo
230. cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the trailer weight rating Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh based upon the vehicle model and options Weights listed apply for conventional trailers and fifth wheel trailers unless otherwise noted Driving and Operating 9 97 Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR a 1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box b 4 3L V6 c 2 177 kg 4 800 Ibs 4 309 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 3L v6 With Automatic 3 73 2 449 kg 5 400 Ibs 4 536 kg 10 000 Ibs Transmission c 4 8LV8 c 2 132 kg 4 700 Ibs 4 309 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 8LV8 3 266 kg 7 200 Ibs 5443 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 3L LMG V8 2 994 kg 6 600 Ibs 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3 357 kg 7 400 Ibs 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs 5 3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 4 128 kg 9 100 Ibs 6 350 kg 14 000 Ibs 5 3L LMG V8 KSL HD Cooling Pkg 3 42 4 128 kg 9 100 Ibs 6 350 kg 14 000 Ibs Conventional Trailer 5 3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg ee Wee ies 4 128 kg 9 100 Ibs 6 350 kg 14 000 Ibs 1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box b 4 3L V6 c 1 996 kg 4 400 Ibs 4 309 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 8L V8 c 2 132 kg 4 700 Ibs 4 536 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 8LV8 3 039 kg 6 700 Ibs 5 443 kg 12 000 Ibs 9 98 Driving and Operating Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR a 5 3LV8 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Conventional Trailer 5 3LV8 K5L H
231. ce Program Mexico on page 13 10 for more information Roadside Assistance and OnStar U S and Canada If you have an active OnStar subscription press the button and the current GPS location will be sent to an OnStar advisor who will assess your problem contact Roadside Assistance and relay your exact location to get the help you need Online Owner Center U S and Canada The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service that includes online service reminders vehicle maintenance tips online owner manual special privileges and more Sign up today at www gmcownercenter com U S or www gm ca Canada OnStar KICKE For vehicles with an active OnStar subscription OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live Advisors to provide a wide range of safety security navigation diagnostics and calling services Automatic Crash Response In a crash built in sensors can automatically alert an OnStar Advisor who is immediately connected to the vehicle to see if you need help How OnStar Service Works Push this blue button to connect to a specially trained OnStar Advisor to verify your account information and to answer questions Push this red emergency button to get priority help from specially trained OnStar Emergency Advisors Push this button for hands free voice activated calling and to give voice commands for Hands Free Calling and Turn by Turn Navigation
232. ced fuel economy Avoid driving in Four Wheel Drive on clean dry pavement It may cause your tires to wear faster make the transfer case harder to shift and run noisier e If the transfer case shifter is in the N Neutral position and you have difficulty reaching the selected transfer case mode with the engine running shift the transmission momentarily to D Drive and then back to N Neutral This will realign the gear teeth in the transfer case and allow you to complete the shift Shifting from Two Wheel Drive High to Four Wheel Drive High e Shifts between Two Wheel Drive High and Four Wheel Drive High can be made at any vehicle speed e Shift the transfer case lever in one continuous motion into either the Four Wheel Drive High or Two Wheel Drive High position Driving and Operating 9 57 Shifting from Two Wheel Drive High to Four Wheel Drive High while the vehicle is in motion may require that moderate force be applied to the shift lever for a few seconds before Four Wheel Drive High can be engaged especially in cold weather In extremely cold weather it may be necessary to slow or stop the vehicle to shift into Four Wheel Drive High While in Four Wheel Drive High the vehicle can be driven at any posted legal speed limit 9 58 Shifting In or Out of Four Wheel Drive Low Notice Shifting the transfer case into Four Wheel Drive Low while moving at speeds faster than 5 km h 3 mph m
233. certain circumstances Viscosity Grade SAE 5W 30 is the best viscosity grade for the vehicle Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W 30 10W 40 or 20W 50 SAE 5W 30 Cold Temperature Operation In an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 29 C 20 F an SAE OW 30 oil should be used An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade be sure to always select an oil that meets the required specification dexos See Specification earlier in this section for more information 10 11 Vehicle Care Engine Oil Additives Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the dexos specification and displaying the dexos certification mark are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can
234. ch each other or other metal Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the bad battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the positive terminal cover to its original position Towing Towing the Vehicle Notice To avoid damage the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground Care must be taken with vehicles that have low ground clearance and or special equipment Always flatbed on a car carrier Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed See Roadside Assistance Program U S and Canada on page 13 8 or Roadside Assistance Program Mexico on page 13 10 To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motor home see Recreational Vehicle Towing in this section Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behi
235. ch insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier 13 14 If the vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that ensures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read the lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of the lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs If there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash For emergency towing see Roadside Assistance Program U S and Canada on page 13 8 or Roadside Assistance Program Mexico on page 13 10 Customer Information Gather the following information e Driver name address and telephone number e Driver license number e Owner name address and telephone number e Vehicle license plate number e Vehicle make model and model year e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Insurance company and policy number e General description of the damage to the other vehicle Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts See Collision Parts earli
236. ch more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible Z WARNING Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire Re inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash Never attempt to re inflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible Z WARNING Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is
237. connected after that phone name f Press and hold w for two seconds 2 Say Bluetooth Say List 7 52 Deleting a Paired Phone If the phone name you want to delete is unknown see Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1 Press and hold for two seconds 2 Say Bluetooth 3 Say Delete The system asks which phone to delete 4 Say the name of the phone you want to delete Connecting to a Different Phone To connect to a different cell phone the Bluetooth system looks for the next available cell phone in the order in which all the available cell phones were paired Depending on which cell phone you want to connect to you may have to use this command several times 1 Press and hold t for two seconds 2 Say Bluetooth Infotainment System 3 Say Change phone If another cell phone is found the response will be lt Phone name gt is now connected 7 If another cell phone is not found the original phone remains connected Storing and Deleting Phone Numbers The system can store up to 30 phone numbers as name tags in the Hands Free Directory that is shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems if equipped The following commands are used to delete and store phone numbers Store This command will store a phone number or a group of numbers as a name tag Digit Store This command allows a phone number t
238. continue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair U S and Canada If the vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs diminish the vehicle resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which the vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are the best choice to ensure that the vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain the vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are
239. ctured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture F Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread G Single Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure on page 10 66 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 Tire Designations Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size P245 75R16 109S Passenger P Metric Tire A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and th
240. curred In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag e Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 13 17 and Event Data Recorders on page 13 17 Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer for service Airbag On Off Switch If one of the switches pictured in the following illustrations is located in the glove box the vehicle has an airbag on off switch that you can use to manually turn on or off the right front passenger airbag PASSENGER R AIR BAG OFF gt jron United States Seats and Restraints 3 37 Canada and Mexico If the vehicle does not have an airbag off switch it may have a passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 40 3 38 This switch should only be turne
241. customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings SHIFT OUT OF PARK default The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of P Park AT VEHICLE SPEED The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 13 km h 8 mph for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 5 54 AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock See Automatic Door Locks on page 2 9 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock DRIVER AT KEY OUT Only the driver door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park Instruments and Controls ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the k
242. d 6 0LV8 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Conventional Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD d 6 0LV8 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0LV8 Conventional Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box HD d 6 0LV8 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Conventional Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 6 532 kg 14 400 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box HD d 6 0LV8 4 264 kg 9 400 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Conventional Trailer 5 897 kg 13 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 6 305 kg 13 900 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 9 106 Driving and Operating Vehicle GoW 2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD d 6 0LV8 3 73 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Conventional Trailer 4 10 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 4 10 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 3500 Series 2WD Regular Cab e 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels 4 10 5 897 kg 13 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs Conventional Trailer 6 0LV8 Single Rear Wheels Fifth Wheel Trailer 4 10 6 577 kg 14 500 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0LV8 Dual Rear Wheels 3 73 4 354 kg 9 600 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Dual Rear Wheels 4 10 6 396 kg 14 100 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 3500 Series 2WD Extended Cab e 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheel
243. d changes the fan to a selected speed 8 8 Climate Controls Manual Operation amp Fan Control Press these buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed Pressing either fan button while in automatic control places the fan under manual control The fan setting remains displayed and the AUTO light turns off The air delivery mode remains under automatic control Air Delivery Mode Control Press these buttons to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Repeatedly press either button until the desired mode appears on the display Pressing either mode button while the system is off changes the air delivery mode without turning the system on Pressing either mode button while in automatic control places the mode under manual control The air delivery mode setting displays and the AUTO light turns off The fan remains under automatic control 7 Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets pi Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air is directed toward the windshield and side window outlets tad Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some to the windshield side window outlets and second row floor outlets In this mode the system automatically selects outside air NA Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents In this mode the
244. d to the off position if the person in the right front passenger position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because e My vehicle has no rear seat e My vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear facing infant seat or e The infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition Seats and Restraints Child age 1 to 12 A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because e My vehicle has no rear seat e Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat s whenever possible children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat s of my vehicle or e The child has a medical condition which according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition Medical Condition A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or her physician e Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger and e Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger ev
245. d 6 Seats and Restraints 3 71 7 If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for more information Before placing a child in the child restraint make sure it is securely held in place To check grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth When the child restraint is properly installed there should be no more than 2 5 cm 1 in of movement 3 72 If the vehicle is equipped with a passenger sensing system and when the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit see If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page 3 40 for more information To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Seats and Restraints With Airbag Off Switch This vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restr
246. d Lubricants on page 11 8 to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use Using a funnel add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It does not take much fluid generally less than 0 5 Liter 1 Pint Do not overfill After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier in this section When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 10 16 Vehicle Care Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheated transmission If a small leak is suspected then use the following checking procedures to check the fluid level However if there is a large leak then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use the
247. d and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed adjusted and maintained properly If the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak the trailer cannot tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system The trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if e The trailer parts can withstand 20 650 kPa 3 000 psi of pressure e The trailer s brake system will use less than 0 3 cc 0 02 cubic inch of fluid from the vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems will not work well or at all Driving and Operating If everything checks out this far make the brake tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes Use only steel brake tubing to make the tap Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery provision can be used to supply electrical power to additional equipment that may be added such as a slide in camper If the vehicle has this provision this relay will be located on the driver side of the vehicle next to the underhood electrical center Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with any electrical equipment that is installed Notice Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do not use equipment that exceeds the maximum amperage rating for the auxiliary battery provision Trailer Wiring Har
248. d by the radio with a USB port Infotainment System Playing an MP3 or WMA in Either the DVD or CD Slot If a disc is inserted into the top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only J Tune Turn to select MP3 WMA files K SEEK Press to go to the start of the track if more than five seconds have played Press and hold or press multiple times if less than five seconds have played to continue moving backward through tracks gt SEEK Press to go to the next track Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly lt Previous Folder Press the softkey below the lt tab to go to the first track in the previous folder gt gt Next Folder Press the softkey below the gt tab to go to the first track in the next folder RDM Random Press to listen to tracks in random rather than sequential order To use random 1 Press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays 2 Press the same softkey again to turn off random play Music Navigator Press the softkey below the tab to play files in order by artist or album 7 29 Infotainment System The player scans the disc to sort the files by ar
249. d may result in not enough trailer braking Both of these conditions may result in poorer stopping and stability of the vehicle and trailer 9 122 Driving and Operating Use the following procedure to correctly adjust Trailer Gain for each towing condition 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper working condition 2 Connect a properly loaded trailer to the vehicle and make 4 all necessary mechanical and electrical connections See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 for more information 3 After the electrical connection is made to a trailer equipped with electric brakes e ATRAILER CONNECTED message will be briefly displayed on the DIC 5 The Trailer Brake Display Page will appear on the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT In the Trailer Output display on the DIC will disappear if there is no error present Connecting a trailer without electric brakes will not clear the six dashed lines Adjust the Trailer Gain by using the gain adjustment buttons on the Trailer Brake Control Panel Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface representative of the towing condition and free of traffic at about 32 to 40 km h 20 to 25 mph and fully apply the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than 32 to 40 km h 20 to 25 mph may result in an incorrect gain setting 6 Adjust the Trailer Gain to just
250. d so that its centerline is over or slightly in front of the rear axle Take care that it is not so far forward that it will contact the back of the cab in sharp turns This is especially important for short box pickups Trailer pin box extensions and sliding fifth wheel hitch assemblies can help this condition There should be at least six inches of clearance between the top of the pickup box and the bottom of the trailer shelf that extends over the box Make sure the hitch is attached to the tow vehicle frame rails Do not use the pickup box for support 9 113 Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer If the trailer being towed weighs up to 2 271 kg 5 000 Ibs with a factory installed step bumper safety chains may be attached to the attaching points on the bumper otherwise safety chains should be attached to holes on the trailer hitch platform Always leave just enough slack so the combination can turn Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground 9 114 Trailer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 900 kg 2 000 Ibs needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer Be sure to rea
251. dd anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain the vehicle battery even if the vehicle is not operating The vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle see Servicing the Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 3 46 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 3 46 Driving and Operating Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment Before installing a snow plow on the vehicle here are some things you need to know Notice If your vehicle does not have the snow plow prep package adding a plow can damage your vehicle and the repairs would not be covered by warranty Unless your vehicle was built to carry a snow plow do not add one to your vehicle If your vehicle has the snow plow prep package called RPO VYU then the payload your vehicle can carry will be reduced when a snow plow is installed Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight GVW are exceeded 9 125 Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep package called RPO VYU If your vehicle has this option you can add a plow to it provided certain weights such as the weights on
252. de Position 2 1 When using a child restraint with a top tether in the rear driver side position A Raise the headrest or head restraint B Route the top tether B between the headrest or head restraint posts through the loop A behind the inboard headrest or head restraint post and under the center shoulder belt C C Attach the top tether B to the top tether anchor loop D at the center rear seating position 2 2 When using a child restraint with a top tether in the rear center position A Route the top tether B through the center loop D and behind the inboard passenger side headrest or head restraint post B Attach the top tether B to the top tether anchor loop at the rear passenger side seating position Seats and Restraints 3 65 2 3 When using a child restraint with a top tether in the rear passenger position A Raise the headrest or head restraint B Route the top tether B between the headrest or head restraint posts through the loop on the passenger side and behind the inboard headrest or head restraint post C Attach the top tether B to the top tether anchor loop D at the center rear seating position 3 66 Seats and Restraints 2 4 Tighten the top tether when and as the child restraint manufacturer s instructions say When the top tether is tightened the anchor loop may bend This is normal and will not damage the vehicle
253. ded to use and replace it as soon as possible Headlamp Wiring An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off or in some cases to remain off Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off Vehicle Care 10 49 Windshield Wipers If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice be sure to get it fixed 10 50 Vehicle Care Fuses and Circuit Breakers If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along witho
254. deterrent system When the PASS Key III system senses that someone is using the wrong key it prevents the vehicle from starting Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes If the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to start the vehicle there may be a problem with the theft deterrent system Turn the ignition off and try again 2 14 If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 10 50 If the engine still does not start with the other key the vehicle needs service If the vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer who can service the PASS Key III to have a new key made It is possible for the PASS Key III decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for programming additional keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key III to have keys made and programmed to the system Keys Doors and Windows See your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to get a new key blank cut exactly as the ignit
255. display shows 100 the system is reset See Engine Oil Life System on page 10 11 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 9 87 For all other vehicles use only the unleaded gasoline described under Recommended Fuel on page 9 84 Driving for Better Fuel Economy Driving habits can affect fuel mileage Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible e Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly e Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops e Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time e When road and weather conditions are appropriate use cruise control In Brief 1 35 Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require Keep vehicle tires properly inflated Combine several trips into a single trip Replace the vehicle s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire s sidewall near the size Follow recommended scheduled maintenance 1 36 In Brief Roadside Assistance Program U S 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 TTY Users U S 1 888 889 2438 Canada 1 800 268 6800 Mexico 01 800 466 0801 As the owner of a new GMC you are automatically enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program See Roadside Assistance Program U S and Canada on page 13 8 or Roadside Assistan
256. dlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic Z WARNING Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert If the vehicle stalls or is about to stall and you cannot make it up the hill Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards and apply the parking brake If the engine is still running shift the transmission to R Reverse release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in R Reverse If the engine has stopped running you need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to P Park and restart the engine Then shift to R Reverse release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in R Reverse 9 14 e While backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position so you can tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as you back down It is best to back down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Things not to do if the vehicle stalls or is about to stall wh
257. e In an emergency use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 84 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Install the spare tire Z WARNING Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash 10 Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel 11 Tighten each wheel nut by hand Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held against the hub 12 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle Lower the jack completely Z WARNING If wheel studs are damaged they can break If all the studs ona wheel broke the wheel could come off and cause a crash If any stud is damaged because of a loose running wheel it could be that all of the studs are damaged To be sure replace all studs on the wheel If the stud holes in a wheel have become larger the wheel could collapse in operation Replace any wheel if its stud holes have become larger or distorted in any way Inspect hubs and hub piloted wheels for damage Because of loose running wheels piloting pad damage may occur and require replacement of the entire hub for proper centering of the wheels When replacing studs hubs whe
258. e crashes safety belts are your only restraint See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 3 32 Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 3 30 Seats and Restraints ZN WARNING Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear a safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat mounted side impact airbags and or roof rail airbags Z WARNING Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them You
259. e letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches Vehicle Care 10 61 F Service Description These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carrying capacity a tire is certified to carry The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load LT245 75R16 E120 116S A B CODE F Light Truck LT Metric Tire A Light Truck LT Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association 10 62 Vehicle Care B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the light truck LT Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Load Range L
260. e stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates 9 70 Minor brake pedal pulsation or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased Hill Start Assist HSA 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist HSA feature which may be useful when the vehicle is stopped on a grade This feature is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling either forward or rearward during vehicle drive off After the driver completely stops and holds the vehicle in a complete standstill on a grade HSA will be automatically Driving and Operating activated During the transition period between when the driver releases the brake pedal and starts to accelerate to drive off on a grade HSA holds the braking pressure for a maximum of two seconds to ensure that there is no rolling The brakes will automatically release when the accelerator pedal is applied within the two second window If
261. e Control Systems StabiliTrak System Locking Rear Axle Cruise Control Cruise Control Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Parking Assist Rear Vision Camera RVC Fuel FUGL ccc E E Recommended Fuel Gasoline Specifications U S and Canada Only California Fuel Requirements Fuels in Foreign Countries Fuel Additives Fuel E85 85 Ethanol Filling the Tank Filling a Portable Fuel Container 9 1 9 70 9 73 9 73 9 2 Driving and Operating Towing General Towing Information 9 90 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 9 91 Trailer Towing 9 95 Towing Equipment 9 112 Trailer Sway Control TSC 9 124 Conversions and Add Ons Add On Electrical Equipment 9 125 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment 9 125 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab 9 129 Driving Information Defensive Driving Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to wear the safety belt See Safety Belts on page 3 11 Z WARNING Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition e Allow enough
262. e TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required temperature ranges allow the vehicle to cool or operate the vehicle until the appropriate transmission fluid temperature is reached Cold Check Procedure Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check procedure can be made The hot check procedure is the most accurate method to check the fluid level Perform the hot check procedure at the first opportunity Use this cold check procedure to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is between 27 C and 32 C 80 F and 90 F Vehicle Care 10 17 t a Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for more information Flip the handle up then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading 10 18 Vehicle Care 5 If the fluid level is below the COLD check band add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band It does not take much fluid generally less than 0 5 Liter 1 Pint Do not overfill Perform a hot check at the
263. e area by pressing and holding in the driver side of the handle and pull out on the exposed portion of the handle Storage 4 1 Glove Box Lift up on the glove box lever to open it Cupholders Vehicles with cupholders have them located on and behind the center console and in the rear seat armrest Pull the loop down on the rear seat armrest to access the cupholders Pull downward on the cover to access the cupholders behind the center console Armrest Storage Vehicles with a rear seat armrest have two cupholders Pull the armrest down from the rear seatback to access the cupholders 4 2 Storage Center Console Storage Vehicles with an upper and lower center console storage area have cupholders included Pull the lever A up to access the upper storage area Raise the upper storage bin then pull the lever B up to access the lower storage area Use the key to lock and unlock the lower storage area Instruments and Controls Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment 5 2 Steering Wheel Controls 5 3 FIONN ecSecdeey resen he edad ees 5 5 Windshield Wiper Washer 5 5 Compass 0 00 cece 5 6 ClOCKisc22 nongie e tases 5 8 Power Outlets 5 10 Cigarette Lighter 5 11 Ashtrays 22 0020 ee 5 12 Warning Lights Gauges and Indicators Warning Lights Gauges and Indicators iscsi eeeadens 5 12 Instrument Cluster 5 13 Speedomet
264. e following order e Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder Infotainment System 7 19 File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages are shortened The display does not show parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the file name is not displayed Preprogrammed Playlists CDs that have preprogrammed playlists reated using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however there is no playlist editing capability using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files 7 20 Playlists that have an m3u or pls file extension and are stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio with a USB port Playlists can be changed by using the softkeys below the lt 7
265. e knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock might be heard when driving If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher the engine needs service If the vehicle has the 6 2L V8 engine VIN Code 2 use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher You can also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher but the vehicle s acceleration could be slightly reduced and a slight audible knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock might be heard If the octane is less than 87 you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you could damage the engine If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications U S and Canada Only At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Fuel Additives on page 9 86 for additional information Driving and Operating 9 85 California Fuel Requirements If the vehicle is certified to meet California E
266. e speed and load can be gradually increased Driving and Operating Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal On vehicles with this feature you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the vehicle is in R Reverse or while using cruise control S gt gt The control used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system Press the bottom of the control to move the pedals closer Press the top of the control to move the pedals away Before you start driving fully press the brake pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you While driving make only small adjustments The vehicle may have a memory function which lets pedal settings be saved and recalled See Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 4 for more information 9 35 Ignition Positions B Aw WE y vd og The ignition switch has four different positions To shift out of P Park the ignition must be in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must be applied 9 36 A STOPPING THE ENGINE LOCK OFF When the vehicle is stopped turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF to turn the engine off Retained Accessory Power RAP will remain active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 9 40 This position locks the ignition It also locks the transmission on automatic transmission vehicles The key can be removed in LOCK
267. e third party to be called 4 Once the call is connected press to link all callers together Ending a Call Press C V to end a call Muting a Call During a call all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them To mute a call press 4 and then say Mute call e To cancel mute press and then say Un mute call Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the Bluetooth system and the cell phone The cell phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred The connection process can take up to two minutes after the ignition is turned to ON RUN Infotainment System 7 55 Transferring Audio from the Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle 1 Press amp W 2 Say Transfer Call Transferring Audio to the Bluetooth System from a Cell Phone During a call with the audio on the cell phone press The audio transfers to the vehicle If the audio does not transfer to the vehicle use the audio transfer feature on the cell phone See your cell phone manufacturer s user guide for more information 7 56 Infotainment System Voice Pass Thru Voice pass thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone See your cell phone manufacturer s user guide to see if the cell phone support
268. e was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Driving and Operating Filling the Tank If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information Z WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island Turn off the engine when refueling Do not smoke near fuel or when refueling the vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 9 87 To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise Z WARNING Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could
269. ead of a value there may be a problem with the vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer for service 5 37 Trailer Gain and Output On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system the trailer brake display appears in the DIC Press the vehicle information button until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting This setting can be adjusted from 0 0 to 10 0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer any time a trailer with electric brakes is connected Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars Dashes may appear in the OUTPUT display To adjust trailer gain see Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing Equipment on page 9 112 for more information Engine Hours Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE HOURS displays This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run 5 38 Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone See Compass on page 5 6 for more information Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass See Compass on page 5 6 for more information Blank Display This display shows no information Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items with DIC Buttons Use the trip odometer reset stem to view the odometer and trip odometer The Language selection and Engine Hours display can also be accessed with
270. east 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors Ask a dealer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this Driving and Operating 9 41 Shifting Into Park Z WARNING It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow With four wheel drive if the transfer case is in N Neutral the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral If you are pulling a trailer see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9 91 Hold the brake pedal down then set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 9 69 for more information Move the shift lever into the P Park position by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go Be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear not in N Neutral Turn the ignition key to LOCK OFF
271. eat If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult Size Occupant If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 3 Place the seatback in the fully upright position 4 Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with legs comfortably extended 5 Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature will be engaged This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult size occupants If this happens let
272. eature allows you to select the volume level of the chime Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings NORMAL The chime volume will be set to a normal level LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain There is no default for chime volume The volume will stay at the last known setting To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 5 57 PARK TILT MIRRORS If the vehicle has this feature it allows you to select if the outside mirror s will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2 17 for more information Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse DRIVER MIRROR The driver outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse 5 58 PASSENGER MIRROR The passenger outside mirror will be tilted down w
273. ected contact your dealer Radio AM FM Radio Radio Data System RDS For radios with the Radio Data System RDS feature it only works with FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters will display In rare cases a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station i Information RDS Features For vehicles with RDS features press ito display additional text information related to the current FM RDS station If information is available the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line When information is not available NO INFO displays Finding a Station BAND Press to switch between AM FM or XM if equipped J Tune Turn to manually select radio stations KI SEEK Press to seek the previous radio station Press and hold for a few seconds until a beep sounds to scan for radio stations in descending order press the Kl SEEK button again to stop scanning radio stations The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band For the AM FM Radio press and hold the Kl SEEK for fo
274. ed Automatic Transmission Shown Light Duty 6 Speed Similar See Range Selection Mode under Manual Mode on page 9 50 P Park This position locks the rear wheels It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily When parked on a hill especially when the vehicle has a heavy load you might notice an increase in the effort to shift out of P Park See Torque Lock under Shifting Into Park on page 9 41 for more information Z WARNING It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others Continued WARNING Continued could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into Park on page 9 41 If you are pulling a trailer see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9 91 Z WARNING If you have Four Wheel Drive the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park if the transfer case is in Neutral So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear Two Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive Low not in Neutral See Shifting I
275. ed Maintenance on page 11 2 provides information on maintaining the noise control system to minimize degradation of the noise emission control system during the life of your vehicle The noise control system warranty is given in your warranty booklet These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the United States Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof 1 The removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance repair or replacement of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use or 2 The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below Insulation Removal of the noise shields or any underhood insulation Engine Removal or rendering engine speed governor if the vehicle has one inoperative so as to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications Fan and Drive e Removal of fan clutch if the vehicle has one or rendering clutch inoperative e Removal of the fan shroud if the vehicle has one Air Intake e Removal of the air cleaner silencer e Modification of the air cleaner Exhaust e Removal of the muffler and or resonator e Removal
276. ed an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so Adding Equipment to the Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim overhead console front sensors side impact sensors or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger s position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger s seat The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers upholstery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed
277. ed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index Continued WARNING Continued For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 9 44 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO Carbon Monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm but be careful To save fuel run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold Moving about to keep warm also helps If it takes some time for help to arrive now and then when you run the engine push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps Do this as little as possible to save fuel If the Vehicle is Stuck Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out later in this section If the vehicle has a traction system it can often help to fr
278. educes wear on the braking system and increases control of the vehicle Grade Braking monitors vehicle speed acceleration engine torque and brake pedal usage Using this information it detects when the truck is on a downhill grade and the driver desires to slow the vehicle by pressing the brake This feature is active when the exhaust brake is enabled if equipped Also see Towing Equipment on page 9 112 for more information Driving and Operating Cruise Grade Braking Allison Transmission or Hydra Matic 6 Speed Automatic Transmission Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade It maintains vehicle speed by automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle Cruise Grade Braking operates while Cruise Control is engaged in Tow Haul Mode to assist in maintaining vehicle speed under loaded vehicle conditions It utilizes vehicle acceleration and deviation from desired speed to determine 9 53 the correct gear for the operating condition If vehicle speed is above the desired speed the transmission will downshift to slow the vehicle If vehicle speed is near or below desired speed the trans will upshift allowing vehicle speed to increase While in the Range Selection Mode Cruise Grade Braking is not available This feature is active when the exhaust brake is enabled if equipped See Range Selection Mode under Manual M
279. ee Door Locks on page 2 8 1 10 In Brief Windows Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or lower the manual windows Power Windows amp Crew Cab Shown If available the power window switches are located on each of the side doors in the front and rear The driver door has a switch for the passenger window and rear windows Press the switch to lower the window Pull the switch up to raise it For more information see e Windows on page 2 18 e Power Windows on page 2 19 Power Sliding Rear Window On vehicles with a power sliding rear window the switch is located in the overhead console See Rear Windows on page 2 20 The power sliding rear window cannot be operated manually e Push to open the window e Pull to close the window Seat Adjustment Manual Seats To adjust the seat 1 Lift the bar to unlock the seat 2 Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar 3 Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure the seat is locked in place See Seat Adjustment on page 3 3 for more information Power Seats To adjust a power seat if equipped e Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward e If available raise or lower the front or rear part of the seat cushion by moving the front or rear of the control up or down e If available raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down
280. ee a stuck vehicle Refer to the vehicle s traction system in the Index If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method Driving and Operating 9 23 ZN WARNING If the vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 55 km h 35 mph For information about using tire chains on the vehicle see Tire Chains on page 10 83 9 24 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels For four wheel drive vehicles shift into Four Wheel High For vehicles with StabiliTrak turn the traction control part of the system off Shift back and forth between R Reverse and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while shifting and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the Driving and Operating vehicle If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out Recovery hooks can be used if the
281. eflated airbags 3 36 Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle ZN WARNING When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention Seats and Restraints The vehicle may have a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn off the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features Z WARNING A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle such as the fuel system brake and steering systems etc Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has oc
282. ehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Driving and Operating 9 37 Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you do not the engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts 9 38 The vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF position Driving and Operating When the Low Fuel warning lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL LOW message is displayed i
283. eight ratings GAWR The total axle loads should not exceed your vehicle s gross vehicle weight rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label attached to the rear edge of the driver door See Certification Tire Label under Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 lf weight ratings are exceeded move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings See your dealer for more information on curb weights cargo weights Cargo Weight Rating and the correct center of gravity zone Driving and Operating Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break In Notice The vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines e Keep the vehicle speed at 88 km h 55 mph or less for the first 805 km 500 miles e Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 805 km 500 miles Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle e Avoid making hard stops for the first 322 km 200 miles or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings e Do not tow a trailer during break in See Trailer Towing on page 9 95 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information Following break in engin
284. el If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager 13 2 STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help in the U S call 1 800 462 8782 In Canada call General Motors of Canada Customer Communication at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative e Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership name and location e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage Customer Information When contacting GMC remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest following Step One first STEP THREE U S Owners Both General Motors and the dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with the new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you can file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto
285. el nuts or wheels be sure to use GM original equipment parts Z WARNING Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts See Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 for the wheel nut torque specification Vehicle Care 10 93 13 Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise For vehicles with dual wheels have a technician check the wheel nut tightness of all wheels with a torque wrench after the first 100 miles 160 km and then 1 000 miles 1600 km after that Repeat this service whenever you have a tire removed or serviced See Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 for more information 10 94 Vehicle Care When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire you must also reinstall either the center cap or bolt on hub cap depending on what your vehicle
286. ell The center of gravity height must not extend above the top of the pickup box flareboard Any load that extends beyond the vehicle s taillamp area must be properly marked according to local laws and regulations Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the front or rear axle Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you Carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment Notice Overloading the vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not overload the vehicle Driving and Operating Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the front or rear axle Maximum Weight Ladder Rack 340 kg and Cargo 750 Ibs Cross Toolbox 181 kg and Cargo 400 Ibs Side Boxes and Cargo 113 kg per side 250 Ibs per side The combined weight for all rail mounted equipment should not exceed 454 kg 1 000 Ibs 9 31 Loading Points A Primary Load Points B Secondary Load Areas C Cargo Management Option Holes Structural members A and B are included in the pick up box design Additional accessories should use these load points Depending on the accessory design use a spacer under the accessory at the load points to remove gap 9 32 The holes for the Cargo Management System C are not intended for
287. em This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system evaluates critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection 5 27 Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on the brake system warning light comes on when the parking brake is set If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged a chime sounds when the vehicle speed is greater than 8 km h 5 mph The vehicle brake system consists of two hydraulic circuits If one circuit is not working the remaining circuit can still work to stop the vehicle For normal braking performance both circuits need to be working If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there could be a brake problem Have the brake system inspected right away 5 28 This light can also come on due to low brake fluid See Brake Fluid on page 10 32 for more information O Ow Metric English This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to ON RUN If it does not come on then have it fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem ZN WARNING The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system Continued Instruments and Controls WAR
288. ems e Headlamps e Taillamps e Parking Lamps e License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Roof Marker Lamps If Equipped 6 2 Lighting The exterior lamps control has four positions amp Off Turns off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps DRL Turn the headlamp control to the off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on For vehicles first sold in Canada the off position will only work when the vehicle is shifted into P Park AUTO Automatic Automatically turns on the headlamps at normal brightness together with the following e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps e Roof Marker Lamps If Equipped When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in AUTO the headlamps may automatically remain on for a set time The time of the delay can be changed using the DIC See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 200 Parking Lamps Turns on the parking lamps together with the following e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps e Roof Marker Lamps If Equipped AD Headlamps Turns on the headlamps together with the following e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps e Roof Marker Lamps If Equipped When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition
289. en going up a hill e Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into N Neutral to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work The vehicle can roll backward very quickly and could go out of control Driving and Operating e Never try to turn around if about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle it is steep enough to cause it to roll over If you cannot make it up the hill back straight down the hill If after stalling you try to back down the hill and decide you just cannot do it set the parking brake put your transmission in P Park and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer case to Neutral when you leave the vehicle Leave it in some gear Z WARNING Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park This is because the Neutral position on the transfer case overrides the transmission You or someone else could be injured If you are going to leave your vehicle set the parking brake and shift the transmission to P Park But do not shift the transfer case to Neutral Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill consider e How steep is the downhill Will be able to maintain vehicle control e What is the surf
290. en if belted to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash Z WARNING If the right front passenger airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government that person will not have the extra protection Continued WARNING Continued of an airbag In a crash the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Do not turn off the passenger airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group PASSENGER S AIR BAG OFF E LAN o j 7 United States Canada and Mexico To turn off the right front passenger airbag insert the ignition key into the switch push in and move the switch to the off position The word OFF or the off symbol will come on in the passenger airbag status indicator located in the overhead console to let you know that the right front passenger airbag is off after the system check Seats and Restraints 3 39 is completed The airbag off light will come on and stay on to let you know that the right front passenger s airbag is off See Airbag On Off Light on page 5 21 Z WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system For example the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on off switch is turned off To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right a
291. en using the in vehicle Bluetooth system sound comes through the vehicle s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system Use the audio system volume knob during a call to change the volume level The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls To prevent missed calls a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low Bluetooth Controls Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in vehicle Bluetooth system See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 3 for more information amp w Push To Talk Press to answer incoming calls confirm system information and start speech recognition O V Phone On Hook Press to end a call reject a call or cancel an operation Pairing A Bluetooth cell phone must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used See the cell phone manufacturer s user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone If a Bluetooth phone is not connected calls will be made using OnStar Hands Free Calling if equipped Refer to the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information Pairing Information Up to five cell phones can be paired to the Bluetooth system The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving Pairing only needs to be completed once unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system Only one paired ce
292. ening to the CD or DVD A While a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer press this button to select the next disc if multiple discs are loaded This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc While a DVD video menu is being displayed press the PROG button to perform the menu function Enter 7 50 Phone Bluetooth If equipped a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls The system can be used while the key is in the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9 1 m 30 ft Not all phones support all functions and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in vehicle Bluetooth system See www gm com bluetooth for more information on compatible phones Voice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags For additional information say Help while you are in a voice recognition menu Infotainment System Noise Keep interior noise levels to a minimum The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise When to Speak A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command Wait until the tone and then speak How to Speak Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice Audio System Wh
293. ep the battery from running down Extended Storage Remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger Four Wheel Drive Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 to determine when to check the lubricant How to Check Lubricant Electric Shift Transfer Case A Fill Plug B Drain Plug Manual Shift Transfer Case A Fill Plug B Drain Plug Active Transfer Case A Fill Plug B Drain Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface Vehicle Care 10 35 If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole located on the transfer case some lubricant will need to be added Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug When to Change Lubricant Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 to determine how often to change the lubricant What to Use Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 to determine what kind of lubricant to use 10 36 Vehicle Care Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 1500 Series A
294. er 5 14 Odometer 5 5 14 Trip Odometer 5 14 Tachometer 5 15 Fuel Gauge 5 15 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge 25 45 Engine Coolant Temperature GaUGe EE Voltmeter Gauge Safety Belt Reminders Airbag Readiness Light Airbag On Off Light Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Charging System Light Malfunction Indicator Lamp Brake System Warning LIQ sed cr eteeeeaseeny 4 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light Four Wheel Drive Light Tow Haul Mode Light StabiliTrak Indicator Light Tire Pressure Light Engine Oil Pressure Light Low Fuel Warning Light Security Light High Beam On Light Front Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light Instruments and Controls Information Displays 5 16 Driver Information 5 18 Vehicle Messages 5 19 Vehicle Messages 5 20 Battery Voltage and Charging 5 21 Messages Brake System Messages 5 23 Door Ajar Messages 5 24 Engine Cooling System 5 29 Object Detection System 5 29 Messages 5 30 Ride Control System 5 30 Messages 5 31 Airbag System Messages 5 31 Anti Theft Alarm System 5 32 Messages 5 32 Starting the Vehicle 5 32 Messages
295. er Blade Replacement 10 41
296. er Brake Control Panel is used along with the Trailer Brake Display Page on the DIC to adjust and display power output to the trailer brakes Trailer Brake DIC Display Page The ITBC system displays messages on the vehicle s Driver Information Center DIC See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 for more information The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting power output to the electric trailer brakes trailer connection and system operational status 9 120 The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed by performing any of the following actions e Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using the odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information button if equipped e Pressing a Trailer Gain button If the Trailer Brake Display Page is not currently displayed pressing a Trailer Gain button will first recall the current Trailer Gain setting After the Trailer Brake Display Page is displayed each press and release of the gain buttons will then cause the Trailer Gain setting to change e Activating the Manual Trailer Brake Apply lever e Connecting a trailer equipped with electric trailer brakes Driving and Operating All DIC warning and service messages must first be acknowledged by the driver by pressing the odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information button if equipped before the Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed and Trailer Gain can be adjusted TRAILER GA
297. er in this section If the airbag has inflated see What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates on page 3 35 Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that the vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take the vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by the GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with the repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if the vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as the cost stays within reasonable limits Service Publications Ordering Information Service
298. erature Gauge on page 5 17 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor turns back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine Instruments and Controls ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive the vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 10 25 for more information This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 5 17 See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 10 28 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive the vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 10 25 for more information This message displays and a chime may sound if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for opera
299. erent models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs Z WARNING To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash infants need complete support This is because an infant s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing child restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in rear facing child restraints Seats and Restraints 3 53 ZN WARNING A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash young children should always be secured in appropriate child
300. ers from opening the rear doors from the inside Open the rear doors to access the security locks on the inside edge of each door To set the locks insert a key into the slot and turn it to the horizontal position The door can only be opened from the outside with the door unlocked To return the door to normal operation turn the slot to the vertical position The rear access door must be closed before the front door can 2 10 Keys Doors and Windows Doors Rear Doors iii Extended Cab To open a rear access door from the outside first open the front door Then use the handle located on the front edge of the rear access door to open it To open a rear access door from the inside first open the front door Then use the handle located on the inside of the rear access door to open Tailgate Z WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds People riding on the tailgate can easily lose their balance and fall in response to vehicle maneuvers Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or death Do not allow people to ride on the tailgate Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly On vehicles with a lock on the tailgate use the key to lock or unlock the tailgate Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you To shut t
301. erted This message displays if no disc is present when EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio 7 48 Infotainment System DVD Distortion Video distortion can occur when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Position Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax machines or walkie talkies It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen as damage could result Rear Seat Audio RSA System Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources radio CDs DVDs or other auxiliary sources However the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to except on some radios where dual control is allowed For example rear seat passengers can control and listen to a CD through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones The radio functionality is controlled by both the RSA and the fro
302. erted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if no disc is present when the 4 or DVD CD AUX button is pressed on the radio Optical Error This message displays if the disc was inserted upside down Disk Read Error This message displays if a disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format 7 34 Player Error This message displays if there are disc load or disc eject problems e Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the disc should play e The road is very rough When the road becomes smoother the disc should play e The disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There was a problem while burning the disc e The label is caught in the CD DVD player If the disc is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good disc Infotainment System If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Auxiliary Devices Using the Auxiliary Input Jack Radios with an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate can connect to an external audio device such as an iPod MP3 player o
303. ervice based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound A service fee is required to receive the XM service If the service needs to be reactivated the radio will display No Subscription Please Renew on channel XM1 For more information contact XM at www xmradio com or 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and www xmradio ca or 1 877 438 9677 in Canada i Information XM Satellite Radio Service For vehicles with XM press i to display additional text information related to the current XM channel If information is available the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line When information is not available NO INFO displays Finding a Channel BAND Press to switch between AM FM or XM if equipped J Tune Turn to manually select an XM channel KI SEEK Press to go to the previous XM channel A SEEK Press to go to the next XM channel lt 1 REV Press to go to the previous XM category gt D FWD Press to go to the next XM category FAV Favorites Press to select different favorites pages for stored radio stations CAT Category The CAT button is used to find XM channels when the radio is in the XM mode Finding a Category CAT Station To find XM channels in a cate
304. es 64 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 Heated Windshield Washer System Stud 1 Trailer Connector Battery Power Optional 40A Fuse Required Mid Bussed Electrical Center 1 70 Climate Control Blower Vehicle Care 10 53 Not Used Left Bussed Electrical Center 2 Cooling Fan High Speed Cooling Fan Low Speed Cooling Fan Control Low Beam LO HID Headlamp FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps A C Air Conditioning CMPRSR Compressor PWRITRN FUEL PMP Fuel Pump PRK LAMP Parking Lamps J Case Fuses 71 72 Relays FAN HI FAN LO FAN CNTRL HDLP 10 54 Vehicle Care Rear Defogger Switched Power Instrument Panel Fuse Block Relays REAR DEFOG RUN CRNK The instrument panel fuse block access door is located on the driver side edge of the instrument panel Pull off the cover to access the fuse block ITOR y LTDR BA Ha EB 3 cs 4 a E93 m ea Ge es Bs cs Gea cop Ga oy am aay 3 BODY C253 S The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage with all of the fuses relays and features shown Fuses Usage Rear Accessory Power Outlet 3 Steering Wheel Controls Backlight Driver Door Module 5 Dome Lamps Driver Side Turn Signal Driver Side Turn Signal Stoplamp 7 Instrument Panel Back Lighting Passenger Side Turn Signal Stoplamp Passenger Door Module Driver Unlock Power Door Lock 2 Unlock Feature Power Door Lock
305. es may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means the vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 6 km 1 mile Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Tire Pressure for High Speed Operation Z WARNING Driving at high speeds 160 km h 100 mph or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require Continued Vehicle Care 10 67 WARNING Continued inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed opera
306. es with proper tread depth See Tires on page 10 57 e Turn off cruise control Driving and Operating Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park the vehicle and rest Other driving tips include e Keep the vehicle well ventilated e Keep interior temperature cool e Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides e Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include e Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape e Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling system and transmission e Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills Z WARNING If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope Z WARNING Coasting downhill in N Neutral or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine ru
307. ese bulbs 1 Open the tailgate See Tailgate on page 2 10 for more information 2 Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws near the tailgate latch strikerpost and pull rearward until disengaging the two outer pins on the taillamp assembly from the vehicle A Stoplamp Turn Signal Taillamp B Back up Lamp C Sidemarker Lamp Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly Reinstall the taillamp assembly Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL and Cargo Lamp To replace one of these bulbs 1 Remove the two screws and lift off the lamp assembly B B A Cargo Lamp B Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Bulb Vehicle Care 10 47 On the reverse side of the lamp assembly remove the bulb socket by turning it one quarter turn counterclockwise and pull it straight out Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of the socket Install the bulb by pushing the bulb straight into the socket Install the bulb socket into the lamp asembly by turning it one quarter turn clockwise Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws 10 48 Vehicle Care License Plate Lamp Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp To replace one of these bulbs Exterior Lamp Number 1 Reach under the rea
308. et U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean and avoid problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by the auto companies A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www toptiergas com For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors It is available at your dealer Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Some gasol
309. et out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down Q If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear safety belts A Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If am a good driver and never drive far from home why should I wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you are in a crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 40 km 25 miles of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 65 km h 40 mph Safety belts are for everyone Seats and Restraints 3 15 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and infants If a child will be riding in the vehicle see Older Children on page 3 49 or Infants and Young Children on page 3 51 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important fo
310. et the lock When the retractor lock is set the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor Seats and Restraints 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 4 and 5 6 If the child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for more information 7 Before placing a child in the child restraint make sure it is securely held in place To check grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth When the child restraint is properly installed there should be no more than 2 5 cm 1 in of movement To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Securing Child Restraints Right Front Seat Position With Passenger Sensing System This vehicle has airbags A
311. etween the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 6mm 1 16 in of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 10 76 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 10 80 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg 150 Ibs plus the rated cargo load See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 Vehicle Care 10 65 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 10 66 Vehicle Care Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good
312. even make the vehicle move The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows 2 19 Q Crew Cab Shown If the vehicle has power windows controls are located on each door The driver door has a switch for the passenger and rear windows as well The power windows will work when the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 9 40 Push the switch down to lower the window and pull up the front of the switch to raise the window 2 20 Express down Windows Vehicles with the express down feature allow the driver and front passenger windows to be lowered without holding the switch Push the switch down to the second detent then release to activate the express down mode The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the front of the switch To open the window partway push the switch down to the first detent until the window is at the desired position Window Lockout tas Window Lockout If a crew cab or extended cab vehicle has power windows the driver door power window switch has a lockout feature This feature prevents the rear windows from operating except fro
313. ey is taken out of the ignition ALL IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback received when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 3 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN amp LIGHTS default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feat
314. f the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded b Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 680 kg 1 500 Ibs maximum c This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers d Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1 361 kg 3 000 Ibs maximum e Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1 587 kg 3 500 Ibs maximum 9 110 Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices U S and Canada on page 13 5 or Customer Assistance Offices Mexico on page 13 5 for more information Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is very important because it is also part of the vehicle weight The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the Driving and Operating vehicle any cargo carried in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle as well as trailer tongue weight Vehicle options equipment passengers and cargo in the vehicle reduce the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow See Vehicle Load Limits for
315. f the vehicle hits an object that does not deform e Ifthe vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e Ifthe vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts If the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of your vehicle is 3 855 kg 8 500 Ib or above the vehicle has single stage airbags If the GVWR is below 3 855 kg 8 500 Ib then the vehicle has dual stage airbags Vehicles with a full bench seat are equipped with single state airbags You can find the GVWR on the certification label on the rear edge of the driver door See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 for more information Seats and Restraints 3 33 The vehicle may have dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs Vehicles with dual stage ai
316. fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system Z WARNING If too much brake fluid is added it can spill on the engine and burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned Continued WARNING Continued and the vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section When the brake fluid falls to a low level the brake warning light comes on See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 27 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check the brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 A A The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir Z WARNING With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system the brakes might not work well This could ca
317. following distance between you and the driver in front of you Focus on the task of driving Continued WARNING Continued Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunk Driving Z WARNING Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home ina cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate t
318. for Diesel Engines in the Duramax Diesel Supplement For Vehicles with gasoline engines please read this Gasoline Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by auto companies A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www toptiergas com Driving and Operating TOP _ GrOTIER Detergent Gasoline CATEGORIE Gx SUPERIEURE Essences D tergentes The eighth digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 12 1 Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 9 87 For all other vehicles use only the unleaded gasoline described under Recommended Fuel on page 9 84 Recommended Fuel For all vehicles except those with the 6 2L V8 engine VIN Code 2 use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 an audibl
319. for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the four wheel drive system needs service See your dealer Instruments and Controls TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive the vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by the warranty Do not drive the vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed This message displays and a chime may sound if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool This message clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level Vehicle Reminder Messages CHECK TRAILER WIRING On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system this message may display and a chime may sound when one of the following conditions exists e A trailer with electric brakes becomes disconnected from the vehicle If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stopped this message Clears itself after a short time If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving this message sta
320. front or rear of the control up or down e If available raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down To adjust the seatback see Power Reclining Seatbacks under Reclining Seatbacks on page 3 6 Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals l aS On vehicles with the memory feature the controls on the driver door are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver seat outside mirrors and the adjustable throttle and brake pedals if equipped Storing Memory Positions To save into memory 1 Adjust the driver seat seatback recliner both outside mirrors and the throttle and brake pedals if available See Power Mirrors on page 2 16 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 9 35 for more information Not all mirrors and adjustable throttles and brake pedals will have the ability to save and recall their positions 2 Press and hold 1 until two beeps sound 3 Repeat for a second driver position using 2 To recall press and release 1 or 2 The vehicle must be in P Park A single beep will sound The seat outside mirrors and adjustable throttle and brake pedals will move to the position previously stored for the identified driver Memory Remote Recall The memory feature can recall the driver seat outside mirrors and pedals if available to stored positions when entering the vehicle To activate unlock the
321. fter the ignition is turned off The cargo lamp shuts off after 20 minutes This prevents the battery from running down Infotainment System Introduction Infotainment Theft Deterrent Feature Operation Radio AM FM Radio Satellite Radio Radio Reception Fixed Mast Antenna Satellite Radio Antenna Audio Players CD Player CD DVD Player Auxiliary Devices Rear Seat Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Rear Seat Audio RSA Syste Mirre priserne Phone Bluetooth Introduction Infotainment Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features Z WARNING Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings Infotainment System 7 1 To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving do the following while the vehicle is parked Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system e Set up the tone speaker adjustments and preset radio stations For more information see Defensive Driving on page 9 2 Notice Contact your de
322. g 12 000 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs 5 3LV8 2 948 kg 6 500 Ibs 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs 9 100 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Conventional Trailer 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Fifth Wheel Trailer Driving and Operating Axle Ratio 3 42 3 42 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs Maximum Trailer Weight 4 536 kg 10 000 Ibs 3 992 kg 8 800 Ibs 1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box b 5 3LV8 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Conventional Trailer 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Fifth Wheel Trailer 3 08 3 08 3 42 3 4 2722 kg 6 000 Ibs 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs 3 039 kg 6 700 Ibs 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs 4 309 kg 9 500 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 2 4 037 kg 8 900 Ibs 6 804 kg 15 000 Ibs 1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box b 3 73 3 42 3 08 3 08 2 313 kg 5 100 Ibs 2722 kg 6 000 Ibs 2 903 kg 6 400 Ibs 3 221 kg 7 100 Ibs 4536 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 990 kg 11 000 Ibs 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 534 kg 12 200 Ibs Driving and Operating 9 101 Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR a 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Conventional Trailer 4 037 kg 8 900 Ibs 6 350 kg 14 000 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg Fifth Wheel Trailer 3 674 kg 8 100 Ibs 6 350 kg 14 000 Ibs 1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box b 4 8L V8 c 4 990 kg 11 000 Ibs 5 3L V8 c 5 216 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
323. g The elapsed time of the file displays lt Previous Folder Press the softkey below the lt tab to go to the first track in the previous folder gt gt Next Folder Press the softkey below the gt tab to go to the first track in the next folder RDM Random Press to listen to tracks in random rather than sequential order To use random do one of the following For the Radio with CD MP3 and Radio with USB and CD MP3 1 Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays 2 Press the softkey again to turn off random play For the Radio with USB and Six Disc CD MP3 1 Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All Discs displays to play tracks from all CDs loaded in random order 2 Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays to play tracks from a single CD in random order 3 Press the same softkey again to turn off random play Music Navigator Press the softkey below the tab to play the files in order by artist or album The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of files on the disc The radio may begin playing while it is scanning in the background When the scan is finished the disc begins playing files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on
324. g Into Two Wheel Drive High Turn the knob to the Two Wheel Drive High position This can be done at any speed except when shifting from Four Wheel Drive Low See Shifting Out of Four Wheel Drive Low for more information Shifting Into Four Wheel Drive Low When Four Wheel Drive Low is engaged vehicle speed should be kept below 72 km h 45 mph Extended high speed operation in Four Wheel Drive Low may damage or shorten the life of the drivetrain To shift to the Four Wheel Drive Low position the ignition must be in ON RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 km h 3 mph with the transmission in N Neutral The preferred method for shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving 1 6 to 3 2 km h 1 to 2 mph Turn the knob to the Four Wheel Drive Low position You must wait for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission in gear Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging the vehicle always wait for the mode indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four Wheel Drive Low and Four Wheel Drive High ranges or from transfer case N Neutral with the engine running
325. g appears get service help right away See Roadside Assistance Program U S and Canada on page 13 8 or Roadside Assistance Program Mexico on page 13 10 If the decision is made to lift the hood make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by the vehicle warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice If the engine catches fire while driving with no coolant the vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 10 28 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment Z WARNING Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood Continued WARNING Continued If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated the liquids in it
326. g for Better Fuel ECONOMY cesccedtecsaceese wes Dual Automatic Climate Control System Dual Tire Rotation DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 2 20e cee DVD CD Player E85 Fuel sc0ecccsussveseecss 9 87 Electrical Equipment Add On 2 02000005 9 125 Electrical System Engine Compartment Fuse Block 10 50 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 00 000 10 50 Instrument Panel Fuse BIOGK pisccuitoiiees peetecs 10 54 Overload 0005 10 49 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 10 19 Check and Service Engine Soon Light 5 25 Compartment Overview 10 6 Coolant 000 eee 10 22 Coolant Heater 9 40 Coolant Temperature Gauge wis iaetidianaciawnods 5 17 Cooling System 10 20 Engine cont Cooling System Messages 5 44 Drive Belt Routing 12 6 EXhauSt z cicesnciczas amine cee 9 44 FAN oeer urea 10 28 Oil Pressure Gauge 5 16 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 10 28 Overheating 10 25 Power Messages 5 45 Pressure Light 5 31 Running While Parked 9 45 SLAMING saxicanctattics sae Ganaa 9 37 Engine Oil Life System 10 11 Messages 2 0 5 5 45 Entry Lighting 6 9 Equipment Towing 9 112 Event Data Recorders 13 17 E
327. g pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P Park This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P Park properly before you leave the driver seat To find out how Shifting Into Park on page 9 41 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of P Park before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission then you will be able to pull the shift lever out of P Park Shifting Out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to e Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P Park with the shift lever button fully released e Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P Park unless the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 10 98 for more information To shift out of P Park use the following 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Move the shift lever to the desired position If yo
328. g the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Low Traction Mode If your vehicle has the Allison Transmission or the Hydra Matic 6 Speed Automatic Transmission it has a Low Traction Mode that can assist in vehicle acceleration when road conditions are slippery such as with ice or snow While the vehicle is at a stop select the second gear range using Range Selection Mode This will limit torque to the wheels after it detects wheel slip preventing the tires from spinning Tow Haul Mode Vehicles with an automatic transmission have a Tow Haul Mode The Tow Haul Mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling providing increased performance vehicle control and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy loads Driving and Operating 9 51 The selector button is located on the end of the shift lever Turn the Tow Haul Mode on and off by pressing the button When the tow haul is on a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on See Tow Haul Mode Light on page 5 29 for more information Also see Tow Haul Mode under Towing Equipment on page 9 112 for more information 9 52 Tow Haul Mode Allison Transmission or Hydra Matic 6 Speed
329. ge the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 5 3L engine 4 3L 4 8L 6 0L and 6 2L similar 7 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery 8 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step 10 11 12 Vehicle Care 10 101 Connect the other end of the negative cable to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service 10 102 Vehicle Care Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not tou
330. gh ranges or from transfer case N Neutral with the engine running If the knob is turned to the Four Wheel Drive High or Two Wheel Drive High switch position when the vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Drive High or Two Wheel Drive High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 5 km h and the transmission is in N Neutral 9 62 Driving and Operating Shifting into Neutral To shift the transfer case to N Neutral do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll 2 Set the parking brake and press and hold the regular brake pedal See Parking Brake on page 9 69 for more information 3 Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON RUN 4 Shift the transmission to 8 N Neutral 5 Shift the transfer case to Two Wheel Drive High 9 6 Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N Neutral until it stops and hold it there until the Neutral light starts blinking This will take at least 10 seconds Then slowly release the dial to the four low position The N Neutral light will come on when the transfer case shift to N Neutral is complete If the engine is running verify that the transfer case is in N Neutral by shifting the transmission to R Reverse for one second then shift the transmission to D Drive for one second Turn the ignition to ACC ACCESSORY which
331. gine Cooling Fan Out of View Z WARNING An electric engine cooling fan can start even when the engine is not running To avoid injury always keep hands clothing and tools away from any engine cooling fan Z WARNING Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Continued Vehicle Care 10 21 WARNING Continued Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL can cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 50 000 km 30 000 mi or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle 10 22 Vehicle Care Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km 150 000 mi whichever occurs first The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low If there is a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 10 25 What to Use Z WARNING Adding only plain water or s
332. gnosis and service might be required 5 26 To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle e Reduce vehicle speed e Avoid hard accelerations e Avoid steep uphill grades e If towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the vehicle off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required Instruments and Controls The following may correct an emissions system malfunction e Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed See Filling the Tank on page 9 88 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off e Make sure the electrical system is not wet The system could be wet if the vehicle was driven through a deep puddle of water The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off e Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel Poor fuel quality c
333. gory 1 Press the CAT button to display the category tabs Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the category list by pressing the DD FWD or the 44 REV buttons 2 Press either of the two softkeys below the desired category tab to immediately tune to the first XM station in that category To go to the previous or next XM station in the selected category do one of the following e Turn the Jd knob s Press the softkey below the right or left arrows in the category tab e Press K SEEK or SEEK 3 To exit the category search mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display the favorites again Infotainment System 7 11 Adding and Removing Categories Categories cannot be added or removed while the vehicle is moving faster than 8 km h 5 mph To add or remove a category 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the softkey located below the XM CAT tab 3 Turn the Jd knob to display the category to add or remove 4 Press the softkey located under the Add or Remove tab To restore all removed categories press the softkey under the Restore All tab 5 Repeat the steps to remove more categories 7 12 Storing XM Channels Drivers are encouraged to store XM channels while the vehicle is parked see Defensive Driving on page 9 2 Tune to stored radio stations using the presets favorites button and steering w
334. hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan ZN WARNING Using an open flame near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Continued WARNING Continued Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Z WARNING Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 6 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go toa heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would dama
335. hange the position of the throttle and brake pedals S gt The control used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system Press the bottom of the control to move the pedals closer to your body Press the top of the control to move the pedals away See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 9 35 Interior Lighting Dome Lamps The dome lamps are located in the overhead console They come on when any door is opened and turn off after all the doors are closed Turn the instrument panel brightness knob located below the dome lamp override button clockwise to the farthest position to manually turn on the dome lamps The dome lamps remain on until the knob is turned counterclockwise Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control oi Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened Reading Lamps For vehicles with reading lamps in the overhead console press the button located next to the lamp to turn it on or off The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations To turn the lamps on or off press the button located next to the lamp For more information about interior lamps see e Dome Lamps on page 6 8 e Reading Lamps on page 6 9 e In
336. he leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of the vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 Adding non dealer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 10 3 Driving and Operating 9 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 27 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time Actually doing it is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in
337. he Duramax Diesel Supplement Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections recommended fluids and lubricants are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty As the vehicle owner you are responsible for the scheduled maintenance in this section We recommend having your dealer perform these services Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition improves fuel economy and reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality 11 1 Because of all the different ways people use vehicles maintenance needs vary The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services Please read the information under Scheduled Maintenance To keep the vehicle in good condition see your dealer The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that e Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 e Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e Are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving on page 9 7 e Use the recommended fuel See Recommended Fuel on page 9 84 11 2 ZN WARNING Performing maintenance work can be dangerous Some jobs can cause serious injury Perform maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper to
338. he current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Instruments and Controls FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The customization features will be set to their factory default settings DO NOT RESTORE The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button once to exit the menu If you do not exit pressing the customization button again will return you to the beginning of the feature settings menu Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs e The vehicle is no longer in ON RUN e The trip fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed e The end of the feature settings menu is reac
339. he distance to an object up to 2 5 m 8 ft behind the vehicle and at least 25 4 cm 10 in off the ground Z WARNING The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system does not replace driver vision It cannot detect e Objects that are below the bumper underneath the vehicle or too close or far from the vehicle e Children pedestrians bicyclists or pets If you do not use proper care before and while backing vehicle damage injury or death could occur Even with URPA always check behind the vehicle before backing up While backing be sure to look for objects and check the vehicle s mirrors How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R Reverse A single tone sounds to indicate the system is working URPA operates only at speeds less than 8 km h 5 mph An obstacle is indicated by audible beeps The interval between the beeps becomes shorter as the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle When the distance is less than 30 cm 12 in the beeps are continuous To be detected objects must be at least 25 4 cm 10 in off the ground and below tailgate level Objects must also be within 2 5 m 8 ft from the rear bumper This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather Driving and Operating Pea The system can be disabled by pressing the rear park aid disable button located next to the radio The indicator light comes on and PARK ASSIS
340. he indicator lights begin to blink release both buttons The codes from all buttons will be erased For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices U S and Canada on page 13 5 or Customer Assistance Offices Mexico on page 13 5 5 67 5 68 Instruments and Controls NOTES Lighting Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls 6 1 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder 0 0 0e05 6 3 Headlamp High Low Beam Change saccccssaeccneeaanens 6 3 Flash to Pass 6 3 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 6 4 Automatic Headlamp System 22 2000 0 eee 6 4 Hazard Warning Flashers 6 5 Turn and Lane Change SIGN AIS if anise pace esae sacs 6 6 Fog Lamps esre ceneks ereecads 6 6 Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp 6 7 Interior Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination COnttol sista st cca gadis 6 7 Cargo Lamp 6 8 Dome Lamps 6 8 Reading Lamps 6 9 Lighting Features Entry Lighting 6 9 Exit Lighting 6 9 Battery Load Management 6 9 Battery Power Protection 6 10 Lighting 6 1 Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls eS y ge gt a ARN The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel It controls the following syst
341. he panic alarm See Keys on page 2 2 and Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 3 Remote Vehicle Start With this feature the engine can be started from outside of the vehicle Starting the Vehicle 1 Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press Immediately after completing Step 2 press and hold Q until the turn signal lamps flash When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes Repeat the steps fora 10 minute time extension Remote start can be extended only once Canceling a Remote Start To cancel a remote start e Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press and hold Q until the parking lamps turn off e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Turn the ignition on and then back off See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 5 In Brief 1 9 Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle From outside use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the key in the driver door From inside use the power door locks or the manual door locks To lock or unlock the door with the manual locks push down or pull up on the manual lock knob Power Door Locks If available these switches are on the front doors A Press to unlock the doors Press to lock the doors S
342. he tailgate firmly push it upward until it latches After you put the tailgate back up pull it back towards you to be sure it latches securely Tailgate Removal The tailgate can be removed to allow for different loading situations Someone may need to assist with removal to avoid damage to the vehicle On vehicles with a Rear Vision Camera it must be disconnected before removing the tailgate See Rear Vision Camera RVC on page 9 78 for more information Keys Doors and Windows To remove the tailgate 1 Raise the tailgate slightly and release both retaining cable clips To release the retaining cable clips lift the cable so it points straight out Lift the clip over the bolt and push the cable forward then rotate down 2 11 2 With the tailgate about halfway open lift the right edge of the tailgate from the lower pivot On vehicles with the tailgate assist feature raise the tailgate nearly all the way to the closed position prior to removing the left edge 3 Move the tailgate to the right to release the left edge Reverse this procedure to reinstall the tailgate Make sure the tailgate is secure 2 12 Vehicle Security This vehicle has theft deterrent features however they do not make it impossible to steal Anti Theft Alarm System This vehicle may have a content theft deterrent alarm system fi This is the security light To arm the theft deterrent system 1 Open
343. he vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or plastic on the vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 30 cm 12 inches to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 8 274 kPa 1 200 psi can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing the Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer If the vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the col
344. he windshield See Windshield Wiper Washer on page 5 5 Climate Controls These systems control the heating cooling and ventilation Climate Control System With Air Conditioning ORS Fan Control Temperature Control Air Delivery Mode Control Air Conditioning E Outside Air F Air Recirculation G Rear Window Defogger In Brief 1 21 1 22 In Brief Climate Control System With Heater Only A Fan Control See Climate Control Systems with Air Conditioning on page 8 1 zi la Contro or Climate Control Systems C Air Delivery Mode Control with Heater Only on page 8 4 Dual Automatic Climate Control System gt onmygoow Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls Fan Control AUTO Defrost Air Recirculation Outside Air Air Delivery Mode Control H Display Power Button J Rear Window Defogger K Air Conditioning L PASS Passenger See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8 5 In Brief 1 23 Transmission Range Selection Mode The Range Selection Mode switch if equipped is located on the shift lever To enable the Range Selection feature move the column shift lever to the M Manual position The current range will appear next to the M This is the highest attainable range with all lower gears accessible As an example when 5 Fifth gear is selected 1 First through 5 Fifth gears are available 1
345. hed and exited e A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made Instruments and Controls Universal Remote System See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 19 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS 210 220 310 Universal Remote System Programming GIG Vehicles with the Universal Remote System will have these buttons located in the headliner 5 61 This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist with programming the transmitter 5 62 Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming Only the original remote control transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons in this section Park the vehicle outside of the garage when programming a garage d
346. heel controls if the vehicle has this feature Up to 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six softkeys below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the FAV button Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM if equipped stations Storing an XM Channel as a Favorite To store a station as a favorite 1 Tune to an XM channel 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where the station will be stored Infotainment System 3 Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to store additional radio stations The number of favorites pages can be set up using the MENU button To set up the number of favorites pages 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the softkey located below the FAV 1 6 tab 3 Select the number of favorites pages by pressing the softkey located below the displayed page numbers 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency tabs and to begin the process of programming favorites XM Radio Messages XL Explicit Language Channels These channels or any others can be blocked at a customer s request by calling 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and 1 877 438 9677 in Canada XM Updating The encrypti
347. heel drive vehicles with the transfer case in N Neutral will allow the vehicle to roll even if Z WARNING It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park 9 45 the automatic transmission shift lever is in P Park So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral Always set the parking brake Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park on page 9 41 If pulling a trailer see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9 91 9 46 Driving and Operating Automatic Transmission If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Vehicles with an automatic transmission have an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster This display comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position There are several different positions for the shift lever PRND321 Hydra Matic 4 Speed Automatic Transmission PRNDM__1 Heavy Duty 6 Spe
348. hen the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse BOTH MIRRORS The driver and passenger outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Instruments and Controls EASY EXIT RECALL If the vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals in Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 4 for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings DOOR BUTTON ONLY No automatic seat exit recall will occur The recall will only occur after pressing the easy exit seat button BUTTON amp KEY OUT default If the features are enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu the driver seat will move back when the key is removed from the ignition or the easy exit seat button is pressed The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key is removed from the ignition If the automatic movement has already occurred and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again the seat will stay in the origin
349. her e While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 82 C to 93 C 180 F to 200 F Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km 15 miles when outside temperatures are above 10 C 50 F If it is colder than 10 C 50 F drive the vehicle in 3 Third until the engine temperature gauge moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes 10 14 Vehicle Care A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 10 C 50 F or more If it is colder than 10 C 50 F the engine may have to idle longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check the fluid must be checked when hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Fluid Level Prepare the vehicle as follows 1 Park the vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running 2 With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in P Park 3 With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in P Park 4 Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps
350. herwise clear roads in shaded areas The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice Turn off cruise control on slippery surfaces 9 22 Driving and Operating Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be a serious situation Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby If possible use the Roadside Assistance Program U S and Canada on page 13 8 or Roadside Assistance Program Mexico on page 13 10 To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror ZN WARNING Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle This may cause exhaust gases to get inside Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Continued WARNING Continued If the vehicle is stuck in the snow e Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe e Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there e Open a window about 5 cm 2 in on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air e Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel e Adjust the climate control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan spe
351. hicle and trailer axles Fifth wheel and gooseneck hitches may also be used See Weight of the Trailer Tongue under Trailer Towing on page 9 95 for rating limits with various hitch types If a step bumper hitch will be used the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper Consider using sway controls with any trailer Ask a trailering professional about sway controls or refer to the trailer manufacturer s recommendations and instructions Weight Distributing Hitch Adjustment A Body to Ground Distance B Front of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the spring bars should be adjusted so the distance A is the same after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle and adjusting the hitch Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailering Fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers can be used with many pickup models These trailers place a larger percentage of the weight kingpin weight on the tow vehicle than conventional trailers Make sure this weight does not cause the vehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 to 25 percent of the trailer weight up to the maximum amount specified in the trailering chart for the vehicle See Weight of the Trailer under Trailer Towing on page 9 95 for more information Driving and Operating The hitch should be located in the pickup be
352. hicle from a distance if equipped you may not see the system check E Ah When the system check is complete either the word ON or OFF or the symbol for on or off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5 23 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbag seat mounted side impact airbags if equipped and the roof rail airbags if equipped are not affected by the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat and safety belt The sensors are Seats and Restraints 3 41 designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not According to accident statistics children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts 3 42 Seats and Restraints A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child
353. hift into and out of Four Wheel Drive Driving and Operating 9 63 You can choose among five driving settings Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting 2 Two Wheel Drive High This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations The front axle is not engaged in Two Wheel Drive This setting also provides the best fuel economy 9 64 AUTO Automatic Four Wheel Drive This setting is ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are variable When driving the vehicle in AUTO the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent only to the front and rear wheels automatically based on driving conditions Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than Two Wheel Drive High 4 t Four Wheel Drive High Use the Four Wheel Drive High position when extra traction is needed such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages the front axle to help drive the vehicle This is the best setting to use when plow
354. his system can be used to increase engine idle speed whenever the following conditions are met e The park brake is set e The brake pedal is not pressed e The vehicle must not be moving and the accelerator must not be pressed To control the fast idle e To enable the Fast Idle System press and release the Cruise Control On Off button and ensure that the switch LED is lit e Press and release the Cruise Control Set switch Engine speed will be held at approximately 1200 RPM When the fast idle is active the Driver Information Center DIC will display FAST IDLE ON One of the following actions will turn off the fast idle e Pressing the brake e Selecting the Cruise Control Cancel button Driving and Operating 9 39 Releasing the Parking Brake The transmission shifter is moved out of P Park or N Neutral Selecting the Cruise Control On Off button when it was previously on Pressing the Cruise Control Set switch a second time Pressing the accelerator greater than a quarter of the down Turning the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 9 40 Retained Accessory Power RAP The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off e Audio System e Power Windows e OnStar System if equipped e Sunroof if equipped These features work when the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK
355. hrough the list each time the softkey is pressed e Fourth softkey 10 through the list each time the softkey is pressed e Fifth softkey end of the list 7 38 Music Navigator Press the softkey below to view and select a file on an iPod using the iPod s menu system Files are sorted by e Playlists e Artists e Albums e Genres e Songs e Composers To select files 1 Press the softkey below 2 Turn dd to scroll through the list of menus 3 Press dd to select the desired menu Infotainment System 4 Turn dd to scroll through the folders or files in the selected menu 5 Press JJ to select the desired file to be played To skip through large lists the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order e First softkey first item in the list e Second softkey 1 through the list each time the softkey is pressed e Third softkey 5 through the list each time the softkey is pressed e Fourth softkey 10 through the list each time the softkey is pressed e Fifth softkey end of the list Repeat Functionality To use Repeat Press the softkey below or 1 to select between Repeat All and Repeat Track C gt Repeat All Press the softkey below to repeat all tracks The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used This is the default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected 1 Repeat Track Press the softkey below
356. ht will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected During cooler conditions the low tire pressure warning light may appear when the vehicle is first started and then turn off This may be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure The TPMS does not replace normal monthly tire maintenance It is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressures See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 10 68 Engine Oil Life System The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life based on vehicle use and on most vehicles displays a DIC message when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter The oil life system should be reset to 100 only following an oil change Resetting the Oil Life System To reset the Engine Oil Life System on most vehicles 1 Display OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons the vehicle must be in P Park to access this display 2 Press and hold the SET RESET button on the DIC or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons for more than five seconds The oil life will change to 100 On all vehicles the Engine Oil Life System can be reset as follows 1 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds 3 Display OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC If the
357. ic conditions allow carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on If either of these messages continues either the vehicle or trailer needs service Driving and Operating An authorized GM dealer may be able to diagnose and repair problems with the trailer However any diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under the vehicle warranty Please contact your trailer dealer for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty information Trailer Sway Control TSC Trailer Sway Control TSC 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway Control TSC feature If the vehicle is towing a trailer and the system detects that the trailer is swaying the vehicle s brakes are applied without the driver pressing the brake pedal If the vehicle is equipped with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system StabiliTrak may also apply the trailer brakes The TCS StabiliTrak warning light will flash on the instrument panel cluster to notify the driver to reduce speed If the trailer continues to sway StabiliTrak will reduce engine torque to help slow the vehicle Adding non dealer accessories can affect the vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 10 3 for more information Conversions and Add Ons Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not a
358. icant 2500HD with 6 0L Vehicle Care 10 37 All Other Series and Engines To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface e Forall 4 3L 4 8L and 5 3L 1500 Series applications the proper level is 1 0 mm to 19 0 mm 0 04 in to 0 7 in below the bottom of the fill hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level 10 38 Vehicle Care For all 6 0L and 6 2L 1500 Series applications the proper level is from 15mm to 40 mm 0 6 in to 1 6 in below the bottom of the fill plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level For all 6 0L 2500HD Series applications the proper level is from 0mm to 13 mm 0 to 0 5 in below the bottom of the fill plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level For all 6 6 L Duramax Diesel 2500HD Series applications and all 3500 Series applications the proper level is from 17 mm to 21mm 0 6 in to 0 8 in below the bottom of the fill plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level What to Use Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 to determine what kind of lubricant to use Noise Control System The following information relates to compliance with federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR of more than 4 536 kg 10 000 Ibs The Schedul
359. icle has one even if it is not being used Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance Tires will typically need to be replaced due to wear before they may need to be replaced due to age Consult the tire manufacturer for more information on when tires should be replaced Vehicle Storage Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool dry clean area away from direct sunlight to slow aging This area should be free of grease gasoline or other substances that can deteriorate rubber Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving When storing a vehicle for at least a month remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle The original equipment tires installed on the vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way the vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires Vehicle Care 10 77 GM
360. ies and Modifications on page 10 3 Steering Power Steering If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the power steering system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and vehicle speed While in a curve speed is the one factor that can be controlled If there is a need to reduce speed do it before entering the curve while the front wheels are straight Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you These problems can be avoided by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First
361. impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface A paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet after the cleaning process Leather Leatherette Leather and lighter colored leather in particular will need more frequent cleaning to prevent the buildup of dust dirt and colors transferred from other items so that these do not become permanent stains To remove dust a soft cloth dampened with water can be used If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Your dealer has a GM approved leather cleaner available that provides superior cleaning performance when used regularly on finished automotive leathers Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat steam spot lifters or spot removers or shoe polish on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Instrument Panel Vinyl and other Plastic Surfaces To remove dust a soft cloth dampened with water can be used If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gen
362. in a situation like this please notify General Motors Call 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 or write GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 In Canada call 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Customer Information Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy This GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help the dealer technician service the vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings 13 17 Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assi
363. ined service people who will perform this work and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally the oil must be changed at 5 000 km 3 000 miles since the last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change Always reset the engine oil life to 100 after every oil change It will not reset itself To reset the system on most vehicles 1 Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons the vehicle must be in P Park to access this display See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 2 Press and hold the SET RESET button on the DIC or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons for more than five seconds The oil life will change to 100 On all vehicles the Engine Oil Life System can be reset as follows 1 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds 3 Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC If the display shows 100 the system is reset See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 If the vehicle has a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
364. ines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadieny manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce spark plug life and affect emission control system performance The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer for service Fuel E85 85 Ethanol Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 For all other vehicles use only the unleaded gasoline described under Recommended Fuel on page 9 84 We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it The ethanol in E85 is a renewable fuel meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops Many service stations will not have an 85 ethanol fuel E85 pump available The U S Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website www afdc energy gov afdc locator stations that can help you find E85 fuel Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85 At a minimum E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 By definition this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70 and 85
365. ing information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed 9 28 Driving and Operating AA _ AL 4 A To Example 3 A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 453 kg 1 000 Ibs B Subtract Occupant Weight 91 kg 200 Ibs x 5 453 kg 1 000 Ibs C Available Cargo Weight 0 kg 0 Ibs your vehicle s capacity weight Certification Tire Label A GVWR MODEL PAYLOAD TIRE SIZE SPEED RIM o GAWR FRT GAWR RR COLD TIRE PRESSURE FRT RR 1 SPA BEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver door The label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go toa weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure
366. ing snow Driving and Operating 4 Four Wheel Drive Low This setting also engages the front axle and delivers extra torque You may never need this setting It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose Four Wheel Drive Low if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and while climbing or descending steep hills If the vehicle has StabiliTrak shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low will turn Traction Control and StabiliTrak off See StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 Z WARNING Shifting the transfer case to N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N Neutral See Parking Brake on page 9 69 N Neutral Shift the vehicle s transfer case to N Neutral only when towing the vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10 103 or Towing the Vehicle on page 10 103 for more information If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service See SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message under Transmission Messages on page 5 50 Shifting Into Four Wheel Drive High or AUTO Automatic Four Wheel Drive Turn the knob to the Four Wheel Drive High or AUTO position This can be done at any speed except when shifting from Four Wheel Drive Low The indicator light will flash
367. io have a Bose Surround Sound System Some of its features are explained later in this section Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade Vehicles with a USB CD and DVD radio may have a Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system See Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 for more information on the vehicle s RSE system The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Using the Radio Power Volume Press to turn the system on and off Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume i Information AM FM Radio and AM FM Radio with CD Press to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time While the ignition is off press this button to display the time Press to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or CD MP3 or WMA song If information is available during XM CD MP3 or WMA playback the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line When information is not available NO INFO displays Speed Compensated Volume SCV Radios with
368. ion 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position 2 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Power Reclining Seatbacks To recline a power seatback if equipped Tilt the top of the control rearward to recline Tilt the top of the control forward to raise Heated Front Seats Z WARNING If you cannot feel temperature change or pain to the skin the seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures To reduce the risk of burns people with such a condition should use care when using the seat heater especially for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket cushion cover or similar item This may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat If available the buttons are on the front doors Heated Seatback Press to heat the seatback only w Heated Seat and Seatback Press to heat the seat and seatback Press the button once for the highest setting With each press of the button the heated seat will change to the next lower setting and then to the off setting The lights indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest The passenger seat may take longer to heat up The heated seats will be canceled 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
369. ion including important safety information Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer The light should go out once the engine starts If it stays on or comes on while driving there could be a problem with the charging system A charging system message in the Driver Information Center DIC can also appear See Battery Voltage and Charging Messages on page 5 41 for more information This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt or that there is an electrical problem Have it checked right away If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on turn off accessories such as the radio and air conditioner For vehicles with a Hybrid see the Hybrid Supplement for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment KI This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer Instruments and Controls If the Malf
370. ion and goodwill are very important to your dealer and General Motors Normally any problem with the transaction sale or usage of the vehicle must be handled by your dealer sales or service departments However we recognize that despite the good intentions of all parties involved sometimes a misunderstanding may occur If you have a problem that has not been satisfactorily handled through the normal means we suggest the following steps STEP ONE Explain your case to the dealer service agent service manager dealer sales agent or sales manager depending on your case Customer Information Make sure that they have all necessary information They are interested in your continual satisfaction STEP TWO If you are not satisfied please contact the general manager or the dealership owner to ask for their help If they are not able to resolve your case ask them to contact the right people at General Motors for support if needed STEP THREE If your case is not resolved in a reasonable amount of time by your dealer please call the General Motors Customer Assistance Center CAC and provide the following information e Name e Address e Phone number e Model year e Brand e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Mileage e Delivery date e Description of the problem e Dealership name e Dealership address See Customer Assistance Offices U S and Canada on page 13 5 or Customer Assistance
371. ion cannot be selected in floor mode 7 Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents W Defrost This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly Air is directed to the windshield and the side window vents with some air directed to the floor vents The system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be selected in the defog or defrost mode When either mode is selected the system runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear eS Outside Air Press to turn the outside air mode on An indicator light comes on to show that outside air is on In this mode outside air circulates throughout the vehicle The outside air mode can be used with all modes but it cannot be used with the recirculation mode CS Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on An indicator light comes on to show that recirculation is on This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defog or defrost modes If recirculation is selected with one of these modes the indicator light flashes three times and then turns off Whi
372. ion key that operates the system To program the new additional key 1 Verify that the new key has a stamped on it 2 Insert the original already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to the ON RUN position within five seconds of turning the ignition to the LOCK OFF position in Step 3 The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you lose or damage your PASS Key IIl key see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key III to have a new key made Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle Keys Doors and Windows 2 15 Exterior Mirrors Manual Mirrors Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when Adjust the outside mirrors for a towing a trailer Convex Mirrors clearer view KEN The lower portion of the mirror is Using hood mounted air deflectors convex A convex mirror s surface Z WARNING and add on convex mirror is curved to see more from the attachments could decrease driver seat The convex mirror can A conv x miror can make things mirror performance be adjusted manually to the driver like
373. is needed such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations In Brief 1 25 N Neutral Shift the transfer case to Neutral only when towing the vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10 103 or Trailer Towing on page 9 95 4 Four Wheel Drive Low This setting sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose Four Wheel Drive Low if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and while climbing or descending steep hills See Four Wheel Drive on page 9 54 1 26 In Brief Vehicle Features Radio s FAV MENU i A ll Hh al E 400 DVD CD Radio with USB CD and DVD MP3 BAND Press to choose between FM AM or XM if equipped Jd Select radio stations KIA Seek or scan stations Press to turn the system on and off Turn to increase or decrease the volume 1 Press to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time While the ignition is off press this button to display the time Press to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or CD MP3 or WMA song If information is available during XM CD MP3 or WMA playback the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line When information is not available NO INFO displays For more information about these and other radio featu
374. is so great if the airbag deploys ZN WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no Continued WARNING Continued system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though the airbag is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint a rear facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle even if the airbag is off The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if e The right front passenger seat is unoccupied e The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint e A right front
375. ise control automatically disengages The cruise control can be re engaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 9 73 for more information If the system fails to turn on or activate the StabiliTrak light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC TRACTION CONTROL OFF SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL STABILITRAK OFF SERVICE STABILITRAK If these DIC messages appear make sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off using the StabiliTrak on off button Then turn the vehicle off wait 15 seconds and turn it back on again to reset the system If any of these messages still appear on the DIC the vehicle should be taken in for service For more information on the DIC messages see Ride Control System Messages on page 5 47 A ee The StabiliTrak light will flash on the instrument panel cluster when the system is both on and activated Driving and Operating 9 71 The system may be heard or felt while it is working this is normal R The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls The Traction Control System TCS part of StabiliTrak can be turned off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button To disable both TCS and StabiliTrak press and hold amp until amp illuminates and the appropriate DIC message displays TCS and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and relea
376. it To lower the head restraint press the button located on the top of the seatback and push the restraint down Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place The head restraints are not designed to be removed The rear seat has headrests that can be adjusted up and down Front Seats Seat Adjustment Z WARNING You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving To adjust the seat 1 Lift the bar under the front edge of the seat cushion to unlock the seat 2 Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar 3 Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure the seat is locked in place Seats and Restraints 3 3 Center Seat If equipped the center front seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder storage area for the driver and passenger when the center front seat is not used Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is folded down 3 4 Seats and Restraints Power Seat Adjustment To adjust a power seat if equipped e Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward e If available raise or lower the front or rear part of the seat cushion by moving the
377. it can interfere with the accelerator pedal and or brake pedal Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage e The original equipment floor mats were designed for the vehicle If the floor mats need replacing it is recommended that GM certified floor mats be purchased Non GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals e Use the floor mat with the correct side up Do not turn it over e Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat e Use only a single floor mat on the driver side e Do not place one floor mat on top of another Service and Maintenance General Information General Information Scheduled Maintenance Scheduled Maintenance Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Maintenance Replacement Pants ivcstetincataatncegete s Maintenance Records Maintenance Records 11 2 Service and Maintenance General Information This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine For diesel engine vehicles see the maintenance schedule section in t
378. itted to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 or call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or write to Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 The inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Customer Information 13 3 Customer Satisfaction Procedure Mexico Garant a SM STs Did you get the Warranty Extension Plan This plan is recommended by General Motors to supplement the warranty included with the new vehicle purchase See your dealer for details 13 4 Customer Assistance Procedure Owner satisfact
379. ivalent battery 4 Snap the transmitter back together Remote Vehicle Start If available this feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle It may also start up the vehicle s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the ON RUN position If the vehicle has an automatic climate control system the climate control system will default to a heating or cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures If the vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off 2 5 During a remote start if the vehicle has an automatic climate control system and heated seats the heated seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to ON RUN If the vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system during remote start manually turn the heated seats on and off See Heated Front Seats on page 3 8 for additional information Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles 2 6 Keys Doors and Windows Do not use the remote start feature if the vehicle is low on
380. iver Information Center DIC The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure If the vehicle has DIC buttons tire pressure levels can be viewed 10 70 Vehicle Care For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 and Tire Messages on page 5 49 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as the vehicle is driven This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they are cold See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location Also see Tire Pressure on page 10 66 The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection on page 10 73 Tire Rotation on page 10 73 and Tires on page 10 57 Notice Tire sealant materials are not all the same A non approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty Always use only the GM app
381. justment Steering Fluid Windows Pregnancy Using Safety Belis inona enee 3 26 Privacy Radio Frequency Identification RFID 13 19 Program Courtesy Transportation 13 11 Proposition 65 Warning California 10 3 R Radio Frequency Identification RFID 13 19 Statement 13 19 Radios AM FM Radio 5 7 8 CD DVD Player 7 22 Reception 2 2 cceceeessiareces 7 14 Satellite 2 7 10 Reading Lamps 6 9 Rear Axle 2 2220055 10 37 Locking 0 0 0005 9 73 Rear Doors 000000ee 2 10 Rear Seat Audio RSA Syste ses ccateenestcnsauicaes 7 48 Rear Seat Entertainment SYSLEM c 4c2ecdeesbatgaeedies 7 39 Rear Seat Audio RSA 7 48 Rear Seats 3 10 3 11 Rear Vision Camera RVC 9 78 Rear Windows 2 20 Rearview Mirrors 2 18 Automatic Dimming 2 18 Reclining Seatbacks 3 6 Recommended Fluids and LUD PICAMTS neesii 11 8 Recommended Fuel 9 84 Records Maintenance 11 12 Recreational Vehicle TOWING inecnxhondiesiciaenaeks 10 103 Reimbursement Program GM Mobility 13 7 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System araiarraren 2 3 Remote Vehicle Start 2 5 Replacement GIASS a icentuseteraacesoeness 10 41 Replacement Bul
382. l Adjustment 1 17 Throttle and Brake Pedal Adjustment 1 18 Interior Lighting 1 18 Exterior Lighting 1 19 Windshield Wiper Washer 1 20 Climate Controls 1 20 Transmission 1 23 Four Wheel Drive 1 24 Vehicle Features RadiIO S reen tnerp tanien 1 26 Satellite Radio 1 27 Portable Audio Devices 1 28 Bluetooth n nanana 1 28 Steering Wheel Controls 1 28 In Brief 1 1 Cruise Control 1 29 Navigation System 1 30 Driver Information Center DIC 1 30 Rear Vision Camera RVC 1 31 Ultrasonic Parking Assist 1 31 Power Outlets 1 32 Universal Remote System 1 32 SUMOOh wceactecrgesavigucenes 1 32 Performance and Maintenance StabiliTrak System 1 33 Tire Pressure Monitor 1 34 Engine Oil Life System 1 34 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol 1 35 Driving for Better Fuel ECONOMY nids e 254400 chew ves 1 35 Roadside Assistance Progam iieri neniet eais 1 36 OnStar anaana 1 36 1 2 In Brief Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Base Uplevel Version IJK LMNOPQ T U VW X Y Air Vents on page 8 11 Turn and Lane Change Signals on page 6 6 Windshield Wiper Washer on page 5 5 Driver Information Center DIC Buttons See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33
383. l cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off Instruments and Controls Key and Lock Messages REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 3 Lamp Messages TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 1 2 km 0 75 mile Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position Object Detection System Messages PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system this message displays if there is something interfering with the park assist system See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9 76 for more information PARK ASSIST OFF If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system after the vehicle has been started this message displays to remind the driver that the URPA system has been turned off Press the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display To turn the URPA system back on see Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9 76 SERVICE PARK ASSIST If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system
384. l burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged Z WARNING An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Z WARNING Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn If a hiss is heard wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark With the
385. l for the vehicle to exhibit significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four Wheel Drive Low and Four Wheel Drive High ranges or from N Neutral with the engine running If the knob is turned to the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High switch position when the vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 5 km h 3 mph and the transmission is in N Neutral Shifting into Neutral To shift the transfer case to N Neutral do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll 2 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal See Parking Brake on page 9 69 for more information 3 Shifting the transfer case into N Neutral can be done with or without the engine running Shifting without the engine running should be done with the ignition in ON RUN 4 Put the transmission in N Neutral 5 Shift the transfer case to Two Wheel Drive High 6 Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N Neutral until it stops and hold it there until the N Neutral light starts blinking This will take at least 10 seconds Then slowly release the dial to the four low position The N Neutral light will come on when the transfer case shift to N Neutral is complete 7 If the engine is running make
386. l inputs 7 46 Infotainment System 2 10 Double Digit Entries Press this button to select chapter or track numbers greater than nine Press this button before entering the number Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries do the following 1 Slide the rear cover back on the remote control 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the remote control 3 Replace the battery cover If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Tips and Troubleshooting Chart There is no power The ignition might not be turned to ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY The picture does not fill the screen There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or the picture looks stretched out In auxiliary mode the picture moves or scrolls The remote control does not work After stopping the player and pushing Play sometimes the DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at the beginning Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by pressing the display menu button on the remote control Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly If the stop bu
387. l vehicle weight is less than the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR Maintaining a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio is necessary to provide proper braking performance Total vehicle reserve capacity is the difference between the GVWR and the weight of the truck with full fuel and passengers It is the amount of weight that can be added to the vehicle before reaching the GVWR Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are intended as a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo the truck can carry If unsure of the vehicle s front rear or total weight go to a weigh station and weigh the vehicle Your dealer can also help with this The total vehicle reserve capacity for the vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification Tire label as shown previously See your dealer for additional advice and information about using a snow plow on the vehicle Also see Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package also have an emergency roof lamp provision package RPO TRW Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is provided above the overhead console See Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp on page 6 7 for switch location Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab We are aware that some vehicle owners might consider having the pickup box removed and a commercial or recreational body installed Owners should be aware that as
388. lable error message may display See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9 76 The symbols appear when an object has been detected by the URPA system The symbol may cover the object when viewing the navigation screen To turn the symbols on or off 1 Make sure that URPA has not been disabled 2 Shift into P Park 3 Press the MENU hard key to enter the configure menu options then press the MENU hard key repeatedly until Display is selected or touch the Display screen button 4 Select the Rear Camera Options screen button The Rear Camera Options screen will display 5 Touch the Symbols screen button The screen button will be highlighted when on Rear Vision Camera Error Messages Service Rear Vision Camera System This message can display when the system is not receiving information it requires from other vehicle systems If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists see your dealer Rear Vision Camera Location The rear vision camera is located in the bezel for the tailgate handle The camera uses a special lens The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance The area displayed by the camera is limited The camera does not display objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper The area displayed on the screen can vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions Driving and Operating
389. lable per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM if equipped stations Radios that do not have a FAV button store radio stations as presets Up to 18 stations 6 FM1 6 FM2 and 6 AM can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons Infotainment System 7 9 Setting Preset Stations To store presets 1 Tune to a radio station 2 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to store additional radio stations Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite To store a station as a favorite 1 Tune to a radio station 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where the station will be stored 3 Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to store additional radio stations 7 10 The number of favorites pages can be set up using the MENU button To set up the number of favorites pages 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the softkey located below the FAV 1 6 tab 3 Select the number of favorites pages by pressing the softkey located below the displayed page numbers 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency tabs and to begin the process of programming favorites Infotainment System Satellite Radio XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a Satellite radio s
390. late down and through the center wheel Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel 3 Attach the wheel wrench H and extensions I together as shown Vehicle Care 10 95 4 Insert the hoist end F through the hole G in the rear bumper and onto the hoist shaft Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench Raise the tire part way upward Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening 10 96 Vehicle Care 6 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 7 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable 8 Reinstall the spare tire lock if the vehicle has one To store the jack and jack tools gt Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks Wheel Blocks Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit Wheel Wrench and Extensions Tool Bag Jack Mounting Bracket Jack Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks Tom7moon Put the tools D in the tool bag E and place them in the retaining bracket C Tighten down the wing nut C Assemble the wheel blocks B and jack G together with the wing nut A and retaining bolt H Position the jack G in the mounting bracket F Position the holes in the base of the jack
391. layed 6 10 Lighting The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on such as headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or LOW BATTERY If one of these messages displays it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 Battery Power Protection This feature shuts off the dome and reading lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes a
392. layed on the DIC There is a fault present in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message will also be displayed on the DIC There is a fault in the ITBC system a SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message will also be displayed in the DIC Driving and Operating Manual Trailer Brake Apply The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel and is used to apply the trailer s electric brakes independent of the vehicle s brakes This lever is used in the Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure to properly adjust the power output to the trailer brakes Sliding the lever to the left will apply only the trailer brakes The power output to the trailer is indicated in the Trailer Brake Display Page on the DIC If the vehicle s service brakes are applied while using the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever the trailer output power will be the greater of the two The trailer s and the vehicle s brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied 9 121 Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering condition and must be adjusted any time vehicle loading trailer loading or road surface conditions change Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the best trailer stopping performance A trailer that is over gained may result in locked trailer brakes A trailer that is under gaine
393. ld restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for more information 8 Before placing a child in the child restraint make sure it is securely held in place To check grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth When the child restraint is properly installed there should be no more than 2 5 cm 1 in of movement To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Securing Child Restraints Center Front Seat Position ZN WARNING A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position Storage Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage 4 1 Glove Box 220ee 4 1 Cupholders 4 1 Armrest Storage 4 1 Center Console Storage 4 2 Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage For vehicles equipped with an instrument panel storage area it is located above the glove box 5 Access the storag
394. le and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle read the information in Weight of the Trailer later in this section 9 96 Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly The following information has many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer Driving and Operating Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how the rig is used Speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Trailer weight rating TWR is calculated assuming the tow vehicle has only the driver but all required trailering equipment Weight of additional optional equipment passengers and
395. le in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed The recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the outside air button or by turning off the ignition X Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on The air conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as the fan switch is on The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so a small amount of water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal Rear Window Defogger For vehicles with a rear window defogger a warming grid is used to remove fog from the rear window Gi Rear Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on Climate Controls 8 3 The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is in ON RUN The rear window defogger stays on for approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed unless the ignition is turned to ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine Notice Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
396. leaner filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 6 When the engine air cleaner filter is removed lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt If the engine air cleaner filter remains covered with dirt a new filter is required Never use compressed air to clean the filter 10 20 Vehicle Care Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner Filter 1 Locate the air cleaner filter assembly See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 2 Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing and lift up the cover Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing Take care to dislodge as little dirt as possible Clean the engine air cleaner filter sealing surfaces and the housing Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner filter off Cooling System If the vehicle has the Duramax Diesel engine see the Duramax Diesel Supplement for more information The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature 5 3 L Engine Shown 4 3L 4 8L 6 0 L and 6 2 L Engines Similar A Coolant Surge Tank B Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C En
397. led information about Roadside Assistance please see the brochure provided with your new vehicle or visit our website at www gmc com mx Navigate the site and click on Asistencia en el Camino E mail correspondence should be sent to asistencia gmc gm com To contact Roadside Assistance by phone use the following numbers Mexico 01 800 466 0801 United States 1 866 466 8902 Canada 1 800 268 6800 Scheduling Service Appointments U S and Canada When the vehicle requires warranty service contact the dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising the service consultant of your transportation needs the dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If the vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call the dealership let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation Program U S and Canada To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada extended powertrain and or hybrid
398. listening to the radio The DVD CD text tab and a message showing track or chapter number will display when a disc is in either slot Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot front auxiliary and rear auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 for more information Using the USB Port Radios with a USB port can control a USB storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs See Playing an MP3 in CD Player on page 7 15 or CD DVD Player on page 7 22 for information about how to connect and control a USB storage device or an iPod USB Support The USB connector is located on the dashboard or in the center console and uses the USB 2 0 standard Infotainment System 7 35 USB Supported Devices e USB flash drive e Portable USB hard drive e Fifth generation or later iPod e jPod nano e jPod touch e iPod classic Not all iPods and USB
399. ll appears on the DIC Instruments and Controls HOOD OPEN This message displays and a chime may sound if the hood is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the hood for obstructions and close the hood again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN Crew Cab This message displays and a chime may sound if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 5 43 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime may sound if the front passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN Crew Cab This message displays and a chime may sound if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 5 44 Engine Cooling System Messages ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning TURNED OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature See Engine Coolant Temp
400. ll phone can be connected to the Bluetooth system at a time If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system the system connects to the first available paired cell phone in the order that they were first paired to the system To connect to a different paired phone see Connecting to a Different Phone later in this section Pairing a Phone Al Press and hold for two seconds Say Bluetooth Say Pair The system responds with instructions and a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN The PIN is used in Step 5 Start the pairing process on the cell phone that you want to pair For help with this process see the cell phone manufacturer s user guide Locate the device named Your Vehicle in the list on the cell phone Follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the PIN that was provided in Step 3 After the PIN is successfully entered the system prompts you to provide a name for the paired cell phone Infotainment System 7 51 This name will be used to indicate which phones are paired and connected to the vehicle See Listing All Paired and Connected Phones later in this section for more information Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair additional phones Listing All Paired and Connected Phones The system can list all cell phones paired to it If a paired cell phone is also connected to the vehicle the system responds with is
401. ll the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 7 If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 8 Before placing a child in the child restraint make sure it is securely held in place To check grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth When the child restraint is properly installed there should be no more than 2 5 cm 1 in of movement To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Seats and Restraints 3 75 If you turned the airbag off with the switch turn on the right front passenger airbag when you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger airbag risk group See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 for more information including important safety information Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only This vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 3 56 A label on the sun visor says Never
402. lling it will not work and it could damage the vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice Only use a vehicle that has a 12 volt system with a negative ground for jump starting If the other vehicle does not have a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged 2 If you have a vehicle with a diesel engine with two batteries you should know before you begin that especially in cold weather you may not be able to get enough power from a single battery in another vehicle to start your diesel engine If your vehicle has more than one battery using the battery that is closer to the starter will reduce electrical resistance This is located on the passenger side in the rear of the engine compartment 3 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause an unwanted ground connection You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put the automatic transmission in P Park or a manual transmission in Neutral before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in Neutral Notice
403. lly disengage Cruise control may be reengaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 9 73 StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle see your dealer for service Driving and Operating 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway Control TSC feature See Trailer Sway Control TSC on page 9 124 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist HSA feature See Hill Start Assist HSA on page 9 70 Adding non dealer accessories can affect the vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 10 3 Locking Rear Axle Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when traction is low this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle 9 73 Cruise Control ZN WARNING Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads For vehicles with cruise control a speed of about 40 km
404. lse they go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going Z WARNING Things you put inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash e Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Continued Driving and Operating WARNING Continued e Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle e When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can e Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to There is also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving under Off Road Driving on page 9 7 Two Tiered Loading Depending on the model of your pick up an upper load platform can be created by positioning three or four 5cm 2 inches by 15 cm 6 inches wooden planks across the width of the pickup box The planks must be inserted in the pickup box depressions When using this upper load platform be sure the load is securely tied down to prevent it from shifting The load s center of gravity should be positioned in a zone over the rear axle The zone is located in the area between the front of each wheel well and the rear of each wheel w
405. ly at the factory to give the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle pulls to one side or the other the alignment should be checked If the vehicle vibrates when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer for proper diagnosis 10 82 Vehicle Care Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of the wheels wheel bolts wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts wheel nuts and TPMS sensors for the vehicle Z WARNING Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle Tires can lose air and cause loss
406. m the driver position Press the switch to engage or disengage the lockout feature An indicator light on the switch will come on when the lockout feature is engaged and will go off when disengaged Keys Doors and Windows Rear Windows Power Sliding Rear Window On vehicles with a power sliding rear window the switch is located in the overhead console The power sliding rear window works when the ignition has been turned to ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 9 40 for more information The power sliding rear window cannot be operated manually e Push to open the window e Pull to close the window Sun Visors Pull the sun visor down to block glare Detach the sun visor from the center mount to pivot to the side window or to extend along the rod if available Roof Sunroof Extended Cab On vehicles with a sunroof the sunroof switch is located on the headliner above the rearview mirror The sunroof only operates when the ignition is in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN or the Retained Accessory Power RAP is active Keys Doors and Windows See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 9 40 for more information Vent From the closed position press and hold the rear of the switch B to vent the sunroof To close the sunroof press and hold the front of the switch Open From the vent position the s
407. manufactured there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which could affect vehicle safety The components necessary to adapt a pickup to permit its safe use with a specialized body should be installed by the body builder Driving and Operating 9 129 9 130 Driving and Operating NOTES Vehicle Care General Information General Information 10 2 California Proposition 65 Warning 10 3 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Accessories and Modifications 10 3 Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work 10 4 HOOG oei edad e ees 10 5 Engine Compartment Overview 205 10 6 Engine Qil s cscxecse eke kas 10 7 Engine Oil Life System Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission 10 13 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission 10 16 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 10 19 Cooling System 10 20 Engine Coolant 10 22 Engine Overheating Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode Engine Fan Power Steering Fluid Washer Fluid Brakes citaganus anesan inti Brake Fluid Battery ssassn tiae gages Four Wheel Drive Front Axle 2 Rear Axle 2 Noise Control System Starter Switch Check
408. me weather conditions the RSE system might not work until the temperature is within the operating range The operating range for the RSE system is above 20 C 4 F or below 60 C 140 F If the temperature of the vehicle is outside this range heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE system 7 40 Parental Control The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature depending on which radio the vehicle has To start Parental Control press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds to stop all system features such as radio video screen Rear Seat Audio RSA DVD and or CD While Parental Control is on a padlock icon displays The radio can be turned back on with a single press of the power button but the RSE system will remain under Parental Control To turn Parental Control off press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds The RSE returns from where it was previously left and the padlock icon disappears from the radio display Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or ejecting any disc pressing the play icon on the radio DVD display menu or changing an ignition position Infotainment System Headphones B A BS a pb 4e A Battery cover B Channel 1 or 2 switch C Power button D Volume control E Power indicator light The RSE includes two 2 channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to
409. missions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California Emissions Standards the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5 25 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty 9 86 Fuels in Foreign Countries Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Fuel Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases nothing should have to be added to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of Driving and Operating additive required to me
410. mming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound A fee is required to receive the XM service For more information refer to e www xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 U S e www xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 Canada See Satellite Radio on page 7 10 1 28 In Brief Portable Audio Devices This vehicle may have an auxiliary input located on the radio faceplate and a USB port located in the center console or on the dashboard External devices such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD changer or USB storage device can be connected to the auxiliary port using a 3 5mm 1 8 in input cable or the USB port depending on the audio system See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack and Using the USB Port in Auxiliary Devices on page 7 34 Bluetooth For vehicles with a Bluetooth system it allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to make and receive hands free calls using the vehicle s audio system and controls The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with the Bluetooth system before it can be used in the vehicle Not all phones will support all functions For more information visit www gm com bluetooth For more information see Bluetooth on page 7 50 Steering Wheel Controls If available some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel AICS V Press to select preset or favorite radio stations select tracks on
411. more information If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Tire Pressure Light 1 For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this light comes on briefly when the engine is started It provides information about tire pressures and the TPMS When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated A tire pressure message can accompany the light See Tire Messages on page 5 49 for more information Stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire Pressure on page 10 66 for more information When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10 69 for more information Engine Oil Pressure Light pus Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Instruments and Controls Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow
412. more information about the vehicle s maximum load capacity Trailer tongue weight A should be 10 to 15 percent and fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 to 25 percent of the loaded trailer weight up to the maximums for vehicle series and hitch type shown here Vehicle Series 1500 2500HD 3500 1500 2500HD 3500 1500 2500HD 3500 Single Rear Wheels 3500 Dual Rear Wheels Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle Hitch Type Weight Carrying Weight Carrying Weight Distributing Weight Distributing Fifth Wheel Gooseneck Fifth Wheel Gooseneck Fifth Wheel Gooseneck Fifth Wheel Gooseneck 1 587 kg 3 500 Ibs Driving and Operating Maximum Tongue Weight 272 kg 600 Ibs 453 kg 1 000 Ibs 499 kg 1 100 Ibs 680 kg 1 500 Ibs 680 kg 1 500 Ibs 1134 kg 2 500 Ibs 1 360 kg 3 000 Ibs Trailering may be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue or kingpin weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating See Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires later in this section for more information 9 111 After loading the trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see
413. mp 6 7 Auxiliary Devices 7 34 Axle Front soc occciaee cineca 10 36 Axle Rear c00000ee 10 37 B Batleryns cceearceagactacaned 10 34 Jump Starting 10 98 Load Management 6 9 Power Protection 6 10 Voltage and Charging Messages 5 5 41 Blade Replacement Wiper 10 41 Bluetooth cocci cerrincccciciiss 7 50 Brake Pedal and Adjustable TOG nc n2estt dee eae dens ccnsrs 9 35 Brake System Warning Light 5 27 Brakes 5 cccjcccrineueeneee cies 10 30 ANuloCk oardere 9 68 ASSISE oneris inida onna 9 69 Brakes cont UO E E EA Parking siere ens oreidi iiot System Messages Braking enscurrseenesnsseedvass Break In New Vehicle Bulb Replacement Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL and Cargo Lamp Fog Lamps Halogen Bulbs Headlamp Aiming Headlamps License Plate Lamps Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker Lamps Taillamps Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps Buying New Tires C Calibration 2 5 6 California Fuel Requirements 9 85 Perchlorate Materials Requirements 10 3 WAMMING essence ternera ehn 10 3 Camera Rear Vision 9 78 Canadian Vehicle Owners iii Capacities and Specificatio
414. n The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code identifies the vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 for the vehicle s engine code Service Parts Identification Label This label on the inside of the glove box has the following information e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Model designation e Paint information e Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle 12 2 Technical Data Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 for more information If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount see the refrigerant label located under the hood See your dealer for more information Cooling System Comas OOOO O Technical Data 12 3 Engine Oil with Filter 4 3L V6 3500 Chassis Cab Rear Tank if equipped 12 4 Technical Data Transfer Case Fluid 1 6 qt Transmission Fluid Automatic Pan Removal and Filter Replacement 4 Speed Transmission 4L60 E Electronic Transmission 5 0 qt 6 Speed Transmission 6L80 E Ee eot O 6 Speed Transmission 6L90 E 6 Speed Transmis
415. n the Driver Information Center DIC the Computer Controlled Cranking System is disabled to prevent possible vehicle component damage When this happens hold the ignition switch in the START position to continue engine cranking Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 18 C or 0 F it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Fast Idle System If the vehicle has this feature it is available only with cruise control The manual fast idle switch is operated using the cruise control buttons located on the left hand side of the steering wheel T
416. n and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system For example the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on off switch is turned off To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 for more information including important safety information If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint a rear facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle even if the airbag is off Seats and Restraints 3 73 If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH Ifa child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached 3 74 Seats and Restraints You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follo
417. n page 3 29 for more information Anti Theft Alarm System Messages SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine See Immobilizer Operation on page 2 13 for more information Starting the Vehicle Messages FAST IDLE ON If your vehicle has this feature this message displays when the fast idle feature is on See Fast Idle System on page 9 39 for more information Tire Messages SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays if a part on the system is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 5 30 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10 69 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer Instruments and Controls TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the system is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection on page 10 73 Tire Rotation on page 10 73
418. n the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly and pull it straight out Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb by releasing the clips on the bulb socket Replace it with a new bulb socket Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb socket Reinstall the new bulb socket into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure Vehicle Care 10 45 Pick Up Box Identification and Fender Marker Lamps The pick up box identification lamps are LEDs For replacement of the LED lighting assembly contact your dealer To replace a pickup box fender marker lamp bulb 1 Press the tab from the back to remove the lamp Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from the lamp assembly Gently pry the bulb from the socket Install the new bulb in socket Reinstall socket into lamp assembly Reinstall the lamp assembly 10 46 Vehicle Care Taillamps Chassis Cab Models A Backup Lamp B Stoplamp Taillamp Turn Signal Lamp To replace one of these bulbs 1 Remove the four screws 2 Lift the lens off the lamp assembly 3 Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and pull the it straight out from the socket 4 Install a new bulb into the socket turn it clockwise and press it in until it is tight 5 Reinstall the lens and the four screws Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps To replace one of th
419. nd 6 000 miles of driving For proper torque and wheel nut tightening information see Removing the Spare Tire and Tools under Tire Changing on page 10 86 10 76 Vehicle Care The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears faster than the inner tire Your tires will wear more evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically see Tire Inspection on page 10 73 and Tire Rotation on page 10 73 Also see Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 Z WARNING If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is badly underinflated the tire can overheat An overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch fire You or others could be injured Be sure all tires including the spare are properly inflated See Tire Pressure on page 10 66 for information on proper tire inflation When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires SSIS aa 2 AWARE One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which appear when the tires have only 1 6 mm 1 16 in or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators See Tire Inspection on page 10 73 and Tire Rotation on page 10 73 for additional information The rubber in tires ages over time This is also true for the spare tire if the veh
420. nd another vehicle such as a motor home The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up ona device known as a dolly Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing e What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations Vehicle Care 10 103 What is the distance that will be travelled Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Is the proper towing equipment going to be used See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations Is the vehicle ready to be towed Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed 10 104 Vehicle Care Dinghy Towing Two Wheel Drive Vehicles S n a D e Notice If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground the drivetrain components could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being t
421. nd is heard have the vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 If the vehicle has rear drum brakes they do not have wear indicators but if a rear brake rubbing noise is heard have the rear brake linings inspected immediately Rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing Drum brakes have an inspection hole to inspect lining wear during scheduled maintenance When the front brake pads are replaced have the rear brakes inspected too Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every time the brakes are applied with or without the vehicle moving the brakes adjust for wear Vehicle Care 10 31 Replacing Brake System Parts
422. nd other important information under Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 and Tires on page 10 57 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment e Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving and obey all posted regulations Driving and Operating 9 9 Avoid any driving practice that could damage shrubs flowers trees or grasses or disturb wildlife This includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system 9 10 Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Check to see if there are any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle in case something happens to one of them For vehicles
423. necessary move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled This could damage the safety belt or the seat Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position before folding the seat Regular Cab Models 1 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor if your vehicle has one Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 1 1 Pull the passenger seatback forward by pulling the recliner handle upward to access the top tether anchor See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3 6 for additional information 1 2 Find the top tether anchor 1 3 Remove the cover to expose the anchor 1 4 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether around the headrest or head restraint Seats and Restraints 3 63 If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts 3 64 2 See Securing Child Restraints Rear Seat Position
424. ness The vehicle is equipped with one of the following wiring harnesses for towing a trailer or hauling a slide in camper Basic Trailer Wiring All regular extended cab and crew cab pickups have a seven wire trailer towing harness For vehicles not equipped with heavy duty trailering the harness is secured to the vehicle s frame behind the spare tire mount The harness requires the installation of a trailer connector which is available through your dealer If towing a light duty trailer with a standard four way round pin connector an adapter is available from your dealer Heavy DutyTrailer Wiring Harness Package For vehicles equipped with heavy duty trailering the harness is connected to a bracket on the hitch platform The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits e Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal e Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal Driving and Operating e Brown Taillamps e White Ground e Light Green Back up Lamps e Red Battery Feed e Dark Blue Trailer Brake The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center but the wires are not connected They should be connected by your dealer or a qualified service center The fuse and wire for the ITBC is factory installed and connected if the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC The fuse for the battery feed is not required if the vehicle has an auxiliary battery If the vehicle does no
425. nflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg 150 Ibs See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Tire Pressure on page 10 66 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction b
426. nformation Center DIC see Brake System Messages on page 5 42 for all brake related DIC messages For vehicles with a Hybrid see the Hybrid Supplement for more information Instruments and Controls Four Wheel Drive Light The four wheel drive light comes on when a vehicle with a manual transfer case is shifted into four wheel drive and the front axle engages Some delay between the shifting and the light coming on is normal See Four Wheel Drive on page 9 54 for more information 5 29 Tow Haul Mode Light Eyy For vehicles with the Tow Haul Mode feature this light comes on when the Tow Haul Mode has been activated For more information see Tow Haul Mode on page 9 51 5 30 StabiliTrak Indicator Light rN ee For vehicles with the StabiliTrak system this light comes on briefly while starting the engine If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the light comes on and stays on while driving there could be a problem with the StabiliTrak system and the vehicle might need service When this warning light is on the StabiliTrak system is off and does not limit wheel spin Instruments and Controls The light flashes if the system is active and is working to assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions See StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 for
427. ng and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes work During the trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and the lamps and any trailer brakes still work Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer The combination will not accelerate as quickly and is longer so it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand To move the trailer to the left move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle The vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn out the arrows on the instrument panel will still flash for turns It is important to check occasionally to be
428. ng children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in the vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 3 49 or Infants and Young Children on page 3 51 rt There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 for more information Seats and Restraints 3 31 Where Are the Airbags The right front passenger airbag Driver Side Shown Passenger is in the instrument panel on the Side Similar The driver airbag is in the middle of Passenger side If the vehicle has seat mounted side the steering wheel impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger they are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door rm Li 3 32 Seats and Restraints Driver Side Shown Passenger Side Similar If the vehicle has roof rail airbags for the driver right front passenger and second row outboard passengers they are in the ceiling above the side windows Z WARNING If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant
429. ng system for the right front passenger position the label on the vehicle s sun visor refers to ADVANCED AIRBAGS 5 23 PASSENGER on _oFF PA United States Canada and Mexico When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag 5 24 If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag If after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer for service Instruments and Controls Z WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 for more informat
430. nge can be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure Check the vehicle s oil as soon as possible See OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE under Engine Oil Messages on page 5 45 and Engine Oil on page 10 7 Z WARNING Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Metric 5 18 English This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is working During a majority of the operation Instruments and Controls the gauge reads 100 C 210 F or less If pulling a load or going up hills it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and go over the 113 C 235 F mark If the gauge reaches the 125 C 260 F mark it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity See Engine Overheating on page 10 25 If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid
431. ning off the ignition ce Outside Air Press to turn the outside air mode on An indicator light on the button comes on to show that outside is on When selected air from outside the vehicle circulates throughout the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be used with the outside air mode Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window Gi Rear Window Defogger For vehicles with this feature press to turn the defogger on or off It automatically turns off several minutes after it has been activated The defogger can also be turned off by turning the engine off Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Heated Mirror For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed See Power Mirrors on page 2 16 Sensors The solar sensor located in the defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel monitors the solar heat Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly The interior temperature sensor located in the headliner measures the tem
432. nning and the vehicle in gear when going downhill e Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane e Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident e Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road creating less traction or grip Wet ice can occur at about 0 C 32 F when freezing rain begins to fall resulting in even less traction Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand Drive with caution whatever the condition Accelerate gently so traction is not lost Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick so there is even less traction Driving and Operating 9 21 Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more The Antilock Brake System ABS on page 9 68 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on slippery roads but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots Icy patches can occur on ot
433. not match the original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 10 77 e Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message come on and stay on Vehicle Care 10 71 TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire wheel position after rotating the vehicle s tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors Also the TPMS sensor matching process should be performed after replacing a spare tire with a road tire containing the TPMS sensor The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off at the next ignition cycle The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions using a TPMS relearn tool in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear See your dealer for service or to purchase a relearn tool 10 72 Vehicle Care There are two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer the matching proces
434. ns 12 2 Carbon Monoxide Engine Exhaust 9 44 Tailgate 2 2 20005 2 10 Winter Driving 9 21 Cargo Lamp 6 8 Cautions Danger and WarningS 22 0 0e0 iv CD Player sscsacscaceeacecenaes 7 15 CD DVD Player 7 22 Center Console Storage 4 2 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL and Cargo Lamp 10 47 Center Seat 5 3 3 Chains Tire 10 83 Charging System Light 5 24 Check Engine Light 5 25 Ignition Transmission Lock 10 40 Child Restraints Infants and Young Chil ei diced nctineeaaraecadts 3 51 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 3 57 Older Children 3 49 Securing 3 66 3 69 3 78 Systems 2 0005 3 54 Cigarette Lighter 5 11 Circuit Breakers 10 50 Cleaning Exterior Care 10 108 Interior Care 10 112 Climate Control Systems 8 1 8 4 Air Conditioning 8 1 8 4 Dual Automatic 8 5 Heating 8 1 8 4 COCK ecean AG 5 8 Cluster Instrument 5 13 Collision Damage Repair 13 12 COMPASS w2ccc2cscererareesse ss 5 6 Control of a Vehicle 9 3 Convex Mirrors 2 15 Coolant ENING iac c sia cisini esrara 10 22 Engine
435. nt oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under Engine Oil Messages on page 5 45 You should change the oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 10 7 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 10 11 Instruments and Controls Vehicle Messages Messages displayed on the DIC indicate the status of the vehicle or some action may be needed to correct a condition Multiple messages may appear one after another The messages that do not require immediate action can be acknowledged and cleared by pressing V Set Reset or the trip odometer reset stem The messages that require immediate action cannot be cleared until that action is performed All messages should be taken seriously
436. nt radio Only one band can be tuned to at one time Changing the band on the RSA or the front radio will change the band on the other system if they are both sourced to the radio The RSA functions can be used even while the main radio is off The front audio system will display the headphone icon when the RSA is on and it will disappear from the display when the RSA is off Audio can be heard through wired headphones not included plugged into the jacks on the RSA If the vehicle has this feature audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones Depending on the audio system the rear speakers may continue to play when the RSA audio is active through the headphones To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through the RSA attach the iPod or portable audio device to the front auxiliary input if available located on the front audio system Turn the iPod on then choose the front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button O Power Press this button to turn the RSA on or off Volume Turn the volume knob to increase or decrease the volume of the wired headphones The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if the vehicle has these features DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary K A Seek When listening to FM AM
437. ntenance records 800 0122 6101 My GM Canada www gm ca My GM Canada is a password protected section of www gm ca where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to e My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area e My Dealers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers e My Driveway Access quick links to parts and service estimates check trade in values or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile e My Preferences Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up visit the My GM ca section within www gm ca Customer Information 13 7 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program U S and Canada E MOBILITY This program is available to qualified applicants for cost reimbursement of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for the vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift for the vehicle For more information on the limited offer visit www gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text Telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 13 8 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users
438. nto Park on page 9 41 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see f the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9 23 N Neutral In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use N Neutral only Also use N Neutral when the vehicle is being towed Driving and Operating 9 47 ZN WARNING Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle 9 48 D Drive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than about 55 km h 35 mph push the accelerator pedal about halfway d
439. nto the radio s front auxiliary input jack USB port or the rear auxiliary jack the front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this source through the vehicle speakers See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack in Auxiliary Devices on page 7 34 or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 for more information In some vehicles depending on audio options the rear speakers can be muted when the RSA power is turned on See Rear Seat Audio RSA System on page 7 48 for more information Infotainment System Inserting a Disc Insert a disc partway into either slot label side up The player pulls it in and the disc should begin playing Loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing Ejecting a Disc 4 cp Eject Press and release to eject the disc that is currently playing The CD ejects from the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The disc can be removed If the disc is not removed after several seconds the disc automatically pulls back into the player amp DVD Eject Press and release to eject the disc that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed due to unknown format etc
440. ntrol the RSA system or by the buttons on the radio faceplate See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 and Rear Seat Audio RSA System on page 7 48 for more information The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code printed on the jacket of most DVDs The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs and CD R RW DVD Video DVD Audio DVD R RW and DVD R RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats If an error message displays on the video screen or the radio see DVD Display Error Messages under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 and CD DVD Player Messages later in this section for more information 7 30 Inserting a Disc Insert a disc partway into the top slot label side up The player pulls it in and the disc should begin playing Loading Disc shows on the radio display At the same time the radio displays a softkey menu of option s Some discs automatically play the movie while others default to the softkey menu display which requires the Play Enter or Navigation softkeys to be pressed either by softkey or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control Loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD Infotainment System Ejecting a Disc amp DVD Eject Press and release to ejec
441. nusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 40 for additional information If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint a rear facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle even if the airbag is off 3 70 If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Seats and Restraints You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the
442. ny laws Legal fines Mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non public road or highway Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles Fuel Delivery Reimbursement is approximately 5 Canadian Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service Lock Out Service Vehicle registration is required Trip Routing Service Limit of six requests per year 13 10 e Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Must be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify General Motors of Canada Limited requires pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair orders Once authorization has been received the Roadside Assistance advisor will help to make arrangements and explain how to receive payment e Alternative Service If assistance cannot be provided right away the Roadside Assistance advisor may give permission to get local emergency road service You will receive payment up to 100 after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance Mechanical failures may be covered however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility Customer Information Roadside Assistance Program Mexico Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day 365 days of the year For detai
443. o be stored as a name tag by entering the digits one at a time Delete This command is used to delete individual name tags Delete All Name Tags This command deletes all stored name tags in the Hands Free Calling Directory and the OnStar Turn by Turn Destinations Directory if equipped Using the Store Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds 2 Say Store 3 Say the phone number or group of numbers you want to store all at once with no pauses then follow the directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number Using the Digit Store Command If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time 1 Press and hold t for two seconds 2 Say Digit Store 3 Say each digit one at a time that you want to store After each digit is entered the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone After the last digit has been entered say Store and then follow the directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number Using the Delete Command 1 Press and hold w for two seconds 2 Say Delete 3 Say the name tag you want to delete Using the Delete All Name Tags Command This command deletes all stored name tags in the Hands Free Calling Directory and the OnStar
444. o six CDs To insert one CD 1 Press and release the LOAD button 2 Wait for the message to insert the disc 3 Load a CD Insert the CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in To insert multiple CDs 1 Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays 2 Wait for the message on when to insert the discs The CD player takes up to six CDs 3 Press the LOAD button again to cancel loading more CDs Ejecting a CD Single CD Player 4 EJECT Press and release to eject the disc Remove the CD when Remove Disc displays If the disc is not removed after several seconds the disc is automatically pulled back into the player Ejecting a CD Six Disc CD Player 4 EJECT Press and release to eject the disc that is currently playing Remove the CD when Remove Disc displays If the disc is not removed after several seconds the disc is automatically pulled back into the player To eject all CDs press and hold the 4 EJECT button for two seconds Playing a CD If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit See Rear Seat Audio RSA System on page 7 48 for more information When a CD is inserted
445. o the off position The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the vehicle This feature can be programmed using the Driver Information Center DIC See Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 If the vehicle is not equipped with DIC buttons exit lighting is automatic When it is dark enough outside the exterior lamps remain on for 30 seconds after the ignition is moved from ON RUN to LOCK OFF For vehicles without a radio the instrument panel light remains on for 30 seconds with the driver door closed For vehicles with a radio the instrument panel light remains on for 10 minutes with the driver door closed See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 9 40 The regular headlamp system can be turned on when needed Lighting 6 5 Hazard Warning Flashers A Hazard Warning Flashers Press this button located on top of the steering column to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off This warns others that you are having trouble Press again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on the vehicle s turn signals will not work 6 6 Lighting Turn and Lane Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change This
446. o turn them off press the button again The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations To turn the lamps on or off press the button located next to the lamp If the vehicle has a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system press the lamp lenses to turn the lamps on or off The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted Lighting Features Entry Lighting The vehicle has an illuminated entry feature When the doors are opened the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the extended position If the dome override button is pressed in the lamps will not come on Exit Lighting The interior lamps come on when the key is removed from the ignition They turn off automatically in 20 seconds The lights do not come on if the dome override button is pressed in Lighting 6 9 Battery Load Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be disp
447. oad Range G Service Description The service description indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire If two numbers are given as in the example 120 116 then this represents the load index for single versus dual wheel usage single dual The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in psi pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascal Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in kPa kilopascal or psi pounds per square inch before a tire has built up heat from driving See Tire Pressure on page 10 66 Curb Weight The weigh
448. ode on page 9 50 9 54 Drive Systems Four Wheel Drive If the vehicle has Four Wheel Drive you can send the engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction To get the most satisfaction out of Four Wheel Drive you must be familiar with its operation Read the following before using Four Wheel Drive See the appropriate text for the transfer case in the vehicle Notice Driving on clean dry pavement in Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive Low for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on the vehicle s powertrain Do not drive on clean dry pavement in Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive Low for extended periods of time Driving and Operating While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight turns you may experience vibration in the steering system If the vehicle has StabiliTrak shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low will turn Traction Control and StabiliTrak off See StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 Front Axle The front axle engages and disengages automatically when you shift the transfer case Some delay for the axle to engage or disengage is normal Manual Transfer Case The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of the driver Use this lever to shift into and out of Four Wheel Drive A Four Wheel Drive indicator light comes on when you shift into four wheel drive and the front axle engages See Four Wheel Drive Light on page 5 29
449. of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps Starter Switch Check Z WARNING When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle Vehicle Care 10 39 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 9 69 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle should start only in P Park or N Neutral If the vehicle starts in any other position contact your dealer for service 10 40 Vehicle Care Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check Z WARNING When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 9 69 Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 With the engine off turn the ignition on but do not start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of P Park with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of P Park contact your dealer for service Igni
450. of the trailer tongue e Weight on the vehicle s tires e Weight of the trailering combination 9 92 Driving with a Trailer ZN WARNING When towing a trailer exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window is open Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death To maximize safety when towing a trailer e Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip Never drive with the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window open Continued Driving and Operating WARNING Continued e Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about Carbon Monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 9 44 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience The combination you are driving is longer and not as responsive as the vehicle itself Get acquainted with the handling and braking of the rig before setting out for the open road Before starting check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connectors lamps tires and mirrors If the trailer has electric brakes start the combination movi
451. off will light for several seconds as a system check ay 5 21 Then after several more seconds the status indicator ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol will light to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag When the right front passenger airbag is manually turned off using the airbag on off switch in the glove box the indicator light OFF or the off symbol will come on and stay on as a reminder that the airbag has been turned off This light will go off when the airbag has been turned on See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 for more information including important safety information 5 22 Instruments and Controls PASSENGER R AIR BAG OFF ON United States avo F ai x oY Canada and Mexico Z WARNING If the right front passenger airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag Ina crash the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Continued WARNING Continued Do not turn off the passenger airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group identified by the national government See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 for more on this including important safety information Z WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on
452. ol Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned 6 8 Lighting Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights Turning the knob to the farthest clockwise position turns on the dome lamps Cargo Lamp The cargo lamps come on by turning the instrument panel brightness control knob to the farthest clockwise position This knob is located on the instrument panel and also turns on the dome lamps The cargo lamps can be used if more light is needed in the cargo area of the vehicle or in the top box storage units Dome Lamps The dome lamps are located in the overhead console They come on when any door is opened and turn off after all the doors are closed Turn the instrument panel brightness knob located below the dome lamp override button clockwise to the farthest position to manually turn on the dome lamps The dome lamps remain on until the knob is turned counterclockwise Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control oats Dome Off Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened Reading Lamps For vehicles with reading lamps they are located on the overhead console To turn on the reading lamps press the button located next to each lamp T
453. ols and equipment If in doubt see your dealer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 10 4 At your dealer you can be certain that you will receive the highest level of service available Your dealer has specially trained service technicians uses genuine replacement parts as well as up to date tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics Service and Maintenance The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 11 11 We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer Rotation of New Tires To maintain ride handling and performance of the vehicle it is important that the first rotation service for new tires be performed Tires should be rotated every 12 000 km 7 500 miles See Tire Rotation on page 10 73 Scheduled Maintenance When the Change Engine Oil Soon Message Displays Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 10 7 An Emission Control Service When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays in the Driver Information Center DIC service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km 600 miles If driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system might not indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a year The engine oil and filter must be changed at le
454. om driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Use good judgment about what is safe and what is not 9 12 Driving and Operating Driving on Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot do There are some hills that simply cannot be driven no matter how well built the vehicle ZN WARNING Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you cannot control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill decide if it is too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you might not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Consider this as you approach a hill e Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places e Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping
455. ome other liquid to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water and other liquids can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant If using this mixture nothing else needs to be added This mixture e Gives freezing protection down to 37 C 34 F outside temperature e Gives boiling protection up to 129 C 265 F engine temperature e Protects against rust and corrosion e Will not damage aluminum parts e Helps keep the proper engine temperature Notice If an improper coolant mixture is used the engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Notice If extra inhibitors and or additives are used in the vehicle cooling system the vehicle could be damaged Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 for more information Never dispose of engine coolant by pu
456. on Customer assistance is available Monday through Friday 08 00 to 20 00 hours and Saturdays from 08 00 to 15 00 hours All e mail inquiries to the Customer Assistance Center CAC should be sent to cac gmc gm com 13 6 Customer Information Mexico Customer Assistance for GMC dealer locator for service From Mexico City Text Telephone TTY cane e Exclusive privileges and offers 5329 0812 Users U S and Canada S e Recall notices for your specific From Other Mexico Locations To assist customers who are deaf vehicle hard of hearing or speech impaired R 01 800 466 0812 and who use Text Telephones a a GM Cardmember United States and Canada TTYs GMC has TTY equipment ervices Earnings summaries available at its Customer Assistance Other Helpful Links 1 866 466 8191 Center Any TTY user can Costa Rica communicate with GMC by dialing GMC www gme com 1 800 462 8583 TTY users in GMC Merchandise 00 800 052 1005 Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 www gmccollection com Guatemala Help Center www gmc com Online Owner Center 1 800 999 5252 helpcenter GMC Owner Center U S e FAQ Frequently Asked Panama www gmcownercenter com Questions 00 800 052 0001 Information and services Contact Us Dominican Republic customized for your specific vehicle all in one convenient 1 888 751 5301 place El Salvador e Digital owner manual warranty 800 6273 information and more e Storage for online service and Honduras mai
457. on code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Channel Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM subscription package Channel Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info No artist information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Title Info No song title information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No CAT Info No category information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Information No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Subscription Please Renew The XM subscription needs to be reactivated Contact XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 CAT Not Found
458. on the RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and turn it to START Testing the Alarm To test the alarm 1 Lower the driver window and open the driver door 2 Press lock on the RKE transmitter 3 Close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 10 50 If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash see your dealer for service Keys Immobilizer See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 19 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS 210 220 310 Immobilizer Operation This vehicle has PASS Key IIl Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or START from the LOCK OFF position Doors and Windows 2 13 You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft
459. oning on page 8 1 or Climate Control Systems with Heater Only on page 8 4 If Equipped Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8 5 If Equipped In Brief 1 7 U Power Outlets on page 5 10 Cigarette Lighter If Equipped See Ashtrays on page 5 12 and Cigarette Lighter on page 5 11 V StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 If Equipped Pedal Adjust Button If Equipped See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 9 35 Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9 76 If Equipped Exhaust Brake If Equipped See Brakes in the Duramax Diesel Supplement W Passenger Airbag Off Control If Equipped See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 1 8 In Brief Initial Drive Information This section provides a brief overview about some of the important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle For more detailed information refer to each of the features which can be found later in this owner manual Remote Keyless Entry RKE System The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and unlock the doors from up to 60 m 195 ft away from the vehicle Press to unlock the driver door Press al again within three seconds to unlock all remaining doors Press to lock all doors Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized Press 2 and release to locate the vehicle Press 2 and hold for more than two seconds to sound the panic alarm Press 3 again to cancel t
460. ontrol Power Press to turn the radio on or off Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system and to start the Parental Control feature Parental Control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio RSA system or remote control A lock symbol displays next to the clock display The Parental Control feature remains on until the knob is pressed and held for more than two seconds again or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle J Tune Turn to select tracks on a CD or DVD Kl SEEK Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews A SEEK Press to go to the next track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press to quickly reverse the CD or DVD at five times the normal speed To stop fast reversing press again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press to fast forward the CD or DVD at five times the normal speed To stop fast forwarding press again This button might not work when the D
461. oor Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being programmed Instruments and Controls Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to www learcar2u com Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before starting Otherwise the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated To program up to three devices f From inside the vehicle press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds and immediately release them In the garage locate the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Find the Learn or Smart button It can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit and may be a colored button Press this button After pressing this button complete the following steps in less than 30 seconds 3 Instruments and Controls Immediately return to the vehicle Press and hold the Universal Home Remote button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink This button may need to be held for up to 20 seconds Immediately within one second release the b
462. operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when through Selecting the Right Engine Oil Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade Specification Use and ask for engine oils with the dexos certification mark Oils meeting the requirements of the vehicle should have the dexos certification mark on the container This certification mark indicates that the oil has been approved to the dexos specification dexos This vehicle was filled at the factory with dexos approved engine oil Notice Use only engine oil that is approved to the dexos specification or an equivalent engine oil of the appropriate viscosity grade Engine oils approved to the dexos specification will show the dexos symbol on the container Vehicle Care 10 9 Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty If you are unsure whether the oil is approved to the dexos specification ask your service provider Use of Substitute Engine Oils if dexos is unavailable In the event that dexos approved engine oil is not available at an oil change or for maintaining proper oil level you may use substitute engine oil displaying the API Starburst symbol and of SAE 5W 30 viscosity grade 10 10 Vehicle Care Use of oils that do not meet the dexos specification however may result in reduced performance under
463. operation and air inlet are automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor may run when the outside temperature is above freezing The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it is hot outside the air inlet may automatically switch to the recirculate mode to help quickly cool down the air inside the vehicle The light on the button comes on in recirculation Set the driver and passenger temperature To find your comfort setting start with a 23 C 74 F temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Use the driver or passenger temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If a temperature setting of 15 C 60 F is chosen the system remains at the maximum cooling setting If a temperature setting of 32 C 90 F is chosen the Climate Controls 8 7 system remains at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load For more information on the solar sensor see Sensors later in this section To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system delays turning the fan on until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature Pressing the fan switch overrides this delay an
464. or Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat ina position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 3 56 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how For crew cab second row seatings positions tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed Seats and Restraints 3 67 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 3 68 4 Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to s
465. or press multiple times to continue moving forward through the tracks on the CD 7 26 lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track gt D FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track RDM Random Press to listen to tracks in random rather than sequential order To use random 1 Press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays 2 Press the softkey again to turn off random play Infotainment System MP3 and WMA Supported Files Format The radio can play mp3 or wma files that were recorded onto a CD R or CD RW disc Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio and MP3 WMA files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into The DVD player only reads uncompressed audio and ignores MP3 WMA files on a mixed mode disc The CD player reads both uncompressed audio and MP3 WMA files on a mixed mode disc Uncompressd audio is played before MP3 WMA files Press the CAT category button to toggle between uncompressed audio and MP3 WMA files CD R or CD RW Supported File and Folder Structure The DVD player supports Up to 255 folders e Up to 8 folders in depth e Up to 15 playlists Up to 40 sessions e Playlists with an m3u or wpl extension e Files with an mp3 wma or cda file extension The CD player supports e Up to 5
466. or vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the P Park position before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off a p The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel which regulates when the automatic headlamps turn on Do not cover the sensor otherwise the headlamps will come on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or heavy overcast weather This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system are only affected when the light sensor detects a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay If the vehicle is started in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately Once the vehicle leaves the garage it takes approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is bright enough outside During that delay the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See nstrument Panel Illumination Control on page 6 7 To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off turn the control t
467. ored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Vehicle Care 10 109 Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts 10 1
468. ormats located on the DVD A disc The video screen shows the audio stream changing The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD V and DVD A menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 for more information The video screen automatically turns on when the DVD V is inserted into the DVD slot and does not automatically power on when the DVD A is inserted into the DVD slot It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system press the I button on the remote control or press the softkey located under the Ml or the P II tabs displayed on the radio If the radio is sourced to something other than DVD V press the DVD CD AUX button to make DVD V the active source To resume DVD playback press the P Il button on the remote control or press the softkey located under the P II tab on the radio The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control If the disc has been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice on the remote control the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc Infotainment System 7 33 CD DVD Player Messages Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is ins
469. ote vehicle start feature See your dealer to add the manufacturer s remote vehicle start feature to the vehicle 2 8 Keys Doors and Windows Door Locks ZN WARNING Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked So all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven Continued WARNING Continued Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle From outside use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the key in the driver door From inside use the power door locks or manual door locks To lock or unlock the door with the manual locks push down or pull up on the manual lock knob Power Door Locks With power door locks the switches on the front doors can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle A Unlock Press to
470. other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you Trailer Tow Mirrors i cut too sharply into the right lane The mirror may have a turn signal you could hit a vehicle on the arrow that flashes in the direction right Check the inside mirror or of the turn or lane change glance over your shoulder before changing lanes preferred position for better vision The passenger side mirror is convex shaped A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat If the vehicle has towing mirrors they can be adjusted for a clearer view of the objects behind you 2 16 Power Mirrors Vehicles with outside power mirrors have controls located on the driver door To adjust each mirror 1 Press A or B to select the driver or passenger side mirror 2 Press the arrows on the control pad to move the mirror up down right or left Keys Doors and Windows 3 Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle and the area behind are seen 4 Press either A or B again to deselect the mirror Folding Mirrors Vehicles with outside power foldaway mirrors have controls on the driver door Power Foldaway 1 Press A to fold the mirrors out to the driving position 2 Press B to fold the mirrors in to the folded position Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors Reset the power foldaway mirrors if e The mirrors a
471. ou In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Continued WARNING Continued For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving Manual Reclining Seatbacks Z WARNING You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving Z WARNING If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked Seats and Restraints 3 7 To adjust a manual seatback 1 Lift the lever The seatback will automatically fold forward 2 Torecline move the seatback rearward to the desired position then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 3 8 Seats and Restraints To return the seatback to the upright posit
472. ours the engine has run To display the engine hours turn the ignition off then press and hold the reset button for at least four seconds The hour meter displays for up to 30 seconds or until the ignition is turned on See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 for more information Trip Odometer The trip odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero Press the reset button located on the instrument panel cluster next to the voltmeter to toggle between the trip odometer and the regular odometer Holding the reset button for approximately one second while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it To display the odometer reading with the ignition off press the reset button See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 for more information Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm For a description of how Grade Braking affects vehicle speed while the Tow Haul Mode is activated see Tow Haul Mode on page 9 51 for more information If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Fuel Gauge Metric Instruments and Controls 5 15 1 2 O _ Kr English When the ignition is on the fuel gauge shows about how much fuel is left in the fuel tank An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on The gauge will first indicate
473. ove vehicle performance according to how the vehicle is being used such as with a heavy load or when temperature changes During this adaptive shift control process shifting might feel different as the transmission determines the best settings When temperatures are very cold the Allison Transmission and Hydra Matic 6 Speed transmission s gear shifting could be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up Shifts could be more noticeable with a cold transmission This difference in shifting is normal M Manual Mode This position is available on vehicles with the Allison Transmission or Hydra Matic 6 Speed transmission It lets drivers select the range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions If the vehicle has this feature see Range Selection Mode under Manual Mode on page 9 50 3 Third This position is also used for normal driving It reduces vehicle speed more than D Drive without using the brakes You might choose 3 Third instead of D Drive when driving on hilly winding roads when towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears and when going down a steep hill 2 Second This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 3 Third without using the brakes You can use 2 Second on hills Driving and Operating It can help control vehicle speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use the brakes off and on If you
474. owed Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a four wheel drive vehicle 1 Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle and shift the transmission to P Park 2 Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake 3 Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle Z WARNING Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park The driver or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N Neutral 4 Shift the transfer case to N Neutral See Shifting into Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 9 54 for the proper procedure to select the Neutral position for the vehicle 5 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle 6 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF and remove the key the steering wheel will still turn After towing see Shifting Out of Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 9 54 for the proper procedure to take the vehicle out of the Neutral position Dolly Towing Front Towing Front Wheels Off the Ground Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice If a two wheel drive vehicle is towed with the rear wheels on the ground the Vehicle Care 10 105 transmission could be damaged The repairs would not be cove
475. own e Going about 55 km h 35 mph or more push the accelerator all the way down By doing this the vehicle shifts down to the next gear and has more power D Drive can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You might want to shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often Driving and Operating Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding See Skidding under Loss of Control on page 9 6 The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine before making an upshift if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed throttle position and vehicle load If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear Insome cases this could appear to be a delayed shift however the transmission is operating normally The transmission uses adaptive shift controls Adaptive shift controls continually compares key shift parameters to pre programmed ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer The transmission constantly makes adjustments to impr
476. passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5 23 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on may inflate the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children including children in child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person Z WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 for more information including impo
477. pears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service as soon as possible See your dealer SERVICE BRAKES SOON On some vehicles this message displays if there is a problem with the brake system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service See your dealer SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system this message displays and a chime may sound when there is a problem with the ITBC system When this message displays power is no longer available to the trailer brakes As soon as it is safe to do so carefully pull your vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on If this message still displays either your vehicle or the trailer needs service See your dealer See Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing Equipment on page 9 112 for more information Door Ajar Messages DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime may sound if the driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message sti
478. pedal pulsate but this is normal Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help more than even the very best braking Parking Brake E c Set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down then pushing down the parking brake pedal If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 27 Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release Slowly pull your foot up off the parking brake pedal If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive the brake system warning light will flash and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9 91 Driving and Operating 9 69 Brake Assist Except With 4 3L V6 Engine If this vehicle has StabiliTrak it also has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions This feature uses th
479. peed management and by applying brakes to each individual wheel brake traction control as necessary The traction control system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is started It will activate and the StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving If traction control is turned off only the brake traction control portion of traction control will work The engine speed management will be disabled In this mode engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activate constantly Notice If the wheel s of one axle is allowed to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ABS brake warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are displayed the transfer case could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and messages are displayed The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens a reduction in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may be heard This is normal If cruise control is being used when the system activates the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise control will automatica
480. perature of the air inside the vehicle There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by adjusting the outlet temperature fan speed and the air delivery mode The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures Climate Controls 8 11 Air Vents Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side of the instrument panel to direct the airflow Use the thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close off the airflow Operation Tips e Clear away any ice snow or leaves from air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle e Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively e Use of non GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle 8 12 Climate Controls NOTES Driving and Operating Driving Information Defensive Driving 9
481. playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW disc Format Radios that have the capability of playing MP3s can play mp3 or wma files that were recorded onto a CD R or CD RW disc The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates 32 kbps 40 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 80 kbps 96 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 160 kbps 192 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio can play discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files If both formats are on the disc the radio reads all MP3 files first then the uncompressed CD audio files CD R or CD RW Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports e Up to 50 folders Up to 8 folders in depth e Up to 50 playlists e Up to 255 files e Playlists with an m3u or wpl extension e Files with an mp3 wma or cda file extension Root Directory The root directory is treated as a folder Files are stored in the root directory when the disc or storage device does not contain folders Files accessed from the root directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT Empty Folder Folders that do not contain files are skipped and the player advances to the next folder that contains files Order of Play Compressed audio files are accessed in the following order e Playlists Px e Files stored in the root directory e Files stored in folders in the root directory Tracks are played in th
482. plays when the windshield washer fluid is low Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir Also see Washer Fluid on page 10 29 for more information 5 52 Vehicle Personalization Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons The vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers All of the customization options may not be available on the vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC Instruments and Controls The default settings for the customization features were set when the vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then The customization preferences are automatically recalled To change customization preferences use the following procedure Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in P Park To avoid excessive drain on the battery turn the headlamps off 2 Press the customization button to scroll through the available customizable options Feature Settings Menu Items The following customization features allow you to program settings to the vehicle
483. pper body stopping the occupant more gradually Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body Rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows The rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events although no system can prevent all such ejections But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 3 32 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts Seats and Restraints 3 35 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags and seat mounted side impact airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 3 34 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the d
484. preset or favorite CD DVD To select tracks on a CD DVD Press and release or CB V to go to the next or previous track Selecting Tracks on an iPod or USB Device Vehicles without a Navigation System 1 Press and hold A or CQ V while listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display 2 Press and release A or CD V7 to scroll up or down the list then press and hold A or press to play the highlighted track Navigating Folders on an iPod or USB Device Vehicles without a Navigation System 1 Press and hold A or GS V while listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display 2 Press and hold C amp V to go back to the previous folder list 5 4 Instruments and Controls 3 Press and release A or CD V to scroll up or down the list e To select a folder press and hold A or press gt when the folder is highlighted To go back further in the folder list press and hold AP V Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the Main Audio Screen Vehicles with a Navigation System 1 Press and release A or CB V to select the next or previous track within the selected category 2 Press and hold A or C V to move quickly through the tracks 3 Press and release A to move up one track within the selected category Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the Music Navigator Screen Vehicles with a Navigation System
485. pring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this we will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 20 000 km 12 000 miles of purchase whichever occurs first Interior Care The interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery and cause damage to the carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Stains should be removed quickly as extreme heat could cause them to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Newspapers and garments that can transfer color to home furnishings can also transfer color to the interior Remove dust from small buttons and knobs with a small brush with soft bristles Your dealer has products for cleaning the interior When cleaning the interior only use cleaners
486. properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle ZN WARNING Never do this Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle Due to crash forces an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash For example in a crash at only 40 km h 25 mph a 5 5 kg 12 Ib infant will suddenly become a 110 kg 240 Ib force on a person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint Z WARNING Never do this Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat Secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat It is also Continued WARNING Continued better to secure a forward facing child restraint in a rear seat If you must secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Q What are the different types of add on child restraints A Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many diff
487. put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 3 76 Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat Here is why Z WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint a rear facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle even if the airbag is off Seats and Restraints If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat ina position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and
488. questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure U S and Canada on page 13 1 or Customer Satisfaction Procedure Mexico on page 13 3 In addition your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring Seats and Restraints Airbag System Check The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 for more information Notice If an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 3 34 See your dealer for service Replacing Airbag System Parts After a Crash Z WARNING A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle A damaged airbag system may not work properly and may not protect you and your passenger s in a crash resulting in serious injury or even death To help make sure the airbag systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made a
489. r CD player for use as another source for audio listening This input jack is not an audio output do not plug headphones into the front auxiliary input jack Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P Park See Defensive Driving on page 9 2 for more information on driver distraction To use a portable audio player connect a 3 5mm 1 8 in cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack When a device is connected press the radio CD AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers For optimal sound quality increase the portable audio device s volume to the loudest level It is always best to power the portable audio device through its own battery while playing Power Volume Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player Additional volume adjustments might have to be made from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough BAND Press to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The portable audio device continues playing CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD when a portable audio device is playing Press again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays DVD CD AUX DVD CD Auxiliary Press to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when
490. r Towing on page 9 95 Tow Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain 9 117 e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired Operating the vehicle in Tow Haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of Tow Haul when the vehicle is unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load 9 118 Integrated Trailer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system for electric trailer brakes This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake Control system The power output to the trailer brakes is based on the amount of brake pressure being applied by the vehicle s brake system This available power output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of trailering situations The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle s brake antilock brake and StabiliTrak if equipped systems In
491. r about 10 minutes Keep a safe vehicle distance from the vehicle in front If the warning does not come back on continue to drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is no sign of steam idle the engine for five minutes while parked If the warning is still displayed turn off the engine until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section 10 28 Vehicle Care Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message displays an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps to prevent engine damage In this mode a loss in power and engine performance will be noticed This operating mode allows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Driving extended km mi and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 10 7 Engine Fan If the vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan when the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In mo
492. r all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts 3 16 First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be Seats and Restraints worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Q What is wrong with this we ta LON FEX i di nth A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way Z WARNING You can be seriously hurt if the shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against yo
493. r bumper for Number License the bulb socket Back up Lamp Plate Lamp Stoplamp Taillamp Turn Signal Lamp oon Back up Lamp 1156 b p Cargo Lamp T and Center US J High Mounted 912 Stoplamp CHMSL Sidemarker Lamp Stoplamp Turn Signal Lamp 1157 Taillamp 2 Turn the bulb socket Fender Marker W5WLL Chassis Cab Models counterclockwise and pull the bulb socket out of the nak 9005 For replacement bulbs not listed lamp assembly p here contact your dealer 3 Pull the old bulb straight out Low Beam H11 from the bulb socket Headlamp 4 Install the new bulb 5 Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the bulb socket Electrical System Electrical System Overload The vehicle has fuses and circuit breakers to protect against an electrical system overload When the current electrical load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems Fuses and circuit breakers protect the following in the vehicle e Headlamp Wiring e Windshield Wiper Motor e Power Windows and Other Power Accessories Replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced the same amperage fuse can be borrowed Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not nee
494. r installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle This way the spare tire will be available in case you need it again Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes because they will not fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your vehicle s original road tires and wheels in size and type do not include the spare in the tire rotation 10 98 Vehicle Care Jump Starting For more information about the vehicle battery see Battery on page 10 34 If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information If the vehicle s battery or batteries has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely Z WARNING Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because e They contain acid that can burn you e They contain gas that can explode or ignite e They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pu
495. r openers RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information Customer Information Radio Frequency Statement This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS 210 220 310 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 The device may not cause interference 2 The device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 13 19 13 20 Customer Information NOTES A Accessories and Modifications 10 3 Accessory Power 9 40 Active Fuel Management 9 44 Add On Electrical Equipment 9 125 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment 9 125 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 9 35 Adjustments Lumbar Front Seats 3 6 Air Cleaner Filter Engine 10 19 Air Vents 22 000000 8 11 Airbag Light On Off 5 21 Airbag System Check cece eee eee 3 48 How Does an Airbag Restrain 2 0 3 35 Passenger Sensing System 2 20 00e eee 3 40 Wh
496. r relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See the dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs 13 12 Courtesy Rental Vehicle The dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if the vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Customer Information Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact the dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or dis
497. r three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch twice See Delayed Locking on page 2 8 for more information 5 56 Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door is closed NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Instruments and Controls EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside This happens after the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 30 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds 1 MINU
498. rbags also have seat position sensors which enable the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver seat all models and on crew cab and extended cab models the right front passenger seat on light duty models only The seat position sensor provides information that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment 3 34 The vehicle may or may not have seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 3 29 Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes In addition these roof rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts A seat mounted side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck Both roof rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over or in a severe frontal impact Seats and Restraints In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbag
499. rd position Continued WARNING Continued Even if the passenger sensing system or airbag switch has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Z WARNING A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others Always make sure the child restraint is properly secured Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint you may not be able to access adjacent safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for
500. re accidentally obstructed while folding e They are accidentally manually folded unfolded e The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position e The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position A popping noise may be heard during the resetting of the power foldaway mirrors This sound is normal after a manual folding operation Manual Foldaway Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold pull the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return to its original position Automatic Dimming If equipped with an automatic dimming mirror the driver outside mirror adjusts for the glare of the headlamps behind you See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2 18 Turn Signal Indicator The vehicle may also have a turn signal indicator on the mirror An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Keys Doors and Windows Heated Mirrors For vehicles with heated mirrors Gi Rear Window Defogger Press to heat the mirrors If the vehicle has a towing mirror only the upper glass of the mirror is heated The lower convex part of the towing mirror is not heated Depending on the vehicle s features see Rear Window Defogger under Climate Control Systems with Air Conditioning on page 8 1 or Climate
501. reSSUre 2 2200000e Pressure Light Pressure Monitor System Rotation Sidewall Labeling Terminology and Definitions Uniform Tire Quality GradING s s2ccc2ennaqudnes ts Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Wheel Replacement When It Is Time for New Tires erarnan Tow Haul Mode Tow Haul Mode Light Towing Driving Characteristics Equipment General Information Recreational Vehicle INDEX _ i 13 Towing cont Traller 2eceunadectcnenmeecees 9 95 Trailer Sway Control TSC 9 124 Vehicle 0 05 10 103 Trailer Sway Control TSC 9 124 Tow Mirrors 004 2 15 Trailer Towing 9 95 Transfer Case 9 54 Transmission Automatic 000 9 46 Fluid Automatic 10 13 10 16 Messages 0 5 50 Transportation Program Courtesy 2 005 13 11 Trip Odometer 5 14 Truck Camper Loading Information 5 9 32 Turn and Lane Change Signals s c idecervewceeceed ey 6 6 Turn Signal Bulb Replacement 10 46 i 14 INDEX U Ultrasonic Parking Assist 9 76 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 055 10 80 Universal Remote System 5 61 Operation 0 085 5 67 Programming
502. rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 3 56 In addition the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 40 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5 23 for more information on this including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys Z WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position The vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions Even if the passenger sensing system if equipped has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is Continued Seats and Restraints 3 69 WARNING Continued fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some u
503. red by the vehicle warranty Never tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed To dolly tow a two wheel drive vehicle the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly See Rear Towing Rear Wheels Off the Ground later in this section for more information 10 106 Vehicle Care Front Towing Front Wheels Off the Ground Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four wheel drive vehicle from the front 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the front wheels onto the dolly 3 Shift the transmission to P Park 4 Firmly set the parking brake Z WARNING Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park The driver or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N Neutral 5 Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position 6 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions 7 Shift the transfer case to N Neutral See Shifting into Neutral
504. red in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around ina collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Seats and Restraints 3 55 In some areas of the United States and Canada Certified Child Passenger Safety Technicians CPSTs are available to inspect and demonstrate how to correctly use and install child restraints In the U S refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA website to locate the nearest child safety seat inspection station For CPST availability in Canada check with Transport Canada or the Provincial Ministry of Transportation office Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint ZN WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint 3 56 Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child
505. res see Operation on page 7 2 For vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment System RSE and Rear Seat Audio System RSA see Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 and Rear Seat Audio RSA System on page 7 48 for more information Storing Radio Stations A maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM stations For more information see Storing Radio Stations in AM FM Radio on page 7 8 Setting the Clock To set the time and date for the radio with CD DVD and USB Port 1 Turn the ignition key to ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN then press to turn the radio on 2 Press to display HR MIN MM DD and YYYY hour minute month day and year 3 Press the softkey located under any one of the labels to be changed 4 To increase or decrease the time or date turn JJ clockwise or counter clockwise For detailed instructions on setting the clock for the vehicle s specific audio system see Clock on page 5 8 In Brief 1 27 Satellite Radio XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM satellite radio has a wide variety of progra
506. reset An Active Fuel Management indicator displays on the right side of the DIC while INST ECON displays on the left side Active Fuel Management allows the engine to operate on either four or eight cylinders depending on driving demands When Active Fuel Management is active V4 will display on the DIC When Active Fuel Management is inactive V8 will display See Active Fuel Management on page 9 44 for more information Blank Display This display shows no information Vehicle Information Menu Items with DIC Buttons Ti Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under Engine Oil Messages on page 5 45 You should change the oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 10 7 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 for more informa
507. ress the brake pedal but do not shift into P Park yet Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load Reapply the brake pedal Then apply the parking brake and shift into P Park If the vehicle is four wheel drive be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in N Neutral Release the brake pedal Z WARNING It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If the engine has been left running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when on fairly level ground use the steps that follow Always put the shift lever fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set If the transfer case on a four wheel drive vehicle is in N Neutral the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral Leaving After Parking on a Hill Apply and hold the brake pedal Start the engine Shift into a gear Release the parking brake Let up on the brake pedal Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks
508. right type of cap from your dealer The wrong type of fuel cap might not fit properly might cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and could damage the fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5 25 9 90 Driving and Operating Filling a Portable Fuel Container ZN WARNING Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense fuel only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Continued WARNING Continued e Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Towing General Towing Information Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle for towing a trailer See the following trailer towing information in this section e For information on driving while towing a trailer see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips e For maximum vehicle
509. rol Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package These provisions are for an electric brake controller The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires behind the steering column for the trailer brake controller The harness contains the following wires e Dark Blue Brake Signal to Trailer Connector e Red Black Battery e Light Blue White Brake Switch e White Ground The harness should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center If the vehicle is equipped with an Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC System the blunt cuts exist but are not connected further in the harness If an aftermarket trailer brake controller is installed the ITBC must be disconnected Do not power both ITBC and aftermarket controllers to control the trailer brakes at the same time Tow Haul Mode Pressing this button at the end of the shift lever turns on and off the Tow Haul Mode Driving and Operating a This indicator light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when the Tow Haul Mode is on Tow Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load See Tow Haul Mode on page 9 51 for more information Tow Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer under Traile
510. rol a USB Storage Device or iPod The five softkeys below the radio display are used to control the functions listed below To use the softkeys 1 Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display to display the functions listed below or press the softkey below the function if it is currently displayed 2 Press the softkey below the tab with the function on it to use that function Il Pause Press the softkey below II to pause the track The tab appears raised when pause is being used Press the softkey below II again to resume playback Back Press the softkey below the back tab to go back to the main display screen on an iPod or the root directory on a USB storage device Folder View Press the softkey below to view the contents of the current folder on the USB drive To browse and select files 1 Press the softkey below 2 Turn J to scroll through the list of folders 3 Press JJ to select the desired folder If there is more then one folder repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the desired folder is reached Infotainment System 7 37 4 Turn dd to scroll through the files in the selected folder 5 Press JJ to select the desired file to be played To skip through large lists the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order e First softkey first item in the list e Second softkey 1 through the list each time the softkey is pressed e Third softkey 5 t
511. roof there are two sunroof switches located in the overhead console above the rearview mirror The sunroof only operates when the ignition is in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN or the Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 9 40 for more information To open or close the sunroof press the open or close switch A to the first detent position To express open or close the sunroof press the open or close switch A to the second detent position and release To stop the movement press the switch again The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full open position From the comfort stop position press the open or close switch A a second time to open the sunroof to the full open position To automatically vent or close the sunroof press the vent open or close switch B When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed The sunroof also has a sunshade which can be pulled forward to block sun rays The sunshade must be opened and closed manually If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof Keys Doors and Windows gt Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the track This could cause an issue with sunroof operation noise
512. roof rail airbags are not affected by this If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position unless there is an airbag off switch located in the glove box If there is an airbag off switch the vehicle does not have a passenger sensing system See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 for more information The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is started f PASSENGER AIRBAG l OFF ON ra United States AKA Canada and Mexico we No See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 40 for important information Mirror Adjustment Exterior Mirrors Vehicles with outside power mirrors and foldaway mirrors have controls located on the driver door 1 Press A or B to select the driver or passenger side mirror 2 Press the arrows on the control pad to move the mirror up down right or left 3 Press either A or B again to deselect the mirror See Manual Mirrors on page 2 15 or Power Mirrors on page 2 16 If the vehicle has towing mirrors they can be adjusted for a clearer view of the objects behind you Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer See Trailer Tow Mirrors on page 2 15 Power Foldaway Mir
513. room to exit the vehicle D Press to recall the easy exit seat position The vehicle must be in P Park See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals under Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 4 and Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information Heated Seats rS If available the controls are on the driver and passenger doors Press to heat the seatback only Press to heat the seat and seatback See Heated Front Seats on page 3 8 Head Restraint Adjustment Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly To achieve a comfortable seating position change the seatback recline angle as little as necessary while keeping the seat and the head restraint height in the proper position For more information see Head Restraints on page 3 2 and Seat Adjustment on page 3 3 In Brief 1 15 Safety Belts Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly e Safety Belts on page 3 11 e How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 3 15 e Lap Shoulder Belt on page 3 21 e Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 3 57 1 16 In Brief Sensing System for Passenger Airbag The passenger sensing system if equipped turns off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbags seat mounted side impact airbags and
514. rors To fold the mirrors 1 Press C to fold the mirrors out to the driving position 2 Press D to fold the mirrors in to the folded position Manual Foldaway Mirrors Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold pull the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return to its original position See Folding Mirrors on page 2 16 Interior Mirror Vehicles with a manual rearview mirror can be adjusted to see clearly behind the vehicle Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to side To reduce headlamp glare during nighttime use push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use Vehicles with the automatic dimming feature will automatically reduce the glare of lights from behind the vehicle The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is started See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2 18 for more information In Brief 1 17 Steering Wheel Adjustment The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the steering column To adjust the steering wheel 1 Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever 2 Move the steering wheel up or down 3 Release the lever to lock the wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving 1 18 In Brief Throttle and Brake Pedal Adjustment On vehicles with this feature you can c
515. roved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire pressure warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message also displays The malfunction light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are e One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer for service e Replacement tires or wheels do
516. rovide distance and system information Keep the sensors on the vehicle s rear bumper clean to ensure proper operation The system can be disabled by pressing the rear park aid disable button located next to the radio See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9 76 for more information 1 32 In Brief Power Outlets Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cell phone MP3 player etc The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets located below the climate control system or may have one accessory power outlet and one cigarette lighter The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the receptacle closest to the driver There may be another accessory power outlet in the rear cargo area If the vehicle has a floor console there is an accessory power outlet inside the storage bin and one on the rear of the floor console The accessory power outlets are powered even when the ignition is in LOCK OFF Continuing to use power outlets while the ignition is in LOCK OFF may cause the vehicle s battery to run down See Power Outlets on page 5 10 Universal Remote System This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter Because of the steps involved it may be helpful
517. rs on the outside bottom edge of the ear cup and should be positioned on the left ear The symbol R Right appears on the outside bottom edge of the ear cup and should be positioned on the right ear Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set To purchase replacement ear pads call 1 888 293 3332 then prompt zero 0 or contact your dealer Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones 1 Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones Slide the battery door open 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Infotainment System 7 41 Audio Video A V Jacks ww A R B C A Yellow Video Input B White Left Audio Input C Red Right Audio Input The A V jacks are color coded to m
518. rtant safety information Seats and Restraints 3 43 If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove the child restraint from the vehicle 3 Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 4 Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing Child Restraints Rear Seat Position on page 3 66 or Securing Child Restraints Right Front Seat Position on page 3 69 or Securing Child Restraints Center Front Seat Position on page 3 78 3 44 5 Seats and Restraints If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit turn the vehicle off Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion if adjustable to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint See Head Restraints on page 3 2 Restart the vehicle The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child s seating posture and body build It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear s
519. s 3 73 4 309 kg 9 500 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0LV8 Single Rear Wheels Conventional Trailer 6 0LV8 Single Rear Wheels Fifth Wheel Trailer 4 10 5 897 kg 13 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 4 10 6 350 kg 14 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs Driving and Operating 9 107 Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR a 6 0L V8 Dual Rear Wheels 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Dual Rear Wheels 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box e 6 0LV8 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Conventional Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Fifth Wheel Trailer 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box e 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels 4 264 kg 9 400 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels 4 10 5 897 kg 13 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs Conventional Trailer 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels len A pet 4 10 6 305 kg 13 900 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 6 0L V8 Dual Rear Wheels 4 082 kg 9 000 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0LV8 Dual Rear Wheels 6 123 kg 13 500 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs 3500 Series 4WD Regular Cab e 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels 4 400 kg 9 700 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs 6 0L V8 Single Rear Wheels 4 10 5 897 kg 13 000 Ibs 9 299 kg 20 500 Ibs Conventional Trailer 9 108 Driving and Operating Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR a 6 0LV8 Single Rear Wheels Fifth Wheel Trailer 6 0LV8 Dual Rear Wheels 3 73 4218 kg 9 300 Ibs 7 257 kg 16 000 Ibs
520. s inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact Ina rollover event roof rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with seat mounted side impact airbags there are airbags modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows that have occupant seating positions How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s u
521. s recognized by the system say Verify at any time 1 Press and hold 1 for two seconds 2 Say Digit Dial 3 Say each digit one at a time that you want to dial After each digit is entered the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone After the last digit has been entered say Dial Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Using the Re dial Command 1 Press and hold 1 for two seconds 2 After the tone say Re dial Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Receiving a Call When an incoming call is received the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle Press amp 1 to answer the call Press C V to ignore a call Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier Press to answer an incoming call when another call is active The original call is placed on hold Press 1 again to return to the original call e To ignore the incoming call no action is required Press C V to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold Three Way Calling Three way calling must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier 1 While on a call press 2 Say Three way call 3 Use the dial or call command to dial the number of th
522. s use the following procedure Compass Calibration Procedure 1 Before calibrating the compass make sure the compass zone is set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is located See Compass Variance Zone Procedure earlier in this section Do not operate any switches such as window sunroof climate controls or seats during the calibration procedure Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays Or if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons press the trip odometer reset stem until CALIBRATE COMPASS displays Instruments and Controls 3 Press the set reset button to start the compass calibration Or if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for two seconds to start the compass calibration _ The DIC will display CALIBRATING DRIVE IN CIRCLES Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less than 8 km h 5 mph to complete the calibration The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a few seconds when the calibration is complete The DIC display will then return to the previous menu Clock AM FM Radio and AM FM Radio with CD Player To set the clock fi Turn the ignition key to ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN then press the button to turn the radio on Press the button until the hour numbers begin to flash then turn the Jd knob to increase or decrease the hour Press the button until
523. s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 10 58 for additional information 10 78 Vehicle Care GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep the vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of the vehicle See Tire Inspection on page 10 73 and Tire Rotation on page 10 73 for information on proper tire rotation ZN WARNING Tires could explode during improper service Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires Z WARNING Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle might not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types could also cause damage to the vehicle Be
524. s inspection for loose or damaged components Vehicles with diesel engine or GVWR above 4 536 kg 10 000 Ibs only Shields inspection for damage or looseness Adjust or replace as required This is a Noise Emission Control Service Applicable to vehicles sold in the United States and recommended for vehicles sold in Canada Additional Required Services At the First 160 km 100 Miles 1 600 km 1 000 Miles and 10 000 km 6 000 Miles e For vehicles with dual wheels Check dual wheel nut torque For proper torque see Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 Every 12 000 km 7 500 Miles e Rotate tires Tires should be rotated every 12 000 km 7 500 miles See Tire Rotation on page 10 73 At Each Fuel Stop e Engine oil level check See Engine Oil on page 10 7 e Engine coolant level check See Engine Coolant on page 10 22 e Windshield washer fluid level check See Washer Fluid on page 10 29 Service and Maintenance 11 5 Once a Month Tire inflation pressures check See Tire Pressure on page 10 66 Tire wear inspection See Tire Inspection on page 10 73 Sunroof track and seal inspection if equipped See Sunroof Extended Cab on page 2 21 or Sunroof Crew Cab on page 2 22 Once a Year See Starter Switch Check on page 10 39 See Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check on page 10 40 See Ignition Transmission Lock Check on page 10 40 See Park Brake and P Park
525. s soon as possible If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See your dealer for service If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving the airbag system may not work properly Have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 for more information Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle safety belts Seats and Restraints 3 49 The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder belt until the child passes the fit test below e Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat e Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 3 21 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat 3 50 Seats and Restraints e Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat e Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip If yes continue If
526. s stops and must be restarted The TPMS sensor matching process is 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off 3 Press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen If the vehicle does not have RKE press the Driver Information Center DIC vehicle information button until the PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen If the vehicle does not have RKE or DIC buttons press the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster until the PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen Start with the driver side front tire Place the relearn tool against the tire sidewall near the valve stem Then press the button to activate the TPMS sensor A horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position 6 Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 7 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the
527. s this feature To access contacts stored in the cell phone 1 Press and hold t for two seconds 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Voice The system responds OK accessing lt phone name gt The cell phone s normal prompt messages will go through their cycle according to the phone s operating instructions Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Tones The Bluetooth system can send numbers and the numbers stored as name tags during a call You can use this feature when calling a menu driven phone system Account numbers can also be stored for use Sending a Number or Name Tag During a Call 1 Press 1 The system responds Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Dial 3 Say the number or name tag to send Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in vehicle Bluetooth system it will be retained indefinitely This includes all saved name tags in the phone book and phone pairing information For information on how to delete this information see the previous section Deleting a Paired Phone and the previous sections on deleting name tags Other Information The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners Climate Controls Climate
528. se button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender Seats and Restraints 3 27 Safety System Check Now and then check that the safety belt reminder light safety belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job See your dealer to have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 5 19 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Safety Belt Care on page 3 28 3 28 Seats and Restraints Safe
529. seat mounted side impact airbag for the driver e A seat mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger e A roof rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver e A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger and the person seated directly behind the right front passenger All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With seat mounted side impact airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest to the door With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job Seats and Restraints 3 29 Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system Z WARNING You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Also airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash In som
530. shed or towed C ON RUN This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights The switch stays in this position when the engine is running The transmission is also unlocked in this position on automatic transmission vehicles If you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the engine off the battery could be drained You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time D START This is the position that starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch returns to ON RUN for driving A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened and the ignition is in ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF and the key is in the ignition Starting the Engine If the vehicle has a Duramax diesel engine see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Notice Do not try to shift to P Park if the vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to P Park only when the vehicle is stopped Move the shift lever to P Park or N Neutral The engine will not start in any other position To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the v
531. shifting between Four Wheel Drive Low and Four Wheel Drive High ranges or from N Neutral with the engine running If the knob is turned to the Four Wheel Drive Low position when the vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 5 km h 3 mph and the transmission is in N Neutral After 30 seconds the transfer case will shift to Four Wheel Drive High mode 9 66 Shifting Out of Four Wheel Drive Low To shift from Four Wheel Drive Low to Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 km h 3 mph with the transmission in N Neutral and the ignition in ON RUN The preferred method for shifting out of Four Wheel Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving 1 6 to 3 2 km h 1 to 2 mph Turn the knob to the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High position You must wait for the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the Driving and Operating transfer case To help avoid damaging the vehicle always wait for the mode indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear It is typica
532. sing the StabiliTrak button if they are not automatically shut off for any other reason 9 72 When TCS or StabiliTrak is turned off the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver The vehicle will still have brake traction control when traction control is off but will not be able to use the engine speed management system See Traction Control Operation next for more information When the traction control system has been turned off system noises may still be heard as a result of the brake traction control coming on It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock the vehicle to attempt to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9 23 Driving and Operating When the transfer case is in 4LO the stability system is automatically disabled the StabiliTrak light comes on and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on the DIC Both traction control and StabiliTrak are automatically disabled in this condition Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels engine s
533. sion Allison All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid level after filling Technical Data 12 5 Engine Specifications FLVS TUS 1 52 mm 0 060 ZELVE 20 102mm 0 04077 5 3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management Automatic 1 02 mm 0 040 in Iron Block LMG 5 3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management Automatic 1 02 mm 0 040 in Aluminum Block LC9 6 0L V8 ron Block tos a aoma Tomm 00407 6 0 V8 ron Block L9 1 02 mm 0 040 ena sen 12 6 Technical Data Engine Drive Belt Routing Po vO V6 Engines V8 Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information Customer Information Customer Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure U S and Canada 13 1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure Mexico 13 3 Customer Assistance Offices U S and Canada 13 5 Customer Assistance Offices Mexico 2 2 05 13 5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users U S and Canada 13 6 Online Owner Center 13 6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program U S and Canada 13 7 Roadside Assistance Program U S and Canada 13 8 Roadside Assistance Program Mexico 13 10
534. sition write Left s When a switch is in the down position write Right If a switch is set between the up and down position write Middle The switch settings written down in Step 2 now become the button strokes to be entered into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4 Be sure to enter the switch settings written down in Step 2 in order from left to right into the Universal Home Remote when completing Step 4 3 From inside your vehicle first firmly press all three buttons at the same time for about three seconds Release the buttons to put the Universal Home Remote into programming mode 5 66 Instruments and Controls A Left Button Up or On B Middle Button Middle 0 or Neutral C Right Button Down or Off 4 The indicator lights will blink slowly Enter each switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle s Universal Home Remote You will have two and one half minutes to complete Step 4 Now press one button on the Universal Home Remote for each switch setting as follows If you wrote Left press the left button A in the vehicle If you wrote Right press the right button C in the vehicle If you wrote Middle press the middle button B in the vehicle 5 After entering all of the switch positions once again firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time The indicator lights will turn on 6 Press and
535. smitter at the vehicle and press and hold until the parking lamps turn off e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Turn the ignition on and then back off The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequences The engine will run for 10 minutes after each remote start Or you can extend the engine run time by another 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame and before the engine stops For example if o and then Q are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for 5 minutes 10 minutes are added allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes The additional 10 minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start Keys Doors and Windows Once two remote starts or a single remote start with one time extension has been done the vehicle must be started with the key After the key is removed from the ignition the vehicle can be remote started again The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the ignition the hood is not closed or if there is an emission control system malfunction and the check engine light is on Also the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low 2 7 Remote Start Ready If the vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start feature it may have the remote start ready feature This feature allows your dealer to add the manufacturer s rem
536. snow mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens Clean the lens rinse it with water and wipe it with a soft cloth Driving and Operating e The back of the vehicle is in an accident If this happens the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer The RVC system display in the rearview mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to one of the following conditions If this occurs the left indicator light on the mirror will flash e A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal or no video signal present during the reverse cycle 9 83 e A fast flash may indicate that the display has been on for the maximum allowable time during a reverse cycle or the display has reached an Over Temperature limit The fast flash conditions are used to protect the video device from high temperature conditions Once conditions return to normal the device will reset and the green indicator will stop flashing During any of these fault conditions the display will be blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long as the vehicle is in R Reverse or until the conditions return to normal Pressing and holding when the left indicator light is flashing will turn off the video display along with the left indicator light 9 84 Fuel For diesel engine vehicles see Fuel
537. so has a sunshade that you can pull forward to block the rays of the sun The sunshade must be opened and closed manually See Sunroof Extended Cab on page 2 21 or Sunroof Crew Cab on page 2 22 In Brief 1 33 Performance and Maintenance StabiliTrak System If equipped the vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions Both systems turn on automatically every time the vehicle is started e To turn off traction control press and release on the instrument panel illuminates and the appropriate DIC message displays See Ride Control System Messages on page 5 47 1 34 In Brief e To turn off both traction control and StabiliTrak press and hold amp until illuminates and the appropriate DIC message displays See Ride Control System Messages on page 5 47 e Press and release amp again to turn on both systems For more information see StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 Tire Pressure Monitor This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 1 The TPMS warning light alerts you to a significant loss in pressure of one of the vehicle s tires If the warning light comes on stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 The warning lig
538. specific warranties in both the U S and Canada Several Courtesy Transportation options are available to assist in reducing inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Customer Information Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances the dealer can offer one of the following Shuttle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation Dealers may provide shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of the dealer s area 13 11 Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If the vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend o
539. st everyday driving conditions the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages so an increase in fan noise may be heard This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages This fan noise may also be heard when starting the engine It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages If the vehicle has electric cooling fans the fans may be heard spinning at low speed during most everyday driving The fans may turn off if no cooling is required Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing high outside temperatures or operation of the air conditioning system the fans may change to high speed and an increase in fan noise may be heard This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for reservoir location When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless there is a leak suspected in the system or an
540. st in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in the vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was traveling 13 18 This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by the vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as Customer Information law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR GM will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of
541. straints Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System Z WARNING If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Install a LATCH type child restraint properly using the anchors or use the vehicle safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual Z WARNING Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor except for the center top tether anchors in the crew and extended cabs Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash attach only one child restraint per anchor Z WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if the vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle s safety belts This may damage these parts If
542. strument Panel Illumination Control on page 6 7 Exterior Lighting Bean y Sgt mS L W DENA e3 O e i The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel Turns off the automatic headlamps and Daytime Running Lamps DRL Turn the headlamp control to the off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on In Brief 1 19 For vehicles first sold in Canada the off position will only work when the vehicle is shifted into P Park AUTO Automatically turns on the headlamps parking lamps taillamps instrument panel lights roof marker lamps if equipped and license plate lamps 200 Turns on the parking lamps taillamps instrument panel lights roof marker lamps if equipped and license plate lamps 1 20 In Brief ZD Turns on the headlamps parking lamps taillamps instrument panel lights roof marker lamps if equipped and license plate lamps For more information see e Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6 1 e Daytime Running Lamps DRL on page 6 4 e Fog Lamps on page 6 6 Windshield Wiper Washer VW Single wipe turn to VW then release Several wipes hold the band on W longer Turns the windshield wipers off i Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes GD Slow wipes GB Fast wipes WV Push the paddle at the top of the lever to spray washer fluid on t
543. supplement for more information Voltmeter Gauge This gauge indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is turned on When the ignition is on this gauge indicates the battery voltage When the engine is running this gauge shows the condition of the charging system The gauge can transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading This is normal If the vehicle is operating outside the normal operating range the charging system light comes on See Charging System Light on page 5 24 for more information The voltmeter gauge may also read lower when in fuel economy mode This is normal Readings outside the normal operating range can also occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period Instruments and Controls This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power The vehicle can only be driven for a short time with the readings outside the normal operating range If the vehicle must be driven turn off all accessories such as the radio and air conditioner Readings outside the normal operating range indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible 5 19
544. sure to use the same size brand and type of tires on all wheels This vehicle may have a different size spare than the road tires those originally installed on the vehicle When new the vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as the vehicle s road tires and wheels so it is all right to drive on it Because this spare was developed for use on the vehicle it will not affect vehicle handling Z WARNING Using bias ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle If you must replace the vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as the vehicle s original tires Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC Spec rated tires are installed on the vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 10 68 The vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 for more information about
545. sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving and Operating 9 93 Driving on Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade If the transmission is not shifted down the brakes might get hot and no longer work well Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions The Tow Haul Mode may be used if the transmission shifts too often See Tow Haul Mode on page 9 51 When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating 9 94 To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in P Park for a few minutes before turning the engine off If the overheat warning comes on see Engine Overheating on page 10 25 Parking on Hills Z WARNING Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous If something goes wrong the rig could start to move People can be injured and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged When possible always park the rig on a flat surface Driving and Operating If parking the rig on a hill 1 P
546. system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode W Defrost This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents with some directed to the floor vents In this mode the system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode The passenger temperature control cannot be activated while in defrost mode If the PASS button is pressed the button indicator flashes three times and will not work If the passenger temperature buttons are adjusted the driver temperature indicator changes The passenger temperature will not be displayed If vent bi level or floor mode is selected again the climate control system displays the previous temperature settings Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear X Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning A C compressor on and off An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on If this button is pressed when the air conditioning compressor is unavailable due to outside conditions the indicator flashes three times and then turns off If the air conditioning is
547. t Alarm System on page 2 12 2 4 a Unlock Press once to unlock only the driver door If A is pressed again within three seconds all remaining doors unlock The interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the turn signal lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred See Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 If enabled through the DIC the exterior lights may turn on See Approach Lighting under Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 Pressing A on the RKE transmitter disarms the content theft deterrent system See Anti Theft Alarm System on page 2 12 2 Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release to locate the vehicle The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times Keys Doors and Windows Press and hold 2 for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to ON RUN or 4 is pressed again The ignition must be in LOCK OFF for the panic alarm to work The vehicle comes with two transmitters Each transmitter will have a number on it 1 or 2 These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle For example the memory seat position for driver 1 will be recalled when using the transmitter labeled 1 if enabled through the DIC See
548. t Shaft Access Hole Wheel Wrench Jack Handle Extensions Spare Tire Lock If equipped Vehicle Care 10 87 1 Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the ignition key to remove the spare tire lock J To remove the spare tire lock insert the ignition key turn and pull straight out 2 Assemble the wheel wrench H and the two jack handle extensions l as shown 10 88 Vehicle Care 3 Insert the hoist end open end F of the extension through the hole G in the rear bumper Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench Be sure the hoist end of the extension F connects to the hoist shaft E The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire Turn the wheel wrench H counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle 5 Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle 6 Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the cable to access the tire wheel retainer Tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel along with the cable and spring 7 Put the spare tire near the flat tire Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Use the following pictures and instructions to remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle E The tools you will be using include the jack A the wheel blocks B the jack handle
549. t System e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There was a problem while burning the CD e The label is caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem CD DVD Player Care of the CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a disc It could get caught in the CD or DVD player If a disc is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded disc with a marking pen The use of CD DVD lens cleaners is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism Notice lf a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section Care of CDs and DVDs If playing a CD R or CD RW the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R or CD RW quali
550. t have an auxiliary battery have your dealer or authorized service center install the required fuse 9 115 If charging a remote non vehicle battery press the Tow Haul Mode button if equipped located at the end of the shift lever This will boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery If the trailer is too light for Tow Haul Mode or the vehicle is not equipped with Tow Haul turn on the headlamps as a second way to boost the vehicle system and charge the battery 9 116 Camper Fifth Wheel Trailer Wiring Package The seven wire camper harness is located under the front edge of the pickup box on the driver side of the vehicle attached to the frame bracket A connector must be added to the wiring harness which connects to the camper The harness contains the following camper trailer circuits e Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal e Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal e Brown Taillamps e White Ground e Light Green Back up Lamps e Red Battery Feed e Dark Blue Trailer Brake Driving and Operating If the vehicle is equipped with the Heavy Duty Trailering option please refer to Heavy Duty Trailer Wiring Package earlier in this section When the camper wiring harness is ordered without the heavy duty trailering package an eight wire harness with a seven pin connector is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the vehicle s frame Electric Brake Cont
551. t of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 Vehicle Care 10 63 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire 10 64 Vehicle Care Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible i
552. t the brightness screen display mode normal full or zoom and display the language menu amp Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active HM Stop Press this button to stop playing fast reversing or fast forwarding a DVD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press this button to start playing a DVD Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause it Press it again to continue playing the DVD While the DVD is playing the DVD can be played slowly by pressing the play pause button then pressing the fast forward button The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode Also reverse can be played slowly by pressing the play pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button To cancel slow play mode press the play pause button Kd Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Next Track Chapter Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track This button might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Fast Reverse Press this button to quickly reverse the D
553. t the disc currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed due to unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject Playing a DVD DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text tab and a message showing the track or chapter number will display when a disc is in either slot Press the DVD CD AUX button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device see Auxiliary Devices on page 7 34 for more information If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot front auxiliary and rear auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack in Auxiliary Devices on page 7 34 or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 7 39 for more information If a disc is inserted into the top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote c
554. t the top of the multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield The wipers clear the window and then either stop or return to the preset speed Compass The vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Center DIC Compass Zone The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory Your dealer will set the correct zone for your location Under certain circumstances such as during a long distance cross country trip or moving to a new state or province it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone is not set correctly Compass variance is the difference between the earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If the compass is not set to the zone where you live the compass may give false readings The compass must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling To adjust for compass variance use the following procedure Compass Variance Zone Procedure 1 Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is moving Only set it when the vehicle is in P Park Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays Or if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons press the trip odometer reset stem until CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays Find the vehicle s current location and variance zone number on the map Zones 1 through 15 are available Press the set reset bu
555. tain and or emit these chemicals California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in Remote Keyless Entry transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Accessories and Modifications Adding non dealer accessories to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non GM certified parts including control module modifications is not Vehicle Care 10 3 covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle Your GM dealer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories
556. tarted and the vehicle begins to drive away ABS checks itself A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal moves a little This is normal Driving and Operating If there is a problem with ABS this warning light stays on See Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light on page 5 28 If driving safely on a wet road and it becomes necessary to slam on the brakes and continue braking to avoid a sudden obstacle a computer senses that the wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel as required faster than any driver could This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard As the brakes are applied the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even with ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let ABS work You might hear the ABS pump or motor operating and feel the brake
557. tation will play for five seconds before moving to the next station 2 To stop the SCAN function press again While listening to a CD DVD press and hold D to quickly move forward through the tracks Release to stop on the desired track lt Volume Press to increase or to decrease the volume Instruments and Controls 5 5 Horn To sound the horn press the center pad on the steering wheel Windshield Wiper Washer Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the windshield wipers VW Mist Single wipe turn to Z then release Several wipes hold the band on W longer Off Turns the windshield wipers off i Adjustable Interval Wipes Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes GED Low Speed Slow wipes High Speed Fast wipes Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them Damaged wiper blades should be replaced See Wiper Blade Replacement on page 10 41 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down 5 6 Instruments and Controls Windshield Washer ZN WARNING In freezing weather do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision W Washer Fluid Push the paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol a
558. tection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Automatic transmission fluid change normal service See Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission on page 10 13 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission on page 10 16 Four wheel drive only Transfer case fluid change normal service Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed clear and free of debris During any maintenance if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals High pressure water can overcome the seals will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced e Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires inspection An Emission Control Service First Engine Oil Change After Every 240 000 km 150 000 Miles e Engine cooling system drain flush and refill or every five years whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant on page 10 22 An Emission Control Service e Engine drive belts inspection for fraying excessive cracks or obvio
559. than 318 kg 700 Ibs to the front axle Using the formula if the snow plow is 122 cm 4 ft in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 305 cm 10 ft then W 318kg 700 Ib A 122 cm 4 ft W B 305 cm 10 ft Wx A W B W B 700 x 4 10 10 445 kg 980 Ibs So if the front axle reserve capacity is more than 445 kg 980 Ibs you could add the snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR You can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer passengers less cargo or by positioning cargo toward the rear 9 128 Driving and Operating This has the effect of reducing the load on the front However the front GAWR rear GAWR and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR must never be exceeded ZN WARNING On some vehicles that have certain front mounted equipment such as a snow plow it may be possible to load the front axle to the front gross axle weight rating GAWR but not have enough weight on the rear axle to have proper braking performance If your brakes can not work properly you could have a crash To help your brakes work properly when a snow plow is installed Continued WARNING Continued always follow the snow plow manufacturer or installer s recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio even though the actual front weight may be less than the front GAWR and the tota
560. the CD symbol displays on the left side of the radio display As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm 3in single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to cycle between CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing the disc and or track number will display when a CD is in the player Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device see Auxiliary Devices on page 7 34 for more information If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays Infotainment System 7 17 i Information Press to display additional text information related to the current song If information is available the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line When information is not available NO INFO displays d Tune Turn to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing KI SEEK Press to go to the start of the current track if more than 10 seconds on the CD have played Press to go to the previous track if less than 10 seconds on the CD have played Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through the tracks on the CD DI SEEK Press to go to the next track Press and hold or press multiple
561. the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on the vehicle Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires this could affect the way the vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes rollover airbags traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected Vehicle Care 10 79 ZN WARNING If different sized wheels are used there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 10 77 and Accessories and Modifications on page 10 3 for additional information 10 80 Vehicle Care Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwe
562. the belt go back all the way and start again A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle See Adding Equipment to the Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 3 46 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates Seats and Restraints 3 45 The on indicator may be lit if an object such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device is put on an unoccupied seat If this is not desired remove the object from the seat Z WARNING Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system 3 46 Seats and Restraints Servicing the Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 13 15 Z WARNING For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnect
563. the door 2 Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The security light should flash Keys Doors and Windows If the delayed locking feature is active the alarm will not be activated until all doors are closed and the security light goes off 3 Close all doors The security light will stop flashing and go off after approximately 30 seconds The system is armed when the security light goes off If a locked driver door is opened without using the RKE transmitter a 10 second pre alarm will occur The horn will chirp and the lights will flash If the key is not placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter during the 10 second pre alarm the alarm will go off The vehicle s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about 30 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power The theft deterrent system will not activate if the doors are locked with the key or the manual door lock It activates only if you use the power door lock switch or the RKE transmitter The vehicle can be started with the correct key if the alarm is set off To avoid setting off the alarm by accident e If you do not want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed e Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter If the alarm is set off press unlock
564. the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil This light comes on briefly while starting the engine If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information 5 31 Low Fuel Warning Light This light under the fuel gauge comes on briefly while the engine is being started This light and a chime comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel The Driver Information Center also displays a FUEL LEVEL LOW message See Fuel System Messages on page 5 46 for more information When fuel is added this light and message should go off If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer 5 32 Instruments and Controls Security Light Git For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Anti Theft Alarm System on page 2 12 High Beam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 6 3 for more information Front Fog Lamp Light 20 The fog lamp lights come on when the fog lamps are in use The lights go out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 6 6 for more inform
565. the second line of the display Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist To listen to files by another artist press the softkey located below either arrow tab The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist displays Infotainment System 7 21 To change from playback by artist to playback by album 1 Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab 2 Press one of the softkeys below the Album tab from the sort screen 3 Press the softkey below the Back tab to return to the main music navigator screen The album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begin to play Once all songs from that album have played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing MP3s from that album To exit music navigator mode press the softkey below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback 7 22 CD Player Messages CHECK DISC If this message displays and or the CD ejects it could be for one of the following reasons e Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e The road is very rough When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down Infotainmen
566. the side window vents with some air directed to the floor vents The system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear Climate Controls 8 5 Dual Automatic Climate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this system The vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section A Driver and Passenger G Air Delivery Mode Control Temperature Controls H Display B Fan Control I On Off C AUTO J Rear Window Defogger D Defrost K Air Conditioning E Recirculation L PASS Passenger F Outside Air 8 6 Climate Controls On Off Press to turn the climate control system on or off Outside air still enters the vehicle and is directed to the floor This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button Recirculation can be selected once you have selected vent or bi level mode The temperature can also be adjusted using either temperature button If the air delivery mode or temperature settings are adjusted with the system off the display illuminates briefly to show the settings and then returns to off The system can be turned back on by pressing either 4 the defrost or the AUTO button Driver and Passenger Side Temperature Controls The driver and passenger side temperature buttons are used to adjust the temperature of the air
567. the terrain and its many different features Surface Conditions Off roading surfaces can be hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle s steering acceleration and braking in different ways Depending on the surface slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances can occur Driving and Operating Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Some things to consider e Is the path ahead clear e Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead e Does the travel take you uphill or downhill e Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When driving over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands 9 11 When driving over bumps rocks or other obstacles the wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking Off roading requires a different kind of alertness fr
568. the trip odometer reset stem Instruments and Controls Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either kilometers km or miles mi Trip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either kilometers km or miles mi since the last reset for the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of kilometers km or miles mi driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 8 km 5 miles before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 8km 5 miles As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 8 2 km 5 1 miles 8 4 km
569. the vehicle is equipped with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system HSA may also apply the trailer brakes It will not activate if the vehicle is ina drive gear and facing downhill or if the vehicle is facing uphill and in R Reverse There may be situations on minor hills less than 5 grade with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where HSA will not activate Ride Control Systems StabiliTrak System The vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path When the vehicle is started and begins to move the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 32 km h 20 mph In some cases it may take approximately 3 2 km 2 mi of driving before the system initializes If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates the cru
570. this is done the vehicle goes about 1 6 km h 1 mph slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed Driving and Operating 9 75 Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed load and the steepness of the hills While going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed While going downhill you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down When the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged 9 76 Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control e To disengage cruise control step lightly on the brake pedal Press amp on the steering wheel e To turn off the cruise control press on the steering wheel Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed is erased from memory by pressing the 6 button or if the ignition is turned off Driving and Operating Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Parking Assist For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system it operates at speeds less than 8 km h 5 mph and assists the driver with parking and avoiding objects while in R Reverse The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect t
571. this message displays if there is a problem with the URPA system Do not use this system to help you park See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9 76 for more information See your dealer for service Ride Control System Messages SERVICE STABILITRAK If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and this message displays it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system If you see this message try to reset the system Instruments and Controls Stop turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed and drive accordingly SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL If the vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System TCS When this message displays the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly See your dealer for service See StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 for more information 5 47 STABILITRAK OFF If the vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak or when the stability control has been automatically disabled To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave StabiliTrak on However you should turn StabiliTrak off if
572. this system Channel 1 is dedicated to the video screen while Channel 2 is dedicated to Rear Seat Audio RSA selections These headphones can be used to listen to the radio CDs DVDs MP3s DVD As or any auxiliary source connected to A V jacks or the auxiliary input jack if the vehicle has this feature The wireless headphones have an On Off button channel 1 or 2 switch and a volume control Push the power button to turn on the headphones An indicator light located on the headphones comes on If the light comes on but there is intermittent sound and or static on the headphones or if the indicator light does not come on the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information Switch the headphones to Off when not in use Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the overhead console The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle the headphones lose the audio signal To adjust the volume on the headphones use the volume control located on the right side For optimal audio performance the headphones must be worn correctly Headphones should be worn with the headband over the top of the head for best audio reception The symbol L Left appea
573. ting the Vehicle MesssageS 2 0 5 48 SICENING 4 cugeck aanne ai 9 4 Fluid Power 10 29 Wheel Adjustment 5 2 Wheel Controls 5 3 Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps Bulb Replacement 10 46 Storage Areas AMTES e cisccicircsacdvcnws cons 4 1 Center Console 4 2 Glove Box 000e eee 4 1 Instrument Panel 4 1 Stuck Vehicle 9 23 Sun Visors 000 eee 2 20 Sunroof 00 2 21 2 22 Switches Airbag On Off 3 37 SYMONS nes sac eresaeemseseceesns iv System Infotainment 7 1 Noise Control 10 38 T Tachometer 2 0 055 5 15 Tailgate 00200005 2 10 TaillampS 0 00008 10 46 Bulb Replacement 10 46 Text Telephone TTY Users 13 6 Theft Deterrent Systems 2 13 Immobilizer 2 13 Throttle Adjustable 9 35 MIMO oy vas dees rsa ceee aan 5 8 Tires Buying New Tires 10 77 Chains 2s fadeea sedans 10 83 Changing 10 86 Designations 10 61 Different Size 10 79 Dual Rotation 10 75 Full Size Spare 10 97 If a Tire Goes Flat 10 84 Inflation Monitor System 10 69 Inspection 085 10 73 Messages 2 2 0 5 5 49 Tires cont P
574. tion Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 10 11 Units Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between metric or English units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between METRIC or ENGLISH units All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected Instruments and Controls Tire Pressure If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either kilopascals kPa or pounds per square inch psi Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES kPa PSI LEFT RIGHT Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa PSI LEFT RIGHT If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to add pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display See Tire Pressure on page 10 66 and Tire Messages on page 5 49 for more information If the tire pressure display shows dashes inst
575. tion Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature Engine Oil Messages CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed When you change the engine oil be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message See Engine Oil Life System on page 10 11 for information on how to reset the message See Engine Oil on page 10 7 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 for more information ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE This message displays when the engine oil becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 5 17 Instruments and Controls OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive the vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 10 7 for more information This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced by your dealer
576. tion in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load Vehicles with P265 70R17 or P275 55R20 size tires require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the vehicle at speeds of 160 km h 100 mph or higher Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 20 kPa 3 psi above the recommended cold tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label 10 68 Vehicle Care When you end this high speed driving return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 and Tire Pressure on page 10 66 Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates
577. tion Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift lever position e The ignition should turn to LOCK OFF only when the shift lever is in P Park e The ignition key should come out only in LOCK OFF Contact your dealer if service is required Park Brake and P Park Mechanism Check Z WARNING When you are doing this check the vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and the transmission in N Neutral slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only e To check the P Park mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to P Park Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer if service is required Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 for more information on wiper blade inspection Replacement blades come
578. tion where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible Driving and Operating The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin If the vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough the vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance is longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by
579. tioning on page 8 1 or Climate Control Systems with Heater Only on page 8 4 If Equipped Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8 5 If Equipped X Power Take Off PTO Control If Equipped See Power Take Off PTO in the Duramax diesel supplement Index Y Passenger Airbag Off Control If Equipped See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 In Brief 1 5 NOTES 1 6 In Brief Instrument Panel Premium Version I JKLMNOP Q RS T U v U W Air Vents on page 8 11 Turn and Lane Change Signals on page 6 6 Windshield Wiper Washer on page 5 5 Instrument Cluster on page 5 13 Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 5 Shift Lever See Automatic Transmission on page 9 46 Tow Haul Mode on page 9 51 If Equipped Driver Information Center DIC Buttons See Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 Infotainment on page 7 1 Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6 1 Integrated Trailer Brake Controller If Equipped See Trailer Towing on page 9 95 oro 2 oD Dome Lamps on page 6 8 Automatic Transfer Case Control If Equipped See Four Wheel Drive on page 10 34 Data Link Connector DLC Out of View See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5 25 Hood on page 10 5 Parking Brake on page 9 69 Cruise Control on page 9 73 Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 5 2 Horn on page 5 5 Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 3 Climate Control Systems with Air Conditi
580. tions is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on the radio Infotainment System FM Stereo FM signals only reach about 16 to 65 km 10 to 40 miles Although the radio has a built in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference some static can occur especially around tall buildings or hills causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio If
581. tist and album ID3 tag information It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of files on the disc The radio may begin playing while it is scanning in the background When the scan is finished the disc begins playing files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist To listen to files by another artist press the softkey located below either arrow tab The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the artist displays To change from playback by artist to playback by album 1 Press the softkey below the Sort By tab 2 Press one of the softkeys below the Album tab from the sort screen 3 Press the softkey below the Back tab to return to the main music navigator screen The album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begin to play Once all songs from that album have played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the softkey below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback Using the DVD Player The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the remote co
582. tly remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss ina non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Notice Air fresheners contain solvents that may cause damage to plastics and painted surfaces Follow the manufacturer s instructions when using air fresheners in the vehicle If air freshener comes in contact with paint or a plastic surface blot immediately with a soft cloth Damage caused by using air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warrant Vehicle Care 10 115 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry ZN WARNING Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 10 116 Vehicle Care Floor Mats ZN WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed
583. to have another person assist with programming the transmitter See Universal Remote System on page 5 61 Sunroof Extended Cab The sunroof switch is located on the headliner above the rearview mirror Vent From the closed position press and hold the rear of the switch to vent the sunroof Open From the vent position press and hold the rear of the switch to open the sunroof Close Press and hold the front of the switch to close the sunroof The sunroof also has a roller sunshade that can be used to block the rays of the sun To open the sunshade press and unlatch it and roll it back To close pull it forward and latch it into the closed position Crew Cab A Open or Close B Vent There are two sunroof switches located in the overhead console above the rearview mirror Vent From the closed position press the rear of the passenger side switch B to vent the sunroof Manual Open Manual Close To open the sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver side switch A until the sunroof reaches the desired position Press and hold the front of the driver side switch to close it Express Open Express Close To express open the sunroof fully press and release the rear of the driver side switch B until the sunroof reaches the desired position To express close the sunroof fully press and release the front of the driver side switch Press the switch again to stop it The sunroof al
584. trailering conditions that Driving and Operating cause the vehicle s antilock brake or StabiliTrak systems to activate power sent to the trailer s brakes will be automatically adjusted to minimize trailer wheel lock up This does not imply that the trailer has StabiliTrak 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway Control TSC feature See Trailer Sway Control TSC on page 9 124 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist HSA feature See Hill Start Assist HSA on page 9 70 If the vehicle s brake antilock brake or StabiliTrak systems are not functioning properly the ITBC system may not be fully functional or may not function at all Make sure all of these systems are fully operational to ensure full functionality of the ITBC system The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle s electrical system Turning the ignition off will also turn off the ITBC system The ITBC system is fully functional only when the ignition is in ON or in RUN The ITBC system can only be used with trailers with electric brakes Z WARNING Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBC system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be an increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle trailer or other property An aftermarket controller may be available
585. trol rearward to recline e Tilt the top of the control forward to raise See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3 6 for more information In Brief 1 13 Memory Features On vehicles with the memory feature the controls on the driver door are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver seat outside mirrors and the adjustable throttle and brake pedals if the vehicle has this feature 1 14 In Brief Storing Memory Positions To save into memory 1 Adjust the driver seat and seatback recliner both outside mirrors and the throttle and brake pedals if available See Power Mirrors on page 2 16 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 9 35 for more information Not all mirrors and adjustable throttles and brake pedals will have the ability to save and recall their positions 2 Press and hold 1 until two beeps sound 3 Repeat for a second driver position using 2 To recall press and release 1 or 2 The vehicle must be in P Park A single beep will sound The seat outside mirrors and adjustable throttle and brake pedals if available will move to the position previously stored for the identified driver See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals under Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 4 and Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information Easy Exit Driver Seat This feature can move the seat rearward to allow extra
586. tting it in the trash pouring it on the ground or into sewers streams or bodies of water Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal This will help protect the environment and your health Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for more information on location The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done 10 23 Vehicle Care The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark If it is not there may be a leak in the cooling system 10 24 Vehicle Care How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank for Gasoline Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine see Cooling System in the Duramax Diesel Supplement for the proper coolant fill procedure ZN WARNING You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it wil
587. tton to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone Instruments and Controls 5 7 4 Press the trip fuel button until the vehicle heading for example N for North is displayed in the DIC Or if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for two seconds to select the next available variance zone Repeat this step until the appropriate variance zone is displayed 5 If calibration is necessary calibrate the compass See Compass Calibration Procedure following Compass Calibration The compass can be manually calibrated Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location such as an open parking lot where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings utility wires manhole covers or other industrial structures if possible If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display the compass should be calibrated If the DIC display does not show a heading for example N for North or the heading does not change after making turns there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount a magnetic emergency light magnetic note pad holder or any other magnetic item Turn off the vehicle move the magnetic item then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the compass 5 8 To calibrate the compas
588. tton was pressed one time the DVD player resumes playing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD Tips and Troubleshooting Chart cont d The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes The remote and or the headphones are lost The DVD is playing but there is no picture or sound Recommended Action Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Check for obstructions low batteries reception range and interference from cellular telephone towers or use a cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are correctly using the L left and R right on the headphones See your dealer for assistance Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD player Infotainment System 7 47 DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on the radio that is in the vehicle The video screen can display one of the following Disc Load Eject Error This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Ins
589. ty the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R or CD RW has been handled Handle them carefully Store CD Rs or CD RWs in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD or DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a disc is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the disc does not play properly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a disc while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Infotainment System 7 23 If the surface of a disc is soiled clean it with a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Audio Output Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at one time An audio source is defined as DVD slot CD slot XM FM AM front auxiliary jack USB port or rear auxiliary jack Press the button to turn the radio on The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers 7 24 Front seat passengers can listen to the radio AM FM or XM if equipped by pressing the BAND button or the DVD CD AUX button to select CD slot DVD slot front auxiliary input USB port or rear auxiliary input if available If a playback device is plugged i
590. ty Belt Care Keep belts clean and dry Z WARNING Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Replacing Safety Belt System Parts After a Crash Z WARNING A crash can damage the safety belt system in the vehicle A damaged safety belt system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure the safety belt systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible After a minor crash replacement of safety belts may not be necessary But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt system was not being used at the time of the crash Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags e A frontal airbag for the driver e A frontal airbag for the right front passenger The vehicle may have the following airbags e A
591. u still are unable to shift out of P Park 1 Ease the pressure on the shift lever 2 While holding down the brake pedal press the shift lever all the way into P Park 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you are still having a problem shifting then have the vehicle serviced soon Driving and Operating 9 43 Parking Over Things That Burn ZN WARNING Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 9 44 Active Fuel Management Vehicles with V8 engines may have Active Fuel Management This system allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its cylinders depending on the driving conditions When less power is required such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed the system will operate in the half cylinder mode allowing the vehicle to achieve better fuel economy When greater power demands are required such as accelerating from a stop passing or merging onto a freeway the system will maintain full cylinder operation If the vehicle has an Active Fuel Management indicator see Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 for more information on using this display Driving and Operating Engine Exhaust Z WARNING Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and
592. uages The available languages are ENGLISH default FRANCAIS French ESPANOL Spanish and NO CHANGE 4 Once the desired language is displayed release the trip odometer reset stem to set the choice Trip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either kilometers km or miles mi since the last reset for the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed 5 40 The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of kilometers km or miles mi driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 8 km 5 miles before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 8 km 5 miles As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 8 2 km 5 1 miles 8 4 km 5 2 miles etc
593. ual To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found Danger Warnings and Cautions Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death Z WARNING These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people Notice This means there is something that could result in property or vehicle damage This would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do not do this or Do not let this happen Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gauge or indicator CA This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they
594. ulder Belt If the vehicle is a regular cab then all seating positions in the vehicle have a lap shoulder belt If the vehicle is a crew or extended cab then all seating positions in the vehicle have a lap shoulder belt except for the center front passenger position if equipped which has a lap belt See Lap Belt Crew and Extended Cab on page 3 26 for more information The following instructions explain how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 2 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature may be engaged If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again Engaging the child restraint locking feature may affect the passenger sensing system if equipped See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 40 for more information Seats and Restraints 3 21 If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle when using the lap shoulder belt in a rear center seating position of a crew cab tilt the latch plate and keep pulling the safety belt until it can be buckled
595. unction Indicator Lamp comes on and stays on while the engine is running this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well the vehicle fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty 5 25 Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect the vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 10 3 This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle Dia
596. under or on top of the seat fabric could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 40 If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure U S and Canada on page 13 1 or Customer Satisfaction Procedure Mexico on page 13 3 If the vehicle has rollover roof rail airbags see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 10 79 for additional important information Seats and Restraints 3 47 Q A What if added a snow plow Will it keep the airbags from working properly We have designed our airbag systems to work properly under a wide range of conditions including snow plowing with vehicles that have the optional Snow Plow Prep Package RPO VYU But do not change or defeat the snow plow s tripping mechanism If you do it can damage your snow plow and your vehicle and it may cause an airbag inflation 3 48 Q Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can I find out whether this will affect my airbag system A If you have
597. unlock the doors a Lock Press to lock the doors Delayed Locking The vehicle may have the delayed locking feature When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door is open the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition This feature can be programmed using the Driver Information Center DIC See Delay Door Lock under Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 Automatic Door Locks The vehicle may have an automatic lock unlock feature This feature can be programmed using the Driver Information Center DIC See Vehicle Personalization with DIC Buttons on page 5 52 for more information on DIC programming Keys Doors and Windows 2 9 Lockout Protection If the driver side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock If the passenger side power door lock switch is pressed when the front passenger door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the front passenger door will unlock Safety Locks The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent passeng
598. unroof can be fully opened either manually or by using the express open feature To open manually press the rear of the switch A to the first detent and hold until the sunroof has reached the desired position To open using express open press the rear of the switch to the second detent and release The sunroof will move to the full open position To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time 2 21 Close From the vent or open position press and hold the front of the switch A to close the sunroof The sunroof also has a roller sunshade that can be used to block the rays of the sun The roller sunshade can be manually operated with the sunroof in an open or closed position To open the sunshade press and unlatch it and roll it back To close pull it forward and latch it into the closed position When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed 2 22 Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the track This could cause an issue with sunroof operation noise or plugging the water drainage system Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose debris Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using a clean cloth mild soap and water Do not remove grease from the sunroof Keys Doors and Windows Sunroof Crew Cab A Open or Close B Vent On vehicles with a sun
599. unusual noise is heard A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark Vehicle Care 10 29 What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 Always use the proper fluid Notice Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 Washer Fluid What to Use When windshield washer fluid needs to be added be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing 10 30 Vehicle Care Adding Washer Fluid The vehicle has a low washer fluid message on the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
600. ur body Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way Seats and Restraints 3 17 ZN WARNING You can be seriously hurt if the lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs 3 18 Seats and Restraints Q What is wrong with this Q What is wrong with this Z WARNING You can be seriously injured if the belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle the belt into the buckle nearest you A The belt is buckled in the wrong A The belt is over an armrest buckle Z WARNING You can be seriously injured if the belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests Q What is wrong with this A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm
601. ur seconds until a double beep sounds to scan the preset stations The station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode gt SEEK Press to seek the next radio station Press and hold for a few seconds until a beep sounds to scan for radio stations in ascending order press the KI SEEK button again to stop scanning radio stations The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band For the AM FM Radio press and hold the Dl SEEK for four seconds until a double beep sounds to scan the preset stations The station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode lt 1 REV Press to manually tune to a radio station in descending order gt gt FWD Press to manually tune to a radio station in ascending order FAV Favorites Press to select different favorites pages for stored radio stations Storing Radio Stations Drivers are encouraged to store the radio station while the vehicle is parked see Defensive Driving on page 9 2 Tune to stored radio stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature Radios that have a FAV button store radio stations as favorites Up to 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six softkeys below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the FAV button Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations avai
602. ure The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback received when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 3 for more information Instruments and Controls Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 5 55 DELAY DOOR LOCK On vehicles with a crew cab this feature turns the delayed door locks on or off When locking the doors with the power door lock switch and a door is open this feature will delay locking the doors until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hea
603. us damage or every 10 years whichever occurs first Replace if needed 11 8 Service and Maintenance Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine If the vehicle has a diesel engine and or an Allison Transmission see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX Diesel manual Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification Engine Oil mark Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos certification mark of the proper viscosity grade See Engine Oil on page 10 7 Engine Coolant 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL coolant 9 See Engine Coolant on page 10 22 in Canada 89021320 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 Key Lock Cylinders in Canada 10953474 Service and Maintenance 11 9 oop Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol GM Part No 12346293 in Canada 992723 Floor Shift Linkage or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Front Axle 1500 Series SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant GM Part No 89
604. use a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Vehicle Care 10 33 Notice Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle If you do wash it off immediately 10 34 Vehicle Care Battery If the vehicle is a Hybrid see the Hybrid Supplement for more information This vehicle has a maintenance free battery or batteries Refer to the replacement number on the original battery label when a new battery is needed See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for battery location Z DANGER Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage Z WARNING Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 10 98 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage Remove the black negative cable from the battery to ke
605. used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provided with the vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place well off the road if possible Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 5 Z WARNING Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put an automatic transmission shift lever in P Park or shift a manual transmission to 1 First or R Reverse Continued WARNING Continued 3 If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral 4 Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not move put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle Vehicle Care 10 85
606. ut Power Outlets Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cell phone MP3 player etc The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets located below the climate control system or may have one accessory power outlet and one cigarette lighter The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the receptacle closest to the driver There may be another accessory power outlet in the rear cargo area If the vehicle has a floor console there is an accessory power outlet inside the storage bin and one on the rear of the floor console Remove the cover to access and replace when not in use The accessory power outlets are powered even when the ignition is in LOCK OFF Continuing to use power outlets while the ignition is in LOCK OFF may cause the vehicle s battery to run down Z WARNING Power is always supplied to the outlets Do not leave electrical equipment plugged in when the vehicle is not in use because the vehicle could catch fire and cause injury or death Notice Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating Instruments and Controls Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle or adapter fuses
607. ut like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can Engine Compartment Fuse Block If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the Duramax Diesel supplement for more information If the vehicle is a hybrid see the hybrid supplement for more information The Engine Compartment Fuse Block is located in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle Lift the cover to access the fuse block Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component To remove fuses hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out FAN HI FAN LO C1 c23 c32 C43C5I 58 59 C63 cel coD gt C103 C129 1 C149 FAN ONTRL enal LOHD C3 Ceac cag Wy ca c23 ca C24 C25JC26 C27 C28 C29 COICC CREN N fwn FUEL Pr E c32 CMPRSR g TRN 33 c TPC 36 sS 37 C909 999 er C403 G 1P C413 C42 C4330 44 C45 C48 C47 C48 49 50951 52353 REAR DEFOG C54 C55 RUN ing CRNK Electronic Suspension Control Automatic Level Control Exhaust Fuses Usage 3 Left Trailer Stop Turn Lamp 4 Engine Controls Engine Control Module Throttle Control Vehicle Care 10 51 Trailer Brake Controller Front Washer Oxygen Sensor Antilock Brakes System 2 Trailer Back
608. utton when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete Press and release the same button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete 5 63 To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 through 5 choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what was used for the garage door opener If these instructions do not work the garage door opener is probably a Fixed Code unit Follow the programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door opener 5 64 Instruments and Controls Programming Universal Home Remote Fixed Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to www learcar2u com Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before starting Otherwise the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated To program up to three devices 1 To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit remove the battery cover on the hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener motor If there is a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above the garage door opener is a
609. vehicle has them If the vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing the Vehicle on page 10 103 Recovery Hooks Z WARNING These hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back _ C Notice Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle you can use them if you are stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving Vehicle Load Limits It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label Driving and Operating Z WARNING Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles This could cause loss of control and a crash Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle
610. w a 1 Locate the transmission dipstick handle with this graphic which is located at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for more information on location 2 Flip the handle up then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 3 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again Vehicle Care 10 15 Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11 8 Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If readings are still inconsistent contact the dealer 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD area below the cross hatched area for a cold check or in the HOT or cross hatched area for a hot check Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to Recommended Fluids an
611. w the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint If you have no other choice but to install a rear facing child restraint in this seat make sure the airbag is off once the child restraint has been installed When the airbag off switch has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator in the airbag off light should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle See Airbag On Off Light on page 5 21 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary Pull the shoulder belt all the way l out of the retractor to set the lock When the retractor lock is set the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Try to pu
612. wane 7 50 Climate Controls Climate Control Systems Air Vents 54 Driving and Operating Driving Information Starting and Operating Engine Exhaust Automatic Transmission Drive Systems Brak Sa evicccrdadtonacends Ride Control Systems Cruise Control Object Detection Systems FUCh Ay tase bere gexis ait TOWING pened tenes nine 3 Conversions and 2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M Vehicle Care 10 1 General Information 10 2 Vehicle Checks 10 4 Headlamp Aiming 10 42 Bulb Replacement 10 44 Electrical System 10 49 Wheels and Tires 10 57 Jump Starting 10 98 TOWING entira cedar 10 103 Appearance Care 10 108 Service and Maintenance 11 1 General Information 11 1 Scheduled Maintenance 11 2 Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Parts 11 8 Maintenance Records 11 12 Technical Data 12 1 Vehicle Identification 12 1 Vehicle Data 12 2 Customer Information 13 1 Customer Information 13 1 Reporting Safety Defects 13 16 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 2 000 13 17 The names logos emblems slogans vehicle model names and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including but not limited to GM the
613. way See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 for more information including important safety information 3 40 Seats and Restraints PASSENGER 24 AIR BAG OFF E HON United States Canada and Mexico To turn the right front passenger airbag on again insert the ignition key into the switch push in and move the switch to the on position The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled may inflate See Airbag On Off Light on page 5 21 for more information Passenger Sensing System If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position unless there is an airbag off switch located in the glove box If there is an airbag off switch the vehicle does not have a passenger sensing system See Airbag On Off Switch on page 3 37 for more information The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is started In addition if the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position the label on the vehicle s sun visors refers to ADVANCED AIRBAGS f PASSENGER AIRBAG Lor OFF ON Be United States Ai bo Canada and Mexico The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check If you are using remote start to start the ve
614. ways drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water Z WARNING Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Driving and Operating 9 19 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under the vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When the vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet 9 20 Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include e Allow extra following distance e Pass with caution e Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape e Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled e Have good tir
615. with a winch be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck but you will want to know how to use it properly Driving and Operating Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off roading requires some new and different skills Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds Use your arms hands feet and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to control the speed At higher speeds e You approach things faster and have less time to react e There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles e The vehicle has more bounce when driving over obstacles e More braking distance is needed especially on an unpaved surface Z WARNING When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you are driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain Be familiar with
616. ximum pressure needed to support that load For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure on page 10 66 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 Vehicle Care 10 59 A Light Truck LT Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail 10 60 Vehicle Care B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C Dual Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure on page 10 66 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 25 D DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards E Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufa
617. xit Lighting sisi cdsneeedeesues 6 9 Extender Safety Belt 3 27 Exterior Lamp Controls 6 1 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder 6 3 Fast Idle System Engine Air Cleaner Flashers Hazard Warning Four Wheel Drive Transfer Case Power Steering Fog Lamps Bulb Replacement 6 6 Folding Mirrors 2 16 Four Wheel Drive 10 34 9 54 Four Wheel Drive Light 5 29 Front Axle 2 0055 10 36 Front Fog Lamps Ee n ATE EE TEET 5 32 Front Seats Adjustment 3 3 Heated sic netasue reeds seaetne 3 8 FUG Ae EA REE 9 84 Additives 05 9 86 E85 85 Ethanol 9 87 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 9 90 Filling the Tank 9 88 Fuels in Foreign Countries 9 86 Gasoline Specifications 9 85 GallGe eis devieinernewiasands 5 15 Low Fuel Warning Light 5 31 i 6 INDEX Fuel cont Management Active 9 44 Recommended 9 84 Requirements California 9 85 System Messages 5 46 Fuel Economy DIVING ide arnei aena nes 1 35 Full Size Spare Tire 10 97 Fuses Engine Compartment Fuse Block 10 50 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0005 10 50 Instrument Panel Fuse Blok Cane 10 54 G Garage Door Opener 5 61 Programming 5 61 Gasoline Specifications
618. y of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station Lock Out Service Service to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar For security reasons the driver must present identification before this service is given Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway Tow to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty service or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand mud or snow Flat Tire Change Service to change a flat tire with the spare tire The spare tire if equipped must be in good condition and properly inflated It is the owner s responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty Battery Jump Start Service to jump start a dead battery Trip Routing Service Detailed maps of North America when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route Additional travel information is also available Allow three weeks for delivery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years 160 000 km 100 000 miles Powertrain warranty period Items considered are hotel meals and rental car Customer Information 13 9 Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance Impound towing caused by violation of a
619. y to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Vehicle Care 10 81 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on the vehicle were aligned and balanced careful
620. yable in U S funds 13 16 Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign Customer Information However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue S E Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that the vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately and notify General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada
621. ydra Matic 6 Speed Transmission The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode The Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle s transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of gears Driving and Operating To use this feature do the following 1 Move the shift lever to M Manual Mode 2 Press the plus minus buttons located on the steering column shift lever to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions When M Manual Mode is selected a number displays next to the M indicating the current gear This number is the highest gear that can be used However the vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions This means that all gears below that number are available When 5 Fifth is selected 1 First through 5 Fifth gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle but 6 Sixth cannot be used until the plus minus button located on the steering column lever is used to change to the gear Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection Mode is active See Tow Haul Mode on page 9 51 While using Range Selection Mode Cruise Control and the Tow Haul Mode can be used If the vehicle has an exhaust brake it can also be used but will not automatically downshift the transmission See Exhaust Brake in the Duramax Diesel supplement Notice Spinning the tires or holdin
622. your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it or if you are driving in extreme off road conditions and require more wheel spin See f the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9 23 To turn the StabiliTrak system on or off see StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 5 48 There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear e Ifthe vehicle is overheating which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time e Ifthe brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 27 e Ifthe stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions e Ifan engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See your dealer e Ifthe vehicle is shifted into 4LO The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present Instruments and Controls TRACTION CONTROL OFF If the vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when the Traction Control System TCS is turned off Adjust your driving accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 9 70 for more information Airbag System Messages SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your dealer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 20 and Airbag System o
623. ys on until the ignition is turned off e There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes When this message displays power is no longer available to the trailer brakes As soon as it is safe to do so carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on This message clears if the trailer is reconnected This message also clears if you acknowledge it If this message still displays either the vehicle or the trailer needs service See your dealer See Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing Equipment on page 9 112 for more information ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when ice conditions are possible Instruments and Controls TRAILER CONNECTED On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system this message displays briefly when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle This message clears itself after several seconds This message also clears if you acknowledge it After this message clears the TRAILER GAIN OUTPUT display appears in the DIC See TRAILER GAIN OUTPUT under Driver Information Center DIC on page 5 33 and Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing Equipment on page 9 112 for more information 5 51 Washer Fluid Messages WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID This message dis

2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents